Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisA functional discussion of the crop selection process for biomass energy The Selection Process of Biomass Materials for the Production of Bio-fuels and Co-firing provides a detailed examination and analysis for a number of energy crops and their use as a source for generating electricity and for the production of bio-fuels. Renowned renewable energy expert and consultant Dr. Najib Altawell begins with the fundamentals of bio-fuels and co-firing and moves on to the main feature, which is the methodology that assists energy scientists and engineers to arrive at the most suitable biomass materials tailored to each company's business and economic environments and objectives. This methodology provides a framework whereby power-generating companies can insert their own values for each factor, whether business factor (BF) or scientific & technical factors (S&T) or both simultaneously. The methodology provides a list of factors related to the biomass energy businTrade Review“Because of its focus on practical data and applications, the book is also accessible for general readers who may or may not have a technical or scientific background.” (Landtechnik, 1 September 2014)Table of ContentsPreface xvAcknowledgments xvii Abbreviations xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Why This Book? 1 1.2 The Book Structure 2 1.2.1 Introduction 2 1.2.2 Structure 3 1.3 Energy Utilization 5 1.4 The Need for Effective Biomass Utilization 7 1.5 Renewable Energy Impact on Biomass Economy 7 1.6 Summary 9 References 10 2 Background 13 2.1 Renewable Energy: A Brief Outlook 13 2.1.1 Introduction 13 2.1.2 Old Graphs 15 2.2 Wind 16 2.3 Water 17 2.4 Geothermal 17 2.5 Solar 19 2.5.1 Solar Cells 20 2.5.2 Solar Water Heating 20 2.5.3 Solar Furnaces 20 2.6 Biomass 21 2.7 Biomass as a Source of Energy 24 2.7.1 Energy Crops 27 2.7.2 Examples of Energy Crops 29 2.7.3 Biomass Utilization 30 2.7.4 Biomass and Coal Components 31 2.7.5 Types of Energy Crop Needed 32 2.7.6 Biomass Energy Infl uencing Factors 33 2.7.7 CharacteristicsCo-fi ring Properties and Testing Method 35 2.8 Biomass Applications 36 2.8.1 Bio-fuels 36 2.8.2 Electricity Generation 37 2.8.3 Heat, Steam, and CHP 37 2.8.4 Combustible Gas 38 2.8.5 Additional Bio-energy Technologies 41 2.9 Co-fi ring 42 2.9.1 Barriers for Biomass Co-firing 43 2.9.2 Additional Challenges for Co-firing 44 2.9.3 Further Advancement in Co-firing Engineering 44 2.9.4 Promoting Co-firing 45 2.10 System Engineering 46 2.11 Biomass Conversion Systems 48 2.12 Energy Crops Scheme (U.K.) 49 2.13 Renewable Obligation Certificate (ROC) (U.K.) 52 2.14 Climate Change Levy Exemption Certificate (LEC) (U.K.) 52 2.15 Conclusion 53 References 56 3 Co-firing Issues 61 3.1 Technical and Engineering Issues 61 3.1.1 Introduction 61 3.1.2 Hardware and Biomass Materials 62 3.2 Technical and Hardware Issues 62 3.3 Milling 65 3.4 Fuel Mixing 66 3.5 The Combustion System 71 3.5.1 Boilers 71 3.6 By-products 75 3.6.1 Ash Formation and Deposition 75 3.7 Degradation 76 3.8 Conclusion 77 References 80 4 Samples 83 4.1 Selected Samples 83 4.1.1 Introduction 83 4.2 Samples General Descriptions 84 4.2.1 The Reference Samples 84 4.3 Main Samples 91 4.3.1 Introduction 91 4.3.2 Crops Basic Composition 92 4.3.3 Crops and Oil Sources 93 4.3.4 Oil Quality and Standard 94 4.3.5 Crops Photosynthesis 94 4.3.6 Energy Crops Environmental Effect 95 4.3.7 Corn (Zea mays L.) 96 4.3.8 Wheat (Triticum aestivum L.) 103 4.3.9 Miscanthus (Miscanthus sinensis) 108 4.3.10 Rice (Oryza sativa) 115 4.3.11 Barley (Hordeum vulgare subsp.) 121 4.3.12 Sunfl ower (Helianthus annuus) 126 4.3.13 Niger Seed (Guizotia abyssinica) 134 4.3.14 Rapeseed (Brassica napus) 141 4.4 Conclusion 147 4.4.1 Samples Selection 148 4.4.2 The Next Step 150 References 151 5 Methodology: Part 1 161 5.1 Methodology Approach 161 5.1.1 Introduction 161 5.2 The Pyramid 162 5.3 The Decision Tree 164 5.3.1 Steps for the Biomass Fuel 164 5.3.2 Three Numbers 165 5.4 Methodology Terms and Defi nition for BF and S&T 166 5.4.1 BF 166 5.4.2 S&T 166 5.5 BF and S&T Data 166 5.5.1 Why Are Data for the BF and S&T Needed? 166 5.5.2 How Are Data for the BF Obtained? 168 5.5.3 How Are Data for the S&T Obtained? 170 5.6 Scoring System 170 5.6.1 The Method 170 5.6.2 Calculating the Score When the Reference Sample Is Set in a Positive Mode 172 5.6.3 Calculating the Score When the Reference Sample Is Set in a Negative Mode 172 5.6.4 Boundaries for S&T 174 5.6.5 Boundaries for BF 174 5.6.6 Reference Sample Boundaries 174 5.6.7 Biomass Boundaries 175 5.6.8 Scoring Plan for BF 176 5.7 Methodology Survey 177 5.8 The Survey Method 178 5.8.1 Aim 178 5.8.2 Objective 178 5.8.3 What Is the Survey Looking For? 178 5.8.4 Survey Methodology 178 5.8.5 Mode 179 5.8.6 Mode Effect 179 5.8.7 Questionnaire Design 179 5.8.8 Sample Design 179 5.8.9 Sample Size 180 5.8.10 Pretesting and Piloting 180 5.8.11 Reducing and Dealing with Nonresponse 180 5.9 Conclusion 181 References 183 6 Methodology: Part 2 185 6.1 Introduction 185 6.1.1 Biomass Samples and Methodology 186 6.2 S&T Values Analysis 186 6.3 S&T Factor Evaluations 187 6.3.1 Energy Factor (EF) 187 6.3.2 Combustion Index Factor (CIF) 190 6.3.3 Volatile Matter Factor (VMF) 193 6.3.4 Moisture Factor (MF) 195 6.3.5 Ash Factor (AF) 196 6.3.6 Density Factor (DF) 199 6.3.7 Nitrogen Emission (Nx) Factor (NEF) 201 6.4 S&T Allocation Results 203 6.4.1 Introduction 203 6.4.2 The Priority List 204 6.5 Conclusion 206 References 208 7 Methodology: Part 3 211 7.1 BF Percentage Value Selection 211 7.1.1 Introduction 211 7.1.2 BF Subjective and Objective Factors 212 7.1.3 Percentage Allocation for BF 212 7.1.4 BF Values and Headlines 213 7.1.5 Biomass Energy Commercialization and BF 213 7.2 BF Values Analysis 215 7.3 BF Evaluations 216 7.3.1 System Factor (SF) 217 7.3.2 Approach Factor (AF) 218 7.3.3 Baseline Methodology Factor (BMF) 219 7.3.4 Business Viability Factor (BVF) 219 7.3.5 Applicability Factor (APF) 220 7.3.6 Land and Water Issues Factor (LWIF) 223 7.3.7 Supply Factor (SUF) 224 7.3.8 Quality Factor (QF) 225 7.3.9 Emission Factor 226 7.4 BF Data 228 7.4.1 Introduction 228 7.4.2 The Priority List 230 7.5 Conclusion 235 References 237 8 Results: Part 1 239 8.1 Statistical Data and Errors 239 8.1.1 Introduction 239 8.2 Methodology Level Value (Boundary Level Scoring Value) 241 8.3 Calculating Standard Deviation and Relative Error 242 8.3.1 S&T Factors 243 8.3.2 Business Factors (BF) 246 8.3.3 Methodology Standard Deviation for S&T 249 8.3.4 Methodology Standard Deviation for BF 250 8.3.5 Methodology Standard Deviation 251 8.4 Analysis 251 8.5 Conclusion 255 References 257 9 Results: Part 2 259 9.1 Data and Methodology Application 259 9.1.1 Introduction 259 9.2 Tests 260 9.2.1 Experimental Tests 260 9.3 S&T Samples Data and Reports (Results) 265 9.3.1 Fossil Fuel 265 9.3.2 Biomass Materials 266 9.4 BF Samples Reports Examples (Results) 277 9.4.1 Coal BF Data (Altawell, GSTF, 2012) 277 9.4.2 Rapeseed BF Report 278 9.4.3 Black Sunfl ower Seed BF Report 278 9.4.4 Niger Seed BF Report 279 9.4.5 Apple Pruning BF Report 280 9.4.6 Striped Sunflower Seed BF Report 281 9.5 The Final Biomass Samples 282 9.5.1 S&T Results 282 9.5.2 BF Results 284 9.6 Samples Final Fitness 285 9.7 Discussion and Analysis 289 9.8 Conclusion 294 References 296 10 Economic Factors 297 10.1 Biomass Fuel Economic Factors and SFS 297 10.1.1 Introduction 297 10.2 Economic Factors 298 10.3 Biomass Business 300 10.3.1 Step 1 300 10.3.2 Step 2 301 10.3.3 Step 3 302 10.3.4 Step 4 304 10.4 Biomass Fuel Supply Chain 305 10.5 The Demand for a New Biomass Fuel 306 10.6 The SFS Economic Value Scenario 307 10.7 Discussion 308 10.8 Conclusion 310 References 312 11 Conclusion 315 11.1 General Conclusion 315 11.2 Methodology (REA1) and Applications 316 11.3 Why Biomass? 316 11.4 Co-firing and Power Generating 318 11.5 The New Biomass Fuel (SFS) 318 11.6 The Future of Co-firing and Biomass Energy 319 11.7 Final Results and Final Conclusion 320 11.8 Positive Outlook 320 11.9 What Next? 321 References 321 Index 323

Read more less

Book SynopsisRecent advances in science and technology have made modern computing and engineering systems more powerful and sophisticated than ever. The increasing complexity and scale imply that system reliability problems not only continue to be a challenge but also require more efficient models and solutions.Table of ContentsPreface xiiiNomenclature xix1 Introduction 11.1 Historical Developments 11.2 Reliability and Safety Applications 42 Basic Reliability Theory and Models 72.1 Probabiltiy Concepts 72.2 Reliability Measures 142.3 Fault Tree Analysis 173 Fundamentals of Binary Decision Diagrams 333.1 Preliminaries 343.2 Basic Concepts 343.3 BDD Construction 353.4 BDD Evaluation 423.5 BDD-Based Software Package 444 Application of BDD to Binary-State Systems 454.1 Network Reliability Analysis 454.2 Event Tree Analysis 474.3 Failure Frequency Analysis 504.4 Importance Measures and Analysis 544.5 Modularization Methods 604.6 Non-Coherent Systems 604.7 Disjoint Failures 654.8 Dependent Failures 685 Phased-Mission Systems 735.1 System Description 745.2 Rules of Phase Algebra 755.3 BDD-Based Method for PMS Analysis 765.4 Mission Performance Analysis 816 Multi-State Systems 856.1 Assumptions 866.2 An Illustrative Example 866.3 MSS Representation 876.4 Multi-State BDD (MBDD) 906.5 Logarithmically-Encoded BDD (LBDD) 946.6 Multi-State Multi-Valued Decision Diagrams (MMDD) 986.7 Performance Evaluation and Benchmarks 1026.8 Summary 1177 Fault Tolerant Systems and Coverage Models 1197.1 Basic Types 1207.2 Imperfect Coverage Model 1227.3 Applications to Binary-State Systems 1237.4 Applications to Multi-State Systems 1297.5 Applications to Phased-Mission Systems 1337.6 Summary 1398 Shared Decision Diagrams 1438.1 Multi-Rooted Decision Diagrams 1448.2 Multi-Terminal Decision Diagrams 1488.3 Performance Study on Multi-State Systems 1518.4 Application to Phased-Mission Systems 1638.5 Application to Multi-State k-out-of-n Systems 1688.6 Importance Measures 1768.7 Failure Frequency Based Measures 1808.8 Summary 183Conclusions 185References 187Index 205

Read more less

Book SynopsisA guide to the essential techniques for designing and building dependable distributed systems. Instead of covering a broad range of research works for each dependability strategy, it focuses on only a selected few, explaining each in depth, usually with a comprehensive set of examples.Table of ContentsList of Figures xiiiList of Tables xxiAcknowledgements xxiiiPreface xxvReferences xxviii1 Introduction to Dependable Distributed Computing 11.1 Basic Concepts and Terminologies 21.2 Means to Achieve Dependability 9References 132 Logging and Checkpointing 152.1 System Model 162.2 Checkpoint-Based Protocols 212.3 Log Based Protocols 34References 543 Recovery-Oriented Computing 573.1 System Model 593.2 Fault Detection and Localization 623.3 Microreboot 833.4 Overcoming Operator Errors 87References 934 Data and Service Replication 974.1 Service Replication 994.2 Data Replication 1054.3 Optimistic Replication 1114.4 CAP Theorem 131References 1385 Group Communication Systems 1415.1 System Model 1435.2 Sequencer Based Group Communication System 1465.3 Sender Based Group Communication System 1605.4 Vector Clock Based Group Communication System 186References 1916 Consensus and the Paxos Algorithms 1936.1 The Consensus Problem 6.2 The Paxos Algorithm 1966.3 Multi-Paxos 2066.4 Dynamic Paxos 2106.5 Fast Paxos 2216.6 Implementations of the Paxos Family Algorithms 229References 2367 Byzantine Fault Tolerance 2397.1 The Byzantine Generals Problem 2407.2 Practical Byzantine Fault Tolerance 2557.3 Fast Byzantine Agreement 2717.4 Speculative Byzantine Fault Tolerance 271References 284

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical, step-by-step guide to designing world-class, high availability systems using both classical and DFSS reliability techniques Whether designing telecom, aerospace, automotive, medical, financial, or public safety systems, every engineer aims for the utmost reliability and availability in the systems he, or she, designs. But between the dream of world-class performance and reality falls the shadow of complexities that can bedevil even the most rigorous design process. While there are an array of robust predictive engineering tools, there has been no single-source guide to understanding and using them . . . until now. Offering a case-based approach to designing, predicting, and deploying world-class high-availability systems from the ground up, this book brings together the best classical and DFSS reliability techniques. Although it focuses on technical aspects, this guide considers the business and market constraints that require that systems be designTable of ContentsPreface xiii List of Abbreviations xvii 1. Introduction 1 2. Initial Considerations for Reliability Design 3 2.1 The Challenge 3 2.2 Initial Data Collection 3 2.3 Where Do We Get MTBF Information? 5 2.4 MTTR and Identifying Failures 6 2.5 Summary 7 3. A Game of Dice: An Introduction to Probability 8 3.1 Introduction 8 3.2 A Game of Dice 10 3.3 Mutually Exclusive and Independent Events 10 3.4 Dice Paradox Problem and Conditional Probability 15 3.5 Flip a Coin 21 3.6 Dice Paradox Revisited 23 3.7 Probabilities for Multiple Dice Throws 24 3.8 Conditional Probability Revisited 27 3.9 Summary 29 4. Discrete Random Variables 30 4.1 Introduction 30 4.2 Random Variables 31 4.3 Discrete Probability Distributions 33 4.4 Bernoulli Distribution 34 4.5 Geometric Distribution 35 4.6 Binomial Coeffi cients 38 4.7 Binomial Distribution 40 4.8 Poisson Distribution 43 4.9 Negative Binomial Random Variable 48 4.10 Summary 50 5. Continuous Random Variables 51 5.1 Introduction 51 5.2 Uniform Random Variables 52 5.3 Exponential Random Variables 53 5.4 Weibull Random Variables 54 5.5 Gamma Random Variables 55 5.6 Chi-Square Random Variables 59 5.7 Normal Random Variables 59 5.8 Relationship between Random Variables 60 5.9 Summary 61 6. Random Processes 62 6.1 Introduction 62 6.2 Markov Process 63 6.3 Poisson Process 63 6.4 Deriving the Poisson Distribution 64 6.5 Poisson Interarrival Times 69 6.6 Summary 71 7. Modeling and Reliability Basics 72 7.1 Introduction 72 7.2 Modeling 75 7.3 Failure Probability and Failure Density 77 7.4 Unreliability, F(t) 78 7.5 Reliability, R(t) 79 7.6 MTTF 79 7.7 MTBF 79 7.8 Repairable System 80 7.9 Nonrepairable System 80 7.10 MTTR 80 7.11 Failure Rate 81 7.12 Maintainability 81 7.13 Operability 81 7.14 Availability 82 7.15 Unavailability 84 7.16 Five 9s Availability 85 7.17 Downtime 85 7.18 Constant Failure Rate Model 85 7.19 Conditional Failure Rate 88 7.20 Bayes’s Theorem 94 7.21 Reliability Block Diagrams 98 7.22 Summary 107 8. Discrete-Time Markov Analysis 110 8.1 Introduction 110 8.2 Markov Process Defined 112 8.3 Dynamic Modeling 116 8.4 Discrete Time Markov Chains 116 8.5 Absorbing Markov Chains 123 8.6 Nonrepairable Reliability Models 129 8.7 Summary 140 9. Continuous-Time Markov Systems 141 9.1 Introduction 141 9.2 Continuous-Time Markov Processes 141 9.3 Two-State Derivation 143 9.4 Steps to Create a Markov Reliability Model 147 9.5 Asymptotic Behavior (Steady-State Behavior) 148 9.6 Limitations of Markov Modeling 154 9.7 Markov Reward Models 154 9.8 Summary 155 10. Markov Analysis: Nonrepairable Systems 156 10.1 Introduction 156 10.2 One Component, No Repair 156 10.3 Nonrepairable Systems: Parallel System with No Repair 165 10.4 Series System with No Repair: Two Identical Components 172 10.5 Parallel System with Partial Repair: Identical Components 176 10.6 Parallel System with No Repair: Nonidentical Components 183 10.7 Summary 192 11. Markov Analysis: Repairable Systems 193 11.1 Repairable Systems 193 11.2 One Component with Repair 194 11.3 Parallel System with Repair: Identical Component Failure and Repair Rates 204 11.4 Parallel System with Repair: Different Failure and Repair Rates 217 11.5 Summary 239 12. Analyzing Confidence Levels 240 12.1 Introduction 240 12.2 pdf of a Squared Normal Random Variable 240 12.3 pdf of the Sum of Two Random Variables 243 12.4 pdf of the Sum of Two Gamma Random Variables 245 12.5 pdf of the Sum of n Gamma Random Variables 246 12.6 Goodness-of-Fit Test Using Chi-Square 249 12.7 Confidence Levels 257 12.8 Summary 264 13. Estimating Reliability Parameters 266 13.1 Introduction 266 13.2 Bayes’ Estimation 268 13.3 Example of Estimating Hardware MTBF 273 13.4 Estimating Software MTBF 273 13.5 Revising Initial MTBF Estimates and Tradeoffs 274 13.6 Summary 277 14. Six Sigma Tools for Predictive Engineering 278 14.1 Introduction 278 14.2 Gathering Voice of Customer (VOC) 279 14.3 Processing Voice of Customer 281 14.4 Kano Analysis 282 14.5 Analysis of Technical Risks 284 14.6 Quality Function Deployment (QFD) or House of Quality 284 14.7 Program Level Transparency of Critical Parameters 287 14.8 Mapping DFSS Techniques to Critical Parameters 287 14.9 Critical Parameter Management (CPM) 287 14.10 First Principles Modeling 289 14.11 Design of Experiments (DOE) 289 14.12 Design Failure Modes and Effects Analysis (DFMEA) 289 14.13 Fault Tree Analysis 290 14.14 Pugh Matrix 290 14.15 Monte Carlo Simulation 291 14.16 Commercial DFSS Tools 291 14.17 Mathematical Prediction of System Capability instead of “Gut Feel” 293 14.18 Visualizing System Behavior Early in the Life Cycle 297 14.19 Critical Parameter Scorecard 297 14.20 Applying DFSS in Third-Party Intensive Programs 298 14.21 Summary 300 15. Design Failure Modes and Effects Analysis 302 15.1 Introduction 302 15.2 What Is Design Failure Modes and Effects Analysis (DFMEA)? 302 15.3 Definitions 303 15.4 Business Case for DFMEA 303 15.5 Why Conduct DFMEA? 305 15.6 When to Perform DFMEA 305 15.7 Applicability of DFMEA 306 15.8 DFMEA Template 306 15.9 DFMEA Life Cycle 312 15.10 The DFMEA Team 324 15.11 DFMEA Advantages and Disadvantages 327 15.12 Limitations of DFMEA 328 15.13 DFMEAs, FTAs, and Reliability Analysis 328 15.14 Summary 330 16. Fault Tree Analysis 331 16.1 What Is Fault Tree Analysis? 331 16.2 Events 332 16.3 Logic Gates 333 16.4 Creating a Fault Tree 335 16.5 Fault Tree Limitations 339 16.6 Summary 339 17. Monte Carlo Simulation Models 340 17.1 Introduction 340 17.2 System Behavior over Mission Time 344 17.3 Reliability Parameter Analysis 344 17.4 A Worked Example 348 17.5 Component and System Failure Times Using Monte Carlo Simulations 359 17.6 Limitations of Using Nontime-Based Monte Carlo Simulations 361 17.7 Summary 365 18. Updating Reliability Estimates: Case Study 367 18.1 Introduction 367 18.2 Overview of the Base Station Controller—Data Only (BSC-DO) System 367 18.3 Downtime Calculation 368 18.4 Calculating Availability from Field Data Only 371 18.5 Assumptions Behind Using the Chi-Square Methodology 372 18.6 Fault Tree Updates from Field Data 372 18.7 Summary 376 19. Fault Management Architectures 377 19.1 Introduction 377 19.2 Faults, Errors, and Failures 378 19.3 Fault Management Design 381 19.4 Repair versus Recovery 382 19.5 Design Considerations for Reliability Modeling 383 19.6 Architecture Techniques to Improve Availability 383 19.7 Redundancy Schemes 384 19.8 Summary 395 20 Application of DFMEA to Real-Life Example 397 20.1 Introduction 397 20.2 Cage Failover Architecture Description 397 20.3 Cage Failover DFMEA Example 399 20.4 DFMEA Scorecard 401 20.5 Lessons Learned 402 20.6 Summary 403 21. Application of FTA to Real-Life Example 404 21.1 Introduction 404 21.2 Calculating Availability Using Fault Tree Analysis 404 21.3 Building the Basic Events 405 21.4 Building the Fault Tree 406 21.5 Steps for Creating and Estimating the Availability Using FTA 408 21.6 Summary 416 22. Complex High Availability System Analysis 420 22.1 Introduction 420 22.2 Markov Analysis of the Hardware Components 420 22.3 Building a Fault Tree from the Hardware Markov Model 427 22.4 Markov Analysis of the Software Components 427 22.5 Markov Analysis of the Combined Hardware and Software Components 433 22.6 Techniques for Simplifying Markov Analysis 437 22.7 Summary 446 References 447 Index 450

Read more less

Book SynopsisGender, Politics, News: A Game of Three Sides explores the role of gender in the broader processes of political communication The only contemporary book focusing on the relationships between gender, politics, and news media which takes a global perspective An analysis of political journalism as a practice and the development of the field in terms of gendered workplace cultures Offers a solid framework for understanding women's political representation, including real world case studies of women's campaigns for the top political job across a range of different geographies and contexts Coverage of hot-button issues, such as political scandal and the role of new and social media in politics and elections, makes this a highly relevant and current work with resonances for a wide audience Table of ContentsAcknowledgments ix 1 Introduction 1 2 Women and Politics: Then and Now 11 3 Women in the Boyzone 31 4 Women, Politics, and Campaign Coverage: More (or Less) Bad News 55 5 Girls on Top? Winning and Losing the Political Crown 81 6 Behind Every Great Man (or Occasionally Woman): The Political Spouse 117 7 Scandalicious: The Politics of Scandal and the Scandal of Politics 147 8 Conclusions 179 Select Bibliography 191 Index 223

Read more less

Book SynopsisGender, Politics, News: A Game of Three Sides explores the role of gender in the broader processes of political communication The only contemporary book focusing on the relationships between gender, politics, and news media which takes a global perspective An analysis of political journalism as a practice and the development of the field in terms of gendered workplace cultures Offers a solid framework for understanding women's political representation, including real world case studies of women's campaigns for the top political job across a range of different geographies and contexts Coverage of hot-button issues, such as political scandal and the role of new and social media in politics and elections, makes this a highly relevant and current work with resonances for a wide audience Table of ContentsAcknowledgments ix 1 Introduction 1 2 Women and Politics: Then and Now 11 3 Women in the Boyzone 31 4 Women, Politics, and Campaign Coverage: More (or Less) Bad News 55 5 Girls on Top? Winning and Losing the Political Crown 81 6 Behind Every Great Man (or Occasionally Woman): The Political Spouse 117 7 Scandalicious: The Politics of Scandal and the Scandal of Politics 147 8 Conclusions 179 Select Bibliography 191 Index 223

Read more less

Book SynopsisA concise, engineering-oriented resource that provides practical support to IT professionals and those responsible for the quality of the software or systems they develop Software quality stems from two distinctive, but associated, topics in software engineering: software functional quality and software structural quality. This book studies the tenets of both of these notions, which focus on the efficiency and value of a design, respectively. It addresses engineering quality on both the application and system levels with attention to information systems (IS) and embedded systems (ES) as well as recent developments. Software Quality Engineering introduces the basic concepts of quality engineering like the nature of the engineering process, quality models and measurements, and evaluation quality, and provides a step-by-step overview of the application of software quality engineering in commonly recognized phases of the software development process. It also discussTable of ContentsPreface ix 1 Why Software Quality Engineering? 1 2 Software Quality Engineering: Making It Happen 35 3 System and Software Quality Engineering: Some Application Contexts 139 4 Trustworthiness of IT Systems and Services 151 Appendix Cost of Missing Quality: Case Studies 175 Index 191

Read more less

Book SynopsisDistributed systems employed in critical infrastructures must fulfill dependability, timeliness, and performance specifications. Since these systems most often operate in an unpredictable environment, their design and maintenance require quantitative evaluation of deterministic and probabilistic timed models. This need gave birth to an abundant literature devoted to formal modeling languages combined with analytical and simulative solution techniques The aim of the book is to provide an overview of techniques and methodologies dealing with such specific issues in the context of distributed systems and covering aspects such as performance evaluation, reliability/availability, energy efficiency, scalability, and sustainability. Specifically, techniques for checking and verifying if and how a distributed system satisfies the requirements, as well as how to properly evaluate non-functional aspects, or how to optimize the overall behavior of the system, are all discussed in the boTable of ContentsPreface xiiiPART I VERIFICATION1. Modeling and Verification of Distributed Systems Using Markov Decision Processes 31.1 Introduction 41.2 Markov Decision Processes 51.3 Markov Decision Well-Formed Net formalism 81.4 Case study: Peer-to-Peer Botnets 101.5 Conclusion 18Appendices: Well-formed Net Formalism 21A.1.1 Syntax of Basic Predicates 22A.1.2 Markings and Enabling 23References 252 Quantitative Analysis of Distributed Systems in Stoklaim: A Tutorial 272.1 Introduction 282.2 StoKlaim: Stochastic Klaim 292.3 StoKlaim Operational Semantics 342.4 MoSL: Mobile Stochastic Logic 432.5 jSAM: Java Stochastic Model-Checker 472.6 Leader Election in StoKlaim 492.7 Concluding Remarks 52References 533 Stochastic Path Properties of Distributed Systems: the CSLTA Approach 573.1 Introduction 583.2 The Reference Formalisms for System Definition 593.3 The Formalism for Path Property Definition: CSLTA 613.4 CSLTA at work: a Fault-Tolerant Node 673.5 Literature Comparison 713.6 Summary and Final Remarks 73References 75PART II EVALUATION4 Failure Propagation in Load-Sharing Complex Systems 814.1 Introduction 824.2 Building Blocks 844.3 Sand Box for Distributed Failures 894.4 Summary 102References 1035 Approximating Distributions and Transient Probabilities by Matrix Exponential Distributions and Functions 1075.1 Introduction 1085.2 Phase Type and Matrix Exponential Distributions 1095.3 Bernstein Polynomials and Expolynomials 1145.4 Application of BEs to Distribution Fitting 1165.5 Application of BEs to Transient Probabilities 1215.6 Conclusions 124References 1256 Worst-Case Analysis of Tandem Queueing Systems Using Network Calculus 1296.1 Introduction 1306.2 Basic Network Calculus Modeling: Per-flow Scheduling 1326.3 Advanced Network Calculus Modeling: Aggregate Multiplexing 1486.4 Tandem Systems Traversed by Several Flows 1526.5 Mathematical Programming Approach 1546.6 Related Work 1656.7 Numerical Results 1666.8 Conclusions 168References 1717 Cloud Evaluation: Benchmarking and Monitoring 1757.1 Introduction 1767.2 Benchmarking 1767.3 Benchmarking with mOSAIC 1847.4 Monitoring 1857.5 Cloud Monitoring in mOSAIC?s Cloud Agency 1917.6 Conclusions 193References 1958 Multiformalism and Multisolution Strategies for Systems Performance 2018.1 Introduction 2028.2 Multiformalism and Multisolution 2038.3 Choosing the Right Strategy 2058.4 Learning by the Experience 2068.5 Conclusions and Perspectives 218References 219PART III OPTIMIZATION AND SUSTAINABILITY9 Quantitative Assessment of Distributed Networks Through Hybrid Stochastic Modeling 2259.1 Introduction 2269.2 Modeling of Complex Systems 2289.3 Performance Evaluation of KNXnet/IP Networks Flow Control Mechanism 2349.4 LCII: On-line Risk Estimation of A Power-Telco Network 2489.5 Conclusion 259References 26110 Design of IT Infrastructures of Data Centers: An Approach Based on Business and Technical Metrics 26510.1 Introduction 26610.2 Fundamental Concepts 26710.3 Business-Oriented Models 27010.4 Data Center Infrastructure Models 27410.5 Methodology 27710.6 Case Study - Data Center Design 28310.7 Conclusion 292References 29711 Software Rejuvenation and its Application in Distributed Systems 30111.1 Introduction 30211.2 Software rejuvenation scheduling classification 30411.3 Software rejuvenation granularity classification 30711.4 Methods, policies and metrics of software rejuvenation 31411.5 Software rejuvenation in distributed systems 31511.6 Summary 318References 32112 Machine Learning Based Dynamic Reconfiguration of Distributed Data Management Systems 32712.1 Introduction 32812.2 Methodologies 33012.3 Brief overview of Neural Networks 33412.4 System Architecture and Performance Prediction Scheme 33612.5 Experimentation 33912.6 Conclusions 346References 34713 Going Green with the Networked Cloud: Methodologies and Assessment 35113.1 Introduction 35213.2 Modeling of Data Centre Power Consumption 35313.3 Energy Efficiency in the Cloud 35613.4 Performance Analysis Methodologies and Tools 36113.5 Case Study: Performance Evaluation of Energy Aware Resource Allocation in the Cloud 36613.6 Summary 370References 371Index 375

Read more less

Book SynopsisAdvanced research reference examining the closed and open quantum systems Control of Quantum Systems: Theory and Methods provides an insight into the modern approaches to control of quantum systems evolution, with a focus on both closed and open (dissipative) quantum systems.Table of ContentsAbout the Author xiii Preface xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Quantum States 2 1.2 Quantum Systems Control Models 3 1.2.1 Schrödinger Equation 4 1.2.2 Liouville Equation 4 1.2.3 Markovian Master Equations 5 1.2.4 Non-Markovian Master Equations 5 1.3 Structures of Quantum Control Systems 6 1.4 Control Tasks and Objectives 8 1.5 System Characteristics Analyses 9 1.5.1 Controllability 9 1.5.2 Reachability 9 1.5.3 Observability 10 1.5.4 Stability 10 1.5.5 Convergence 10 1.5.6 Robustness 10 1.6 Performance of Control Systems 11 1.6.1 Probability 11 1.6.2 Fidelity 11 1.6.3 Purity 12 1.7 Quantum Systems Control 13 1.7.1 Description of Control Problems 13 1.7.2 Quantum Control Theory and Methods 13 1.8 Overview of the Book 16 References 18 2 State Transfer and Analysis of Quantum Systems on the Bloch Sphere 21 2.1 Analysis of a Two-level Quantum System State 21 2.1.1 Pure State Expression on the Bloch Sphere 21 2.1.2 Mixed States in the Bloch Sphere 24 2.1.3 Control Trajectory on the Bloch Sphere 26 2.2 State Transfer of Quantum Systems on the Bloch Sphere 27 2.2.1 Control of a Single Spin-1/2 Particle 28 2.2.2 Situation with the Minimum Ωt of Control Fields 30 2.2.3 Situation with a Fixed Time T 31 2.2.4 Numerical Simulations and Results Analyses 33 References 37 3 Control Methods of Closed Quantum Systems 39 3.1 Improved Optimal Control Strategies Applied in Quantum Systems 39 3.1.1 Optimal Control of Quantum Systems 40 3.1.2 Improved Quantum Optimal Control Method 42 3.1.3 Krotov-Based Method of Optimal Control 43 3.1.4 Numerical Simulation and Performance Analysis 45 3.2 Control Design of High-Dimensional Spin-1/2 Quantum Systems 48 3.2.1 Coherent Population Transfer Approaches 48 3.2.2 Relationships between the Hamiltonian of Spin-1/2 Quantum Systems under Control and the Sequence of Pulses 49 3.2.3 Design of the Control Sequence of Pulses 52 3.2.4 Simulation Experiments of Population Transfer 53 3.3 Comparison of Time Optimal Control for Two-Level Quantum Systems 57 3.3.1 Description of System Model 58 3.3.2 Geometric Control 59 3.3.3 Bang-Bang Control 61 3.3.4 Time Comparisons of Two Control Strategies 64 3.3.5 Numerical Simulation Experiments and Results Analyses 66 References 71 4 Manipulation of Eigenstates – Based on Lyapunov Method 73 4.1 Principle of the Lyapunov Stability Theorem 74 4.2 Quantum Control Strategy Based on State Distance 75 4.2.1 Selection of the Lyapunov Function 76 4.2.2 Design of the Feedback Control Law 77 4.2.3 Analysis and Proof of the Stability 78 4.2.4 Application to a Spin-1/2 Particle System 80 4.3 Optimal Quantum Control Based on the Lyapunov Stability Theorem 81 4.3.1 Description of the System Model 82 4.3.2 Optimal Control Law Design and Property Analysis 84 4.3.3 Simulation Experiments and the Results Comparisons 86 4.4 Realization of the Quantum Hadamard Gate Based on the Lyapunov Method 88 4.4.1 Mathematical Model 89 4.4.2 Realization of the Quantum Hadamard Gate 90 4.4.3 Design of Control Fields 92 4.4.4 Numerical Simulations and Comparison Results Analyses 94 References 96 5 Population Control Based on the Lyapunov Method 99 5.1 Population Control of Equilibrium State 99 5.1.1 Preliminary Notions 99 5.1.2 Control Laws Design 100 5.1.3 Analysis of the Largest Invariant Set 101 5.1.4 Considerations on the Determination of P 104 5.1.5 Illustrative Example 105 5.1.6 Appendix: Proof of Theorem 5.1 107 5.2 Generalized Control of Quantum Systems in the Frame of Vector Treatment 110 5.2.1 Design of Control Law 110 5.2.2 Convergence Analysis 113 5.2.3 Numerical Simulation on a Spin-1/2 System 114 5.3 Population Control of Eigenstates 117 5.3.1 System Model and Control Laws 117 5.3.2 Largest Invariant Set of Control Systems 118 5.3.3 Analysis of the Eigenstate Control 118 5.3.4 Simulation Experiments 119 References 123 6 Quantum General State Control Based on Lyapunov Method 125 6.1 Pure State Manipulation 125 6.1.1 Design of Control Law and Discussion 125 6.1.2 Control System Simulations and Results Analyses 129 6.2 Optimal Control Strategy of the Superposition State 131 6.2.1 Preliminary Knowledge 132 6.2.2 Control Law Design 133 6.2.3 Numerical Simulations 134 6.3 Optimal Control of Mixed-State Quantum Systems 135 6.3.1 Model of the System to be Controlled 136 6.3.2 Control Law Design 137 6.3.3 Numerical Simulations and Results Analyses 142 6.4 Arbitrary Pure State to a Mixed-State Manipulation 145 6.4.1 Transfer from an Arbitrary Pure State to an Eigenstate 146 6.4.2 Transfer from an Eigenstate to a Mixed State by Interaction Control 147 6.4.3 Control Design for a Mixed-State Transfer 149 6.4.4 Numerical Simulation Experiments 151 References 154 7 Convergence Analysis Based on the Lyapunov Stability Theorem 155 7.1 Population Control of Quantum States Based on Invariant Subsets with the Diagonal Lyapunov Function 155 7.1.1 System Model and Control Design 155 7.1.2 Correspondence between any Target Eigenstate and the Value of the Lyapunov Function 156 7.1.3 Invariant Set of Control Systems 157 7.1.4 Numerical Simulations 161 7.1.5 Summary and Discussion 164 7.2 A Convergent Control Strategy of Quantum Systems 165 7.2.1 Problem Description 165 7.2.2 Construction Method of the Observable Operator 166 7.2.3 Proof of Convergence 168 7.2.4 Route Extension Strategy 173 7.2.5 Numerical Simulations 174 7.3 Path Programming Control Strategy of Quantum State Transfer 176 7.3.1 Control Law Design Based on the Lyapunov Method in the Interaction Picture 177 7.3.2 Transition Path Programming Control Strategy 178 7.3.3 Numerical Simulations and Results Analyses 182 References 186 8 Control Theory and Methods in Degenerate Cases 187 8.1 Implicit Lyapunov Control of Multi-Control Hamiltonian Systems Based on State Error 187 8.1.1 Control Design 188 8.1.2 Convergence Proof 192 8.1.3 Relation between Two Lyapunov Functions 193 8.1.4 Numerical Simulation and Result Analysis 193 8.2 Quantum Lyapunov Control Based on the Average Value of an Imaginary Mechanical Quantity 195 8.2.1 Control Law Design and Convergence Proof 195 8.2.2 Numerical Simulation and Result Analysis 199 8.3 Implicit Lyapunov Control for the Quantum Liouville Equation 200 8.3.1 Description of Problem 201 8.3.2 Derivation of Control Laws 202 8.3.3 Convergence Analysis 205 8.3.4 Numerical Simulations 209 References 211 9 Manipulation Methods of the General State 213 9.1 Quantum System Schmidt Decomposition and its Geometric Analysis 213 9.1.1 Schmidt Decomposition of Quantum States 214 9.1.2 Definition of Entanglement Degree Based on the Schmidt Decomposition 215 9.1.3 Application of the Schmidt Decomposition 216 9.2 Preparation of Entanglement States in a Two-Spin System 220 9.2.1 Construction of the Two-Spin Systems Model in the Interaction Picture 220 9.2.2 Design of the Control Field Based on the Lyapunov Method 223 9.2.3 Proof of Convergence for the Bell States 226 9.2.4 Numerical Simulations 227 9.3 Purification of the Mixed State for Two-Dimensional Systems 230 9.3.1 Purification by Means of a Probe 230 9.3.2 Purification by Interaction Control 232 9.3.3 Numerical Experiments and Results Comparisons 233 9.3.4 Discussion 234 References 235 10 State Control of Open Quantum Systems 237 10.1 State Transfer of Open Quantum Systems with a Single Control Field 237 10.1.1 Dynamical Model of Open Quantum Systems 237 10.1.2 Derivation of Optimal Control Law 238 10.1.3 Control System Design 241 10.1.4 Numerical Simulations and Results Analyses 242 10.2 Purity and Coherence Compensation through the Interaction between Particles 246 10.2.1 Method of Compensation for Purity and Coherence 247 10.2.2 Analysis of System Evolution 250 10.2.3 Numerical Simulations 253 10.2.4 Discussion 255 Appendix 10.A Proof of Equation 10.59 257 References 258 11 State Estimation, Measurement, and Control of Quantum Systems 261 11.1 State Estimation Methods in Quantum Systems 261 11.1.1 Background of State Estimation of Quantum Systems 262 11.1.2 Quantum State Estimation Methods Based on the Measurement of Identical Copies 262 11.1.3 Quantum State Reconstruction Methods Based on System Theory 267 11.2 Entanglement Detection and Measurement of Quantum Systems 268 11.2.1 Entanglement States 269 11.2.2 Entanglement Witnesses 271 11.2.3 Entanglement Measures 273 11.2.4 Non-linear Separability Criteria 277 11.3 Decoherence Control Based on Weak Measurement 278 11.3.1 Construction of a Weak Measurement Operator 279 11.3.2 Applicability of Weak Measurement 280 11.3.3 Effects on States 282 Appendix 11.A Proof of Normed Linear Space (A, ¡¬ • ¡¬) 286 References 287 12 State Preservation of Open Quantum Systems 291 12.1 Coherence Preservation in a Λ-Type Three-Level Atom 291 12.1.1 Models and Objectives 292 12.1.2 Design of Control Field 294 12.1.3 Analysis of Singularities Issues 297 12.1.4 Numerical Simulations 299 12.2 Purity Preservation of Quantum Systems by a Resonant Field 301 12.2.1 Problem Description 302 12.2.2 Purity Property Preservation 303 12.2.3 Discussion 306 12.3 Coherence Preservation in Markovian Open Quantum Systems 307 12.3.1 Problem Formulation 308 12.3.2 Design of Control Variables 311 12.3.3 Numerical Simulations 313 12.3.4 Discussion 315 Appendix 12.A Derivation of HC 316 References 317 13 State Manipulation in Decoherence-Free Subspace 321 13.1 State Transfer and Coherence Maintainance Based on DFS for a Four-Level Energy Open Quantum System 321 13.1.1 Construction of DFS and the Desired Target State 322 13.1.2 Design of the Lyapunov-Based Control Law for State Transfer 325 13.1.3 Numerical Simulations 326 13.2 State Transfer Based on a Decoherence-Free Target State for a Λ-Type N-Level Atomic System 328 13.2.1 Construction of the Decoherence-Free Target State 328 13.2.2 Design of the Lyapunov-Based Control Law for State Transfer 331 13.2.3 Numerical Simulations and Results Analyses 332 13.3 Control of Quantum States Based on the Lyapunov Method in Decoherence-Free Subspaces 336 13.3.1 Problem Description 336 13.3.2 Control Design in the Interaction Picture 338 13.3.3 Construction of P and Convergence Analysis 339 13.3.4 Numerical Simulation Examples and Discussion 345 References 348 14 Dynamic Decoupling Quantum Control Methods 351 14.1 Phase Decoherence Suppression of an n-Level Atom in Ξ;-Configuration with Bang-Bang Controls 351 14.1.1 Dynamical Decoupling Mechanism 352 14.1.2 Design of the Bang–Bang Operations Group in Phase Decoherence 355 14.1.3 Examples of Design 357 14.2 Optimized Dynamical Decoupling in Ξ-Type n-Level Atom 360 14.2.1 Periodic Dynamical Decoupling 361 14.2.2 Uhrig Dynamical Decoupling 361 14.2.3 Behaviors of Quantum Coherence under Various Dynamical Decoupling Schemes 362 14.2.4 Examples 365 14.2.5 Discussion 366 14.3 An Optimized Dynamical Decoupling Strategy to Suppress Decoherence 366 14.3.1 Universal Dynamical Decoupling for a Qubit 367 14.3.2 An Optimized Dynamical Decoupling Scheme 369 14.3.3 Simulation and Comparison 369 14.3.4 Discussion 375 References 378 15 Trajectory Tracking of Quantum Systems 381 15.1 Orbit Tracking of Quantum States Based on the Lyapunov Method 382 15.1.1 Description of the System Model 382 15.1.2 Design of Control Law 384 15.1.3 Numerical Simulation Experiments and Results Analysis 385 15.2 Orbit Tracking Control of Quantum Systems 389 15.2.1 System Model and Control Law Design 390 15.2.2 Numerical Simulation Experiments 391 15.3 Adaptive Trajectory Tracking of Quantum Systems 394 15.3.1 Description of the System Model 396 15.3.2 Control System Design and Characteristic Analysis 398 15.3.3 Numerical Simulation and Result Analysis 400 15.4 Convergence of Orbit Tracking for Quantum Systems 402 15.4.1 Description of the Control System Model 403 15.4.2 Control Law Derivation 404 15.4.3 Convergence Analysis 404 15.4.4 Applications and Experimental Results Analyses 411 References 416 Index 419

Read more less

Book SynopsisWireless Communications Systems Design provides the basic knowledge and methodology for wireless communications design. The book mainly focuses on a broadband wireless communication system based on OFDM/OFDMA system because it is widely used in the modern wireless communication system.Table of ContentsPreface xi List of Abbreviations xiii Part I Wireless Communications Theory 1 1 Historical Sketch of Wireless Communications 3 1.1 Advancement of Wireless Communications Technologies 3 1.2 Wireless Communications, Lifestyles, and Economics 6 References 9 2 Probability Theory 11 2.1 Random Signals 11 2.2 Spectral Density 16 2.3 Correlation Functions 18 2.4 Central Limit Theorem 25 2.5 Problems 28 Reference 30 3 Wireless Channels 31 3.1 Additive White Gaussian Noise 31 3.2 Large]Scale Path Loss Models 34 3.3 Multipath Channels 38 3.4 Empirical Wireless Channel Models 46 3.5 Problems 48 References 50 4 Optimum Receiver 51 4.1 Decision Theory 51 4.2 Optimum Receiver for AWGN 55 4.3 Matched Filter Receiver 66 4.4 Coherent and Noncoherent Detection 69 4.5 Problems 73 References 74 5 Wireless Channel Impairment Mitigation Techniques 75 5.1 Diversity Techniques 75 5.2 Error Control Coding 82 5.2.1 Linear Block Codes 84 5.2.2 Convolutional Codes 92 5.3 MIMO 99 5.4 Equalization 107 5.5 OFDM 114 5.6 Problems 120 References 121 Part II Wireless Communications Blocks Design 123 6 Error Correction Codes 125 6.1 Turbo Codes 125 6.1.1 Turbo Encoding and Decoding Algorithm 125 6.1.2 Example of Turbo Encoding and Decoding 133 6.1.3 Hardware Implementation of Turbo Encoding and Decoding 149 6.2 Turbo Product Codes 155 6.2.1 Turbo Product Encoding and Decoding Algorithm 155 6.2.2 Example of Turbo Product Encoding and Decoding 156 6.2.3 Hardware Implementation of Turbo Product Encoding and Decoding 174 6.3 Low]Density Parity Check Codes 175 6.3.1 LDPC Encoding and Decoding Algorithms 175 6.3.2 Example of LDPC Encoding and Decoding 191 6.3.3 Hardware Implementation of LDPC Encoding and Decoding 199 6.4 Problems 205 References 206 7 Orthogonal Frequency]Division Multiplexing 209 7.1 OFDM System Design 209 7.2 FFT Design 217 7.3 Hardware Implementations of FFT 232 7.4 Problems 237 References 238 8 Multiple Input Multiple Output 239 8.1 MIMO Antenna Design 239 8.2 Space Time Coding 240 8.3 Example of STTC Encoding and Decoding 254 8.4 Spatial Multiplexing and MIMO Detection Algorithms 266 8.5 Problems 276 References 277 9 Channel Estimation and Equalization 279 9.1 Channel Estimation 279 9.2 Channel Estimation for MIMO–OFDM System 293 9.3 Equalization 295 9.4 Hardware Implementation of Channel Estimation and Equalizer for OFDM System 298 9.5 Problems 298 References 299 10 Synchronization 301 10.1 Fundamental Synchronization Techniques for OFDM System 301 10.2 Synchronization Errors 305 10.3 Synchronization Techniques for OFDM System 310 10.4 Hardware Implementation of OFDM Synchronization 319 10.5 Problems 320 References 321 Part III Wireless Communications Systems Design 323 11 Radio Planning 325 11.1 Radio Planning and Link Budget Analysis 325 11.2 Traffic Engineering 335 11.3 Problems 345 References 347 12 Wireless Communications Systems Design and Considerations 349 12.1 Wireless Communications Systems Design Flow 349 12.2 Wireless Communications Systems Design Considerations 353 12.3 Hardware and Software Codesign 370 12.4 Problems 377 References 378 13 Wireless Communications Blocks Integration 379 13.1 High Level View of Wireless Communications Systems 379 13.2 4G Physical Layer Systems 383 13.2.1 LTE 384 13.2.2 WiMAX 394 13.2.3 Comparison of LTE and WiMAX 400 13.3 SoC Design for 4G Communication System 401 13.3.1 Software Design for 4G Communication System 403 13.3.2 Hardware Design for 4G Communication System 404 13.4 Problems 409 References 410 Index 411

Read more less

Book SynopsisAs demand for data increases, Smart Data Pricing fills a market void in information on telecommunication economics. The book carefully addresses technical issues and workplace policies, system development and integration, research proposals, and business assessments.Table of Contentsforeword xv preface xvi contributors xx I Smart Data Pricing in Today’s Ecosystem 1 1 Will Smart Pricing Finally Take Off? 3Andrew Odlyzko 2 Customer Price Sensitivity to Broadband Service Speed: What Are the Implications for Public Policy? 35Victor Glass, Stela Stefanova, and Ron Dibelka 3 Network Neutrality with Content Caching and Its Effect on Access Pricing 47Fatih Kocak, George Kesidis, and Serge Fdida II Technologies for Smart Data Pricing 67 4 Pricing under Demand Flexibility and Predictability 69Ozgur Dalkilic, John Tadrous, Atilla Eryilmaz, and Hesham El-Gamal 5 Dual Pricing Algorithms by Wireless Network Duality for Utility Maximization 97Chee Wei Tan and Liang Zheng 6 Human Factors in Smart Data Pricing 127Soumya Sen, Carlee Joe-Wong, Sangtae Ha, and Mung Chiang III Usage-Based Pricing 167 7 Quantifying the Costs of Customers for Usage-Based Pricing 169László Gyarmati, Rade Stanojevic, Michael Sirivianos, and Nikolaos Laoutaris 8 Usage-Based Pricing Differentiation for Communication Networks: Incomplete Information and Limited Pricing Choices 195Shuqin Li and Jianwei Huang 9 Telecommunication Pricing: Smart Versus Dumb Pipes 241Atanu Lahiri IV Content-Based Pricing 267 10 Economic Models of Sponsored Content in Wireless Networks with Uncertain Demand 269Matthew Andrews, Ulas Ozen, Martin I. Reiman, and Qiong Wang 11 CDN Pricing and Investment Strategies under Competition 289Yang Song, Lixin Gao, and Arun Venkataramani 12 Smart Pricing and Market Formation in Hybrid Networks 321Aris M. Ouksel, Doug Lundquist, and Sid Bhattacharyya 13 To Tax or To Subsidize: The Economics of User-Generated Content Platforms 341Shaolei Ren and Mihaela van der Schaar V Managing Content Delivery 363 14 Spare Capacity Monetization by Opportunistic Content Scheduling 365Bell Labs and Alcatel-Lucent 15 Asynchronous Content Delivery and Pricing in Cellular Data Networks 391Vijay Gabale, Umamaheswari Devi, Ravi Kokku, and Shivkumar Kalyanraman 16 Mechanisms for Quota Aware Video Adaptation 415Jiasi Chen, Amitabha Ghosh, and Mung Chiang 17 The Role of Multicast in Congestion Alleviation 441Alan D. Young VI Pricing in the Cloud 453 18 Smart Pricing of Cloud Resources 455Yu Xiang and Tian Lan 19 Allocating and Pricing Data Center Resources with Power-Aware Combinatorial Auctions 477Benjamin Lubin and David C. Parkes Index 501

Read more less

Book SynopsisA realistic and comprehensive review of joint approaches to machine learning and signal processing algorithms, with application to communications, multimedia, and biomedical engineering systems Digital Signal Processing with Kernel Methods reviews the milestones in the mixing of classical digital signal processing models and advanced kernel machines statistical learning tools. It explains the fundamental concepts from both fields of machine learning and signal processing so that readers can quickly get up to speed in order to begin developing the concepts and application software in their own research. Digital Signal Processing with Kernel Methods provides a comprehensive overview of kernel methods in signal processing, without restriction to any application field. It also offers example applications and detailed benchmarking experiments with real and synthetic datasets throughout. Readers can find further worked examples with Matlab source code on a website developed by the authors: hTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xiii Preface xvii Acknowledgements xxi List of Abbreviations xxiii Part I Fundamentals and Basic Elements 1 1 From Signal Processing to Machine Learning 3 1.1 A New Science is Born: Signal Processing 3 1.1.1 Signal Processing Before Being Coined 3 1.1.2 1948: Birth of the Information Age 4 1.1.3 1950s: Audio Engineering Catalyzes Signal Processing 4 1.2 From Analog to Digital Signal Processing 5 1.2.1 1960s: Digital Signal Processing Begins 5 1.2.2 1970s: Digital Signal Processing Becomes Popular 6 1.2.3 1980s: Silicon Meets Digital Signal Processing 6 1.3 Digital Signal Processing Meets Machine Learning 7 1.3.1 1990s: New Application Areas 7 1.3.2 1990s: Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic, and Genetic Optimization 7 1.4 Recent Machine Learning in Digital Signal Processing 8 1.4.1 Traditional Signal Assumptions Are No Longer Valid 8 1.4.2 Encoding Prior Knowledge 8 1.4.3 Learning and Knowledge from Data 9 1.4.4 From Machine Learning to Digital Signal Processing 9 1.4.5 From Digital Signal Processing to Machine Learning 10 2 Introduction to Digital Signal Processing 13 2.1 Outline of the Signal Processing Field 13 2.1.1 Fundamentals on Signals and Systems 14 2.1.2 Digital Filtering 21 2.1.3 Spectral Analysis 24 2.1.4 Deconvolution 28 2.1.5 Interpolation 30 2.1.6 System Identification 31 2.1.7 Blind Source Separation 36 2.2.3 Sparsity, Compressed Sensing, and Dictionary Learning 44 2.3 Multidimensional Signals and Systems 48 2.3.1 Multidimensional Signals 49 2.3.2 Multidimensional Systems 51 2.4 Spectral Analysis on Manifolds 52 2.4.1 Theoretical Fundamentals 52 2.4.2 Laplacian Matrices 54 2.5 Tutorials and Application Examples 57 2.5.1 Real and Complex Signal Processing and Representations 57 2.5.2 Convolution, Fourier Transform, and Spectrum 63 2.5.3 Continuous-Time Signals and Systems 67 2.5.4 Filtering Cardiac Signals 70 2.5.5 Nonparametric Spectrum Estimation 74 2.5.6 Parametric Spectrum Estimation 77 2.5.7 Source Separation 81 2.5.8 Time–Frequency Representations and Wavelets 84 2.5.9 Examples for Spectral Analysis on Manifolds 87 2.6 Questions and Problems 94 3 Signal Processing Models 97 3.1 Introduction 97 3.2 Vector Spaces, Basis, and Signal Models 98 3.2.1 Basic Operations for Vectors 98 3.2.2 Vector Spaces 100 3.2.3 Hilbert Spaces 101 3.2.4 Signal Models 102 3.2.5 Complex Signal Models 104 3.2.6 Standard Noise Models in Digital Signal Processing 105 3.2.7 The Role of the Cost Function 107 3.2.8 The Role of the Regularizer 109 3.3 Digital Signal Processing Models 111 3.3.1 Sinusoidal Signal Models 112 3.3.2 System Identification Signal Models 113 3.3.3 Sinc Interpolation Models 116 3.3.4 Sparse Deconvolution 120 3.3.5 Array Processing 121 3.4 Tutorials and Application Examples 122 3.4.1 Examples of Noise Models 123 3.4.2 Autoregressive Exogenous System Identification Models 132 3.4.3 Nonlinear System Identification Using Volterra Models 138 3.4.4 Sinusoidal Signal Models 140 3.4.5 Sinc-based Interpolation 144 3.4.6 Sparse Deconvolution 152 3.4.7 Array Processing 157 3.5 Questions and Problems 160 3.A MATLABsimpleInterp Toolbox Structure 161 4 Kernel Functions and Reproducing Kernel Hilbert Spaces 165 4.1 Introduction 165 4.2 Kernel Functions and Mappings 169 4.2.1 Measuring Similarity with Kernels 169 4.2.2 Positive-Definite Kernels 169 4.2.3 Reproducing Kernel in Hilbert Space and Reproducing Property 170 4.2.4 Mercer’s Theorem 173 4.3 Kernel Properties 174 4.3.1 Tikhonov’s Regularization 175 4.3.2 Representer Theorem and Regularization Properties 176 4.3.3 Basic Operations with Kernels 178 4.4 Constructing Kernel Functions 179 4.4.1 Standard Kernels 179 4.4.2 Properties of Kernels 180 4.4.3 Engineering Signal Processing Kernels 181 4.5 Complex Reproducing Kernel in Hilbert Spaces 184 4.6 Support Vector Machine Elements for Regression and Estimation 186 4.6.1 Support Vector Regression Signal Model and Cost Function 186 4.6.2 Minimizing Functional 187 4.7 Tutorials and Application Examples 191 4.7.1 Kernel Calculations and Kernel Matrices 191 4.7.2 Basic Operations with Kernels 194 4.7.3 Constructing Kernels 197 4.7.4 Complex Kernels 199 4.7.5 Application Example for Support Vector Regression Elements 202 4.8 Concluding Remarks 205 4.9 Questions and Problems 205 Part II Function Approximation and Adaptive Filtering 209 5 A Support Vector Machine Signal Estimation Framework 211 5.1 Introduction 211 5.2 A Framework for Support Vector Machine Signal Estimation 213 5.3 Primal Signal Models for Support Vector Machine Signal Processing 216 5.3.1 Nonparametric Spectrum and System Identification 218 5.3.2 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing Digital Communications 220 5.3.3 Convolutional Signal Models 222 5.3.4 Array Processing 225 5.4 Tutorials and Application Examples 227 5.4.1 Nonparametric Spectral Analysis with Primal Signal Models 227 5.4.2 System Identification with Primal Signal Model ;;-filter 228 5.4.3 Parametric Spectral Density Estimation with Primal Signal Models 230 5.4.4 Temporal Reference Array Processing with Primal Signal Models 231 5.4.5 Sinc Interpolation with Primal Signal Models 233 6 Reproducing Kernel Hilbert Space Models for Signal Processing 241 6.1 Introduction 241 6.2 Reproducing Kernel Hilbert Space Signal Models 242 6.2.1 Kernel Autoregressive Exogenous Identification 244 6.2.2 Kernel Finite Impulse Response and the ;;-Filter 247 6.2.3 Kernel Array Processing with Spatial Reference 248 6.2.4 Kernel Semiparametric Regression 249 6.3 Tutorials and Application Examples 258 6.3.1 Nonlinear System Identification with Support Vector Machine–Autoregressive and Moving Average 258 6.3.2 Nonlinear System Identification with the ;;-filter 260 6.3.3 Electric Network Modeling with Semiparametric Regression 264 6.3.4 Promotional Data 272 6.3.5 Spatial and Temporal Antenna Array Kernel Processing 275 6.4 Questions and Problems 279 7 Dual Signal Models for Signal Processing 281 7.1 Introduction 281 7.2 Dual Signal Model Elements 281 7.3 Dual Signal Model Instantiations 283 7.3.1 Dual Signal Model for Nonuniform Signal Interpolation 283 7.3.2 Dual Signal Model for Sparse Signal Deconvolution 284 7.3.3 Spectrally Adapted Mercer Kernels 285 7.4 Tutorials and Application Examples 289 7.4.1 Nonuniform Interpolation with the Dual Signal Model 290 7.4.2 Sparse Deconvolution with the Dual Signal Model 292 7.4.3 Doppler Ultrasound Processing for Fault Detection 294 7.4.4 Spectrally Adapted Mercer Kernels 296 7.4.5 Interpolation of Heart Rate Variability Signals 304 7.4.6 Denoising in Cardiac Motion-Mode Doppler Ultrasound Images 309?m 7.4.7 Indoor Location from Mobile Devices Measurements 316 7.4.8 Electroanatomical Maps in Cardiac Navigation Systems 322 7.5 Questions and Problems 331 8 Advances in Kernel Regression and Function Approximation 333 8.1 Introduction 333 8.2 Kernel-Based Regression Methods 333 8.2.1 Advances in Support Vector Regression 334 8.2.2 Multi-output Support Vector Regression 338 8.2.3 Kernel Ridge Regression 339 8.2.4 Kernel Signal-To-Noise Regression 341 8.2.5 Semisupervised Support Vector Regression 343 8.2.6 Model Selection in Kernel Regression Methods 345 8.4.1 Comparing Support Vector Regression, Relevance Vector Machines, and Gaussian Process Regression 360 8.4.2 Profile-Dependent Support Vector Regression 362 8.4.3 Multi-output Support Vector Regression 364 8.4.4 Kernel Signal-to-Noise Ratio Regression 366 8.4.5 Semisupervised Support Vector Regression 368 8.4.6 Bayesian Nonparametric Model 369 8.4.7 Gaussian Process Regression 370 8.4.8 Relevance Vector Machines 379 8.5 Concluding Remarks 382 8.6 Questions and Problems 383 9 Adaptive Kernel Learning for Signal Processing 387 9.1 Introduction 387 9.2 Linear Adaptive Filtering 387 9.2.1 Least Mean Squares Algorithm 388 9.2.2 Recursive Least-Squares Algorithm 389 9.3 Kernel Adaptive Filtering 392 9.4 Kernel Least Mean Squares 392 9.4.1 Derivation of Kernel Least Mean Squares 393 9.4.2 Implementation Challenges and Dual Formulation 394 9.5.3 Prediction of the Mackey–Glass Time Series with Kernel Recursive Least Squares 401 9.5.4 Beyond the Stationary Model 402 9.5.5 Example on Nonlinear Channel Identification and Reconvergence 405 9.6 Explicit Recursivity for Adaptive Kernel Models 406 9.6.1 Recursivity in Hilbert Spaces 406 9.6.2 Recursive Filters in Reproducing Kernel Hilbert Spaces 408 9.7 Online Sparsification with Kernels 411 9.7.1 Sparsity by Construction 411 9.7.2 Sparsity by Pruning 413 9.8 Probabilistic Approaches to Kernel Adaptive Filtering 414 9.8.1 Gaussian Processes and Kernel Ridge Regression 415 9.8.2 Online Recursive Solution for Gaussian Processes Regression 416 9.8.3 Kernel Recursive Least Squares Tracker 417 9.8.4 Probabilistic Kernel Least Mean Squares 418 9.9 Further Reading 418 9.9.1 Selection of Kernel Parameters 418 9.9.2 Multi-Kernel Adaptive Filtering 419 9.9.3 Recursive Filtering in Kernel Hilbert Spaces 419 9.10 Tutorials and Application Examples 419 9.10.1 Kernel Adaptive Filtering Toolbox 420 9.10.2 Prediction of a Respiratory Motion Time Series 421 9.10.3 Online Regression on the KIN?h?eK Dataset 423 9.10.4 The Mackey–Glass Time Series 425 9.10.5 Explicit Recursivity on Reproducing Kernel in Hilbert Space and Electroencephalogram Prediction 427 9.10.6 Adaptive Antenna Array Processing 428 9.11 Questions and Problems 430 Part III Classification, Detection, and Feature Extraction 433 10 Support Vector Machine and Kernel Classification Algorithms 435 10.1 Introduction 435 10.2 Support Vector Machine and Kernel Classifiers 435 10.2.1 Support Vector Machines 435 10.2.2 Multiclass and Multilabel Support Vector Machines 441 10.2.3 Least-Squares Support Vector Machine 447 10.2.4 Kernel Fisher’s Discriminant Analysis 448 10.3 Advances in Kernel-Based Classification 452 10.3.1 Large Margin Filtering 452 10.3.2 Semisupervised Learning 454 10.3.3 Multiple Kernel Learning 460 10.3.4 Structured-Output Learning 462 10.3.5 Active Learning 468 10.4 Large-Scale Support Vector Machines 477 10.4.1 Large-Scale Support Vector Machine Implementations 477 10.4.2 Random Fourier Features 478 10.4.3 Parallel Support Vector Machine 480 10.4.4 Outlook 483 10.5 Tutorials and Application Examples 485 10.5.1 Examples of Support Vector Machine Classification 485 10.5.2 Example of Least-Squares Support Vector Machine 492 10.5.3 Kernel-Filtering Support Vector Machine for Brain–Computer Interface Signal Classification 493 10.5.4 Example of Laplacian Support Vector Machine 494 10.5.5 Example of Graph-Based Label Propagation 498 10.5.6 Examples of Multiple Kernel Learning 498 10.6 Concluding Remarks 501 10.7 Questions and Problems 502 11 Clustering and Anomaly Detection with Kernels 503 11.1 Introduction 503 11.2 Kernel Clustering 506 11.2.1 Kernelization of the Metric 506 11.2.2 Clustering in Feature Spaces 508 11.3 Domain Description Via Support Vectors 514 11.3.1 Support Vector Domain Description 514 11.3.2 One-Class Support Vector Machine 515 11.3.3 Relationship Between Support Vector Domain Description and Density Estimation 516 11.3.4 Semisupervised One-Class Classification 517 11.4 Kernel Matched Subspace Detectors 518 11.4.1 Kernel Orthogonal Subspace Projection 518 11.4.2 Kernel Spectral Angle Mapper 520 11.5 Kernel Anomaly Change Detection 522 11.5.1 Linear Anomaly Change Detection Algorithms 522 11.5.2 Kernel Anomaly Change Detection Algorithms 523 11.6 Hypothesis Testing with Kernels 525 11.6.1 Distribution Embeddings 526 11.6.3 Maximum Mean Discrepancy 527 11.6.3 One-Class Support Measure Machine 528 11.7 Tutorials and Application Examples 529 11.7.1 Example on Kernelization of the Metric 529 11.7.2 Example on Kernel k-Means 530 11.7.3 Domain Description Examples 531 11.7.4 Kernel Spectral Angle Mapper and Kernel Orthogonal Subspace Projection Examples 534 11.7.5 Example of Kernel Anomaly Change Detection Algorithms 536 11.7.6 Example on Distribution Embeddings and Maximum Mean Discrepancy 540 11.8 Concluding Remarks 541 11.9 Questions and Problems 542 12 Kernel Feature Extraction in Signal Processing 543 12.1 Introduction 543 12.2 Multivariate Analysis in Reproducing Kernel Hilbert Spaces 545 12.2.1 Problem Statement and Notation 545 12.2.2 Linear Multivariate Analysis 546 12.2.3 Kernel Multivariate Analysis 549 12.2.4 Multivariate Analysis Experiments 551 12.3 Feature Extraction with Kernel Dependence Estimates 555 12.3.1 Feature Extraction Using Hilbert–Schmidt Independence Criterion 556 12.3.2 Blind Source Separation Using Kernels 563 12.4 Extensions for Large-Scale and Semisupervised Problems 570 12.4.2 Efficiency with the Incomplete Cholesky Decomposition 570 12.4.3 Efficiency with Random Fourier Features 570 12.4.3 Sparse Kernel Feature Extraction 571 12.4.4 Semisupervised Kernel Feature Extraction 573 12.5 Domain Adaptation with Kernels 575 12.5.1 Kernel Mean Matching 578 12.5.2 Transfer Component Analysis 579 12.5.3 Kernel Manifold Alignment 581 12.5.4 Relations between Domain Adaptation Methods 585 12.5.5 Experimental Comparison between Domain Adaptation Methods 12.6 Concluding Remarks 587 12.7 Questions and Problems 588 References 589Index 631

Read more less

Book SynopsisA methodologically sophisticated, comprehensive approach to applying the Agile fixed-price contract to IT projects while maximizing customer and supplier relationships Interesting and necessary for IT managers and IT lawyers. ?Walter J. Jaburek, Dipl.-Ing., Dr. iur., Dr. techn. Approximately 50 percent of software developers use Scrum, an iterative and incremental development method for managing software projects and product or application development, in their work. The benefit of Scrum and other Agile methods is that they can address shifts in a large project that traditional managerial methods cannot. Written by pioneers and leaders in the field of Agile and Scrum, Agile Contracts is the only book dedicated exclusively to the legal, procurement, and project management considerations of Agile contracts. Providing templates, a toolbox, and examples of Agile fixed-price contracts, the book presents an alternative option to fixed-price, time-bTrade Review“Given what FAR says so eloquently and the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) and Office of Federal Procurement Policy have reaffirmed, it is not surprising that on June 14, 2012, the OMB provided a 25-page memorandum providing guidance to support modular development that specifically addressed the practices and issues raised here. I recommend this book to all members of any integrated product team tasked with IT acquisition and contracting.” (Computing Reviews, 7 January 2013)Table of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgments xiii 1. Agility: What Is That? 1 1.1 The Agile Manifesto of 2001 6 1.2 Agile Development Based on Scrum 11 1.2.1 The Principles of Organization 14 1.2.2 The Process Model 14 1.2.3 Estimation in Scrum 19 1.3 Agility from the Perspective of Procurement 23 1.4 Agility from the Perspective of the Software Provider 25 1.5 The 12 Principles of Agile Software Development 26 1.6 Summary 32 2. The Missing Piece of the Puzzle 33 2.1 The Problems with Traditional Fixed-Price Contracts 37 2.2 The Problems with Time and Materials Contracts 43 2.3 Something New: The Agile Fixed-Price Contract 44 2.4 Summary 45 3. What Is an Agile Fixed-Price Contract? 47 3.1 Existing Approaches 48 3.2 The Agile Fixed-Price Contract 49 3.2.1 How Is an Agile Fixed-Price Contract Set Up? 50 3.3 Summary 71 4. Sample of an Agile Fixed-Price Contract 73 Preamble 74 §1 Definitions and Clarifications of Terms 75 §2 Contract Scope and Hierarchy of Documents 78 §3 Usage Rights 79 §4 Transparency and “Open Books” 79 §5 Acceptance 80 §6 Obligation of Both Parties to Co-Operate 81 §7 Client’s Obligations 84 §8 Escalation to the Steering Board and the Independent Experts 84 §9 Project Period 85 §10 Warranty, Compensation, and Indemnifi cation 86 §11 Limitation of Liability 86 §12 Contractor’s Compensation 87 §13 Force Majeure 87 §14 Secrecy 87 §15 Severability Clause 88 §16 Place of Performance, Jurisdiction, and Applicable Law 88 Appendix A: Commercial Agreements 88 Prices 88 Commercial Approach to the Project 90 Payment Milestones 92 Appendix B: Technical Scope and Process 92 Requirements: Backlog and Vision 92 Process for Development and Approval 93 Changes to the Contract (Exchange for Free) 95 Deliverables and Services 97 Mechanism to Calculate Costs of Future User Stories 98 Appendix C: 12 Principles of Cooperation 101 Appendix D: Quality Standards—Definition of Done 107 5. Tendering Based on an Agile Fixed-Price Contract 109 5.1 Appropriate Tender Content for an Agile Fixed-Price Contract 112 5.2 Requirements for Tendering and Selection 116 5.2.1 Competition 116 5.2.2 Comparability and Transparency 119 5.3 Tendering Steps with a Focus on Agile Fixed Price 122 5.3.1 Internal Goal Setting and Coordination 123 5.3.2 Preparation for the Invitation to Tender 124 5.3.3 Tender 126 5.3.4 Awarding of the Tender 130 5.3.5 Price Optimization Options 132 5.3.6 Project and Contract Management 134 5.3.7 Effort Inherent in the Tendering Process 134 5.4 Summary 134 6. Special Requirements for the Legal Framework of an Agile Fixed-Price Contract 137 6.1 Adaptable System for Scope 139 6.2 Warranty and Damages 140 6.3 Schedule and Milestones 141 6.4 Path of Escalation 142 6.5 Obligations 143 6.6 Summary 143 7. Guideline for the Negotiation of an Agile Fixed-Price Contract 145 7.1 Objectives of the Client 147 7.2 Objectives of the Contractor 148 7.3 Objectives and Bonus Payouts of the People Involved 149 7.4 Strategy for the Project and the Negotiation 151 7.5 Tactics for the Negotiation 152 7.6 Price Determination 155 7.7 Conclusion of the Negotiation and Project Steering 155 7.8 Conclusions 156 8. Advantages and Disadvantages of Agile Fixed-Price Contracts 157 8.1 Detailed Analysis of the Pros and Cons 158 8.1.1 Budget Security 159 8.1.2 Requirement Flexibility 159 8.1.3 Detailed Requirements 160 8.1.4 Negotiating Costs 160 8.1.5 Estimate Security 160 8.1.6 Quality Risk 160 8.1.7 Price Elevation Tendency 161 8.1.8 Probability of Winning a Project Tender 161 8.1.9 Cost Risk 161 8.1.10 Security to Deliver a Project as a Whole 161 8.1.11 Acceptance Efforts 174 8.1.12 Pricing Transparency 174 8.1.13 Progress Transparency 174 8.1.14 Permanent Regulation 174 8.1.15 Securing the Investment 174 8.2 Summary and Overview 182 8.3 Conclusions 184 9. Toolbox for Agile Fixed-Price Contracts 185 9.1 Stimulating Interest Before the Negotiation 186 9.2 Identifying Issues of the Other Party 189 9.3 Establishing Common Language and Experiences 189 9.4 Feature Shoot-out 191 9.5 The Black Swan Scenario 192 9.6 Workshop on Contract Setup 192 9.7 Reports and Metrics 196 9.7.1 KISS Backlog View 196 9.7.2 Focus: There Is a Single Goal! 197 10. Practical Examples 199 10.1 Example 1: Software Integration in a Migration Project 200 10.1.1 Initial Situation 200 10.1.2 Contract and Procedure for Traditional Methodologies 202 10.1.3 Contract and Procedure for Agile Methodologies 213 10.1.4 Contract for Example 1 222 10.2 Example 2: Creating a Software Product 240 10.2.1 Initial Situation 241 10.2.2 Contract and Procedure for a Traditional Fixed-Price Contract 241 10.2.3 Contract and Procedure for a Time and Materials Contract 253 10.2.4 Contract and Procedure for an Agile Fixed-Price Contract 261 10.2.5 Conclusions 268 Appendix: Questions and Answers 271 References 275 Index 279

Read more less

Book SynopsisAddresses the practical issues of current and future electric and plug-in hybrid electric vehicles (PHEVs), and focuses primarily on power electronics and motor drives based solutions for electric vehicle (EV) technologies.Table of ContentsForeword xix Preface xxi Acknowledgements xxv List of Contributors xxvii 1 Energy, Global Warming and Impact of Power Electronics in the Present Century 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Energy 2 1.3 Environmental Pollution: Global Warming Problem 3 1.4 Impact of Power Electronics on Energy Systems 8 1.5 Smart Grid 20 1.6 Electric/Hybrid Electric Vehicles 21 1.7 Conclusion and Future Prognosis 23 References 25 2 Challenges of the Current Energy Scenario: The Power Electronics Contribution 27 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Energy Transmission and Distribution Systems 28 2.3 Renewable Energy Systems 34 2.4 Transportation Systems 41 2.5 Energy Storage Systems 42 2.6 Conclusions 47 References 47 3 An Overview on Distributed Generation and Smart Grid Concepts and Technologies 50 3.1 Introduction 50 3.2 Requirements of Distributed Generation Systems and Smart Grids 51 3.3 Photovoltaic Generators 52 3.4 Wind and Mini-hydro Generators 55 3.5 Energy Storage Systems 56 3.6 Electric Vehicles 57 3.7 Microgrids 57 3.8 Smart Grid Issues 59 3.9 Active Management of Distribution Networks 60 3.10 Communication Systems in Smart Grids 61 3.11 Advanced Metering Infrastructure and Real-Time Pricing 62 3.12 Standards for Smart Grids 63 References 65 4 Recent Advances in Power Semiconductor Technology 69 4.1 Introduction 69 4.2 Silicon Power Transistors 70 4.3 Overview of SiC Transistor Designs 75 4.4 Gate and Base Drivers for SiC Devices 80 4.5 Parallel Connection of Transistors 89 4.6 Overview of Applications 97 4.7 Gallium Nitride Transistors 100 4.8 Summary 102 References 102 5 AC-Link Universal Power Converters: A New Class of Power Converters for Renewable Energy and Transportation 107 5.1 Introduction 107 5.2 Hard Switching ac-Link Universal Power Converter 108 5.3 Soft Switching ac-Link Universal Power Converter 112 5.4 Principle of Operation of the Soft Switching ac-Link Universal Power Converter 113 5.5 Design Procedure 122 5.6 Analysis 123 5.7 Applications 126 5.8 Summary 133 Acknowledgment 133 References 133 6 High Power Electronics: Key Technology forWind Turbines 136 6.1 Introduction 136 6.2 Development of Wind Power Generation 137 6.3 Wind Power Conversion 138 6.4 Power Converters for Wind Turbines 143 6.5 Power Semiconductors for Wind Power Converter 149 6.6 Controls and Grid Requirements for Modern Wind Turbines 150 6.7 Emerging Reliability Issues for Wind Power System 155 6.8 Conclusion 156 References 156 7 Photovoltaic Energy Conversion Systems 160 7.1 Introduction 160 7.2 Power Curves and Maximum Power Point of PV Systems 162 7.3 Grid-Connected PV System Configurations 165 7.4 Control of Grid-Connected PV Systems 181 7.5 Recent Developments in Multilevel Inverter-Based PV Systems 192 7.6 Summary 195 References 195 8 Controllability Analysis of Renewable Energy Systems 199 8.1 Introduction 199 8.2 Zero Dynamics of the Nonlinear System 201 8.3 Controllability of Wind Turbine Connected through L Filter to the Grid 202 8.4 Controllability of Wind Turbine Connected through LCL Filter to the Grid 208 8.5 Controllability and Stability Analysis of PV System Connected to Current Source Inverter 219 8.6 Conclusions 228 References 229 9 Universal Operation of Small/Medium-Sized Renewable Energy Systems 231 9.1 Distributed Power Generation Systems 231 9.2 Control of Power Converters for Grid-Interactive Distributed Power Generation Systems 243 9.3 Ancillary Feature 259 9.4 Summary 267 References 268 10 Properties and Control of a Doubly Fed Induction Machine 270 10.1 Introduction. Basic principles of DFIM 270 10.2 Vector Control of DFIM Using an AC/DC/AC Converter 280 10.3 DFIM-Based Wind Energy Conversion Systems 305 References 317 11 AC–DC–AC Converters for Distributed Power Generation Systems 319 11.1 Introduction 319 11.2 Pulse-Width Modulation for AC–DC–AC Topologies 328 11.3 DC-Link Capacitors Voltage Balancing in Diode-Clamped Converter 334 11.4 Control Algorithms for AC–DC–AC Converters 345 11.5 AC–DC–AC Converter with Active Power FeedForward 356 11.6 Summary and Conclusions 361 References 362 12 Power Electronics for More Electric Aircraft 365 12.1 Introduction 365 12.2 More Electric Aircraft 367 12.3 More Electric Engine (MEE) 372 12.4 Electric Power Generation Strategies 374 12.5 Power Electronics and Power Conversion 378 12.6 Power Distribution 381 12.7 Conclusions 384 References 385 13 Electric and Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicles 387 13.1 Introduction 387 13.2 Electric, Hybrid Electric and Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle Topologies 388 13.3 EV and PHEV Charging Infrastructures 392 13.4 Power Electronics for EV and PHEV Charging Infrastructure 404 13.5 Vehicle-to-Grid (V2G) and Vehicle-to-Home (V2H) Concepts 407 13.6 Power Electronics for PEV Charging 410 References 419 14 Multilevel Converter/Inverter Topologies and Applications 422 14.1 Introduction 422 14.2 Fundamentals of Multilevel Converters/Inverters 423 14.3 Cascaded Multilevel Inverters and Their Applications 432 14.4 Emerging Applications and Discussions 444 14.5 Summary 459 Acknowledgment 461 References 461 15 Multiphase Matrix Converter Topologies and Control 463 15.1 Introduction 463 15.2 Three-Phase Input with Five-Phase Output Matrix Converter 464 15.3 Simulation and Experimental Results 484 15.4 Matrix Converter with Five-Phase Input and Three-Phase Output 488 15.5 Sample Results 499 Acknowledgment 501 References 501 16 Boost Preregulators for Power Factor Correction in Single-Phase Rectifiers 503 16.1 Introduction 503 16.2 Basic Boost PFC 504 16.3 Half-Bridge Asymmetric Boost PFC 511 16.4 Interleaved Dual-Boost PFC 519 16.5 Conclusion 528 References 529 17 Active Power Filter 534 17.1 Introduction 534 17.2 Harmonics 535 17.3 Effects and Negative Consequences of Harmonics 535 17.4 International Standards for Harmonics 536 17.5 Types of Harmonics 537 17.5.1 Harmonic Current Sources 537 17.5.2 Harmonic Voltage Sources 537 17.6 Passive Filters 539 17.7 Power Definitions 540 17.8 Active Power Filters 543 17.9 APF Switching Frequency Choice Methodology 547 17.10 Harmonic Current Extraction Techniques (HCET) 548 17.11 Shunt Active Power Filter 555 17.12 Series Active Power Filter 564 17.13 Unified Power Quality Conditioner 565 Acknowledgment 569 References 569 18A Hardware-in-the-Loop Systems with Power Electronics: A Powerful Simulation Tool 573 18A.1 Background 573 18A.2 Increasing the Performance of the Power Stage 575 18A.3 Machine Model of an Asynchronous Machine 581 18A.4 Results and Conclusions 583 References 589 18B Real-Time Simulation of Modular Multilevel Converters (MMCs) 591 18B.1 Introduction 591 18B.2 Choice of Modeling for MMC and Its Limitations 597 18B.3 Hardware Technology for Real-Time Simulation 598 18B.4 Implementation for Real-Time Simulator Using Different Approach 601 18B.5 Conclusion 606 References 606 19 Model Predictive Speed Control of Electrical Machines 608 19.1 Introduction 608 19.2 Review of Classical Speed Control Schemes for Electrical Machines 609 19.3 Predictive Current Control 613 19.4 Predictive Torque Control 617 19.5 Predictive Torque Control Using a Direct Matrix Converter 619 19.6 Predictive Speed Control 622 19.7 Conclusions 626 Acknowledgment 627 References 627 20 The Electrical Drive Systems with the Current Source Converter 630 20.1 Introduction 630 20.2 The Drive System Structure 631 20.3 The PWM in CSCs 633 20.4 The Generalized Control of a CSR 636 20.5 The Mathematical Model of an Asynchronous and a Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor 639 20.6 The Current and Voltage Control of an Induction Machine 641 20.7 The Current and Voltage Control of Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor 651 20.8 The Control System of a Doubly Fed Motor Supplied by a CSC 657 20.9 Conclusion 661 References 662 21 Common-Mode Voltage and Bearing Currents in PWM Inverters: Causes, Effects and Prevention 664 21.1 Introduction 664 21.2 Determination of the Induction Motor Common-Mode Parameters 671 21.3 Prevention of Common-Mode Current: Passive Methods 674 21.4 Active Systems for Reducing the CM Current 682 21.5 Common-Mode Current Reduction by PWM Algorithm Modifications 683 21.6 Summary 692 References 692 22 High-Power Drive Systems for Industrial Applications: Practical Examples 695 22.1 Introduction 695 22.2 LNG Plants 696 22.3 Gas Turbines (GTs): the Conventional Compressor Drives 697 22.4 Technical and Economic Impact of VFDs 699 22.5 High-Power Electric Motors 700 22.6 High-Power Electric Drives 705 22.7 Switching Devices 705 22.8 High-Power Converter Topologies 709 22.9 Multilevel VSI Topologies 711 22.10 Control of High-Power Electric Drives 719 22.11 Conclusion 723 Acknowledgment 724 References 724 23 Modulation and Control of Single-Phase Grid-Side Converters 727 23.1 Introduction 727 23.2 Modulation Techniques in Single-Phase Voltage Source Converters 729 23.3 Control of AC–DC Single-Phase Voltage Source Converters 748 23.4 Summary 763 References 763 24 Impedance Source Inverters 766 24.1 Multilevel Inverters 766 24.2 Quasi-Z-Source Inverter 767 24.3 qZSI-Based Cascade Multilevel PV System 775 24.4 Hardware Implementation 780 Acknowledgments 782 References 782 Index 787

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe search for alternative energy sources to offset diminishing resources of easy and cost-effective fossil fuels has become a global initiative. Fuel generated from biomass is a leading competitor in this arena.Trade Review"Summing Up: Recommended. Upper-division undergraduates through professionals." (Choice, 1 June 2013)Table of ContentsPreface xvii List of Contributors xix 1 Introduction to Biofuels 1 Pramod Kumar and Vikash Babu 1.1 Global Scenario of Biofuel Production and Economy 4 References 7 2 Advances in Biofuel Production 11 M.D. Berni, I.L. Dorileo, J.M. Prado, T. Forster-Carneiro and M.A.A. Meireles 2.1 Introduction 12 2.2 Advances in the Production of First, Second and Third Generation Biofuels 16 2.3 Future Trends of Biofuels Development 44 2.3 Conclusions 54 Acknowledgements 55 References 55 3 Processing of Biofuels 59 Divya Gupta, Ajeet Singh, Ashwani Sharma and Anshul Nigam 3.1 Introduction 59 3.2 Biodiesel from Algae 61 3.3 Cellulosic Ethanol 72 3.4 Syngas 78 3.5 Conclusion 80 References 80 4 Bioconversion of Lignocellulosic Biomass for Bioethanol Production 85 Virendra Kumar, Purnima Dhall, Rita Kumar and Anil Kumar 4.1 Introduction 86 4.2 Bioethanol Production Process 90 4.3 Genetic Engineering for Bioethanol Production 109 4.4 Future Perspective 111 References 112 5 Recent Progress on Microbial Metabolic Engineering for the Conversion of Lignocellulose Waste for Biofuel Production 119 Shubhangini Sharma, Reena, Anil Kumar and Pallavi Mittal 5.1 Introduction 120 5.2 Role of Genetic and Metabolic Engineering in Biofuel Production 122 5.3 Problems with Different Biofuels and Areas of Improvement 124 5.4 General Process of Metabolic Engineering 127 5.5 Metabolic Engineering in Different Microorganisms 133 5.6 Conclusion 141 References 142 6 Microbial Production of Biofuels 147 Panwar AS, Jugran J and Joshi GK 6.1 Introduction 147 6.2 Types of Biofuels Produced Through Microorganisms 149 6.3 Future Prospects and Conclusion 163 References 165 7 Microalgae in Biofuel Production-Current Status and Future Prospects 167 Navneet Singh Chaudhary 7.1 Introduction 168 7.2 Microalgae in Biofuel Production 170 7.3 Comparison of Cyanobacteria with Microalgae in Biofuel Production 171 7.4 Applications of Cyanobacteria and Microalgae in Biofuel Production 172 7.5 Selection of Microalgae for Biofuel Production 177 7.6 Cultivation of Microalgae for Production of Biofuel and Co-Products 179 7.7 Harvesting and Drying of Microalgae 181 7.8 Processing, Extraction and Separation of Microalgae 182 7.9 Biofuels and Co-Products from Microalgae 184 7.10 Challenges and Hurdles in Biofuel Production 192 7.11 Genetic and Metabolic Engineering of Microalgae for Biofuel–Bioenergy Production 198 7.12 Conclusion and Future Prospectus 204 References 206 8 Bioethanol Production Processes 211 Mohammad J. Taherzadeh, Patrik R. Lennartsson, Oliver Teichert and Håkan Nordholm 8.1 Introduction 211 8.2 Global Market for Bioethanol and Future Prospects 212 8.3 Overall Process of Bioethanol Production 213 8.4 Production of Sugars from Raw Materials 213 8.5 Characterization of Lignocellulosic Materials 218 8.6 Sugar Solution from Lignocellulosic Materials 220 8.7 Basic Concepts of Fermentation 225 8.8 Conversion of Simple Sugars to Ethanol 225 8.9 Biochemical Basis for Ethanol Production from Hexoses 226 8.10 Biochemical Basis for Ethanol Production from Pentoses 228 8.11 Microorganisms Related to Ethanol Fermentation 229 8.12 Fermentation Processes 233 8.13 Ethanol Recovery 242 8.14 Distillation 243 8.15 Alternative Processes for Ethanol Recovery and Purification 245 8.16 Ethanol Dehydration 246 8.17 Distillers’ Dried Grains with Solubles 247 8.18 Sustainability of Bioethanol Production 248 8.19 Concluding Remarks and Future Prospects 249 References 249 9 Production of Butanol: A Biofuel 255 Sapna Jain, Mukesh Kumar Yadav and Ajay Kumar 9.1 Introduction 256 9.2 Butanol and its Properties 257 9.3 Butanol as Fuel 257 9.4 Industrial applications of Butanol and its Derivatives 260 9.5 Methods for Production of Butanol 261 9.6 In situ Separation Techniques for Butanol 273 9.7 Future Prospects 279 References 280 10 Production of Biodiesel from Various Sources 285 Komal Saxena, Avinash Kumar Sharma, Lalit Agrawal and Ashish Deep Gupta 10.1 Introduction 285 10.2 Sources/Feedstocks for the Production of Biodiesel 286 10.3 Various Processes of Biodiesel Production 290 10.4 Determination of Yield, Process Optimization and Biodiesel Standardization 302 10.5 Conclusion 304 References 304 11 Bio-Hydrogen Production: Current Scenarios and Future Prospects 309 Sumita Srivastav, Prashant Anthwal, Tribhuwan Chandra and Ashish Thapliyal 11.1 Introduction 310 11.2 Conventional Methods of Hydrogen Production 310 11.3 Hydrogen from Renewables Sources 312 11.4 Methods of Hydrogen Production through Bio-Routes involving Biochemical Processes 315 11.5 Recent Advancement in Production of Bio-Hydrogen 319 11.6 Status of Biohydrogen Production 329 11.7 Conclusions 329 References 331 12 Biomethane Production 333 Ruchika Goyal, Vikash Babu and Girijesh Kumar Patel 12.1 Introduction 334 12.2 Features of Biomethane 337 12.3 Global Scenario of Biomethane 339 12.4 Biomethane Production – Waste to Fuel Technology 341 12.5 Biogas Cleaning and Upgrading 343 12.6 Conclusions 354 References 354 Index 357

Read more less

Book SynopsisFully updated edition of the comprehensive, single-source reference on satellite technology and its applications Covering both the technology and its applications, Satellite Technology is a concise reference on satellites for commercial, scientific and military purposes.Table of ContentsPreface xxi PART I SATELLITE TECHNOLOGY 1 Introduction to Satellites and their Applications 3 1.1 Ever-expanding Application Spectrum 3 1.2 What is a Satellite? 4 1.3 History of the Evolution of Satellites 7 1.3.1 Era of Hot Air Balloons and Sounding Rockets 7 1.3.2 Launch of Early Artificial Satellites 8 1.3.3 Satellites for Communications, Meteorology and Scientific Exploration -- Early Developments 10 1.3.4 Non-geosynchronous Communication Satellites: Telstar and Relay Programmes 11 1.3.5 Emergence of Geosynchronous Communication Satellites 12 1.3.6 International Communication Satellite Systems 15 1.3.7 Domestic Communication Satellite Systems 16 1.3.8 Satellites for other Applications also made Rapid Progress 19 1.3.9 Small or Miniature Satellites 22 1.4 Evolution of Launch Vehicles 27 1.5 Future Trends 33 1.5.1 Communication Satellites 33 1.5.2 Weather Forecasting Satellites 33 1.5.3 Earth Observation Satellites 33 1.5.4 Navigational Satellites 34 1.5.5 Military Satellites 35 Further Reading 35 Glossary 35 2 Satellite Orbits and Trajectories 37 2.1 Definition of an Orbit and a Trajectory 37 2.2 Orbiting Satellites -- Basic Principles 37 2.2.1 Newton’s Law of Gravitation 39 2.2.2 Newton’s Second Law of Motion 40 2.2.3 Kepler’s Laws 41 2.3 Orbital Parameters 44 2.4 Injection Velocity and Resulting Satellite Trajectories 61 2.5 Types of Satellite Orbits 67 2.5.1 Orientation of the Orbital Plane 67 2.5.2 Eccentricity of the Orbit 68 2.5.3 Distance from Earth 70 2.5.4 Sun-synchronous Orbit 73 Further Readings 76 Glossary 76 3 Satellite Launch and In-orbit Operations 79 3.1 Acquiring the Desired Orbit 79 3.1.1 Parameters Defining the Satellite Orbit 80 3.1.2 Modifying the Orbital Parameters 83 3.2 Launch Sequence 95 3.2.1 Types of Launch Sequence 95 3.3 Launch Vehicles 100 3.3.1 Introduction 100 3.3.2 Classification 100 3.3.3 Anatomy of a Launch Vehicle 104 3.3.4 Principal Parameters 106 3.3.5 Major Launch Vehicles 108 3.4 Space Centres 127 3.4.1 Location Considerations 127 3.4.2 Constituent Parts of a Space Centre 128 3.4.3 Major Space Centres 129 3.5 Orbital Perturbations 144 3.6 Satellite Stabilization 146 3.6.1 Spin Stabilization 146 3.6.2 Three-axis or Body Stabilization 147 3.6.3 Comparison between Spin-stabilized and Three-axis Stabilized Satellites 149 3.6.4 Station Keeping 149 3.7 Orbital Effects on Satellite’s Performance 149 3.7.1 Doppler Shift 149 3.7.2 Variation in the Orbital Distance 150 3.7.3 Solar Eclipse 150 3.7.4 Sun Transit Outrage 150 3.8 Eclipses 150 3.9 Look Angles of a Satellite 154 3.9.1 Azimuth Angle 154 3.9.2 Elevation Angle 155 3.9.3 Computing the Slant Range 156 3.9.4 Computing the Line-of-Sight Distance between Two Satellites 158 3.10 Earth Coverage and Ground Tracks 166 3.10.1 Satellite Altitude and the Earth Coverage Area 166 3.10.2 Satellite Ground Tracks 167 3.10.3 Orbit Inclination and Latitude Coverage 170 Further Readings 172 Glossary 172 4 Satellite Hardware 174 4.1 Satellite Subsystems 174 4.2 Mechanical Structure 175 4.2.1 Design Considerations 176 4.2.2 Typical Structure 176 4.3 Propulsion Subsystem 177 4.3.1 Basic Principle 178 4.3.2 Types of Propulsion System 178 4.4 Thermal Control Subsystem 185 4.4.1 Sources of Thermal Inequilibrium 186 4.4.2 Mechanism of Heat Transfer 186 4.4.3 Types of Thermal Control 187 4.5 Power Supply Subsystem 189 4.5.1 Types of Power System 189 4.5.2 Solar Energy Driven Power Systems 190 4.5.3 Batteries 195 4.6 Attitude and Orbit Control 199 4.6.1 Attitude Control 200 4.6.2 Orbit Control 200 4.7 Tracking, Telemetry and Command Subsystem 201 4.8 Payload 203 4.9 Antenna Subsystem 205 4.9.1 Antenna Parameters 207 4.9.2 Types of Antennas 210 4.10 Space Qualification and Equipment Reliability 224 4.10.1 Space Qualification 224 4.10.2 Reliability 225 Further Readings 226 Glossary 227 5 Communication Techniques 229 5.1 Types of Information Signals 229 5.1.1 Voice Signals 230 5.1.2 Data Signals 230 5.1.3 Video Signals 230 5.2 Amplitude Modulation 231 5.2.1 Frequency Spectrum of the AM Signal 232 5.2.2 Power in the AM Signal 233 5.2.3 Noise in the AM Signal 233 5.2.4 Different Forms of Amplitude Modulation 235 5.3 Frequency Modulation 241 5.3.1 Frequency Spectrum of the FM Signal 243 5.3.2 Narrow Band and Wide Band FM 245 5.3.3 Noise in the FM Signal 246 5.3.4 Generation of FM Signals 250 5.3.5 Detection of FM Signals 252 5.4 Pulse Communication Systems 259 5.4.1 Analogue Pulse Communication Systems 259 5.4.2 Digital Pulse Communication Systems 261 5.5 Sampling Theorem 265 5.6 Shannon--Hartley Theorem 266 5.7 Digital Modulation Techniques 267 5.7.1 Amplitude Shift Keying (ASK) 268 5.7.2 Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) 268 5.7.3 Phase Shift Keying (PSK) 269 5.7.4 Differential Phase Shift Keying (DPSK) 270 5.7.5 Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) 271 5.7.6 Offset QPSK 273 5.7.7 8PSK and 16PSK 274 5.7.8 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) 274 5.7.9 Amplitude Phase Shift Keying (APSK) 276 5.8 Multiplexing Techniques 277 5.8.1 Frequency Division Multiplexing 277 5.8.2 Time Division Multiplexing 279 5.8.3 Code Division Multiplexing 281 Further Readings 282 Glossary 283 6 Multiple Access Techniques 286 6.1 Introduction to Multiple Access Techniques 286 6.1.1 Transponder Assignment Modes 287 6.2 Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) 288 6.2.1 Demand Assigned FDMA 290 6.2.2 Pre-assigned FDMA 290 6.2.3 Calculation of C/N Ratio 290 6.3 Single Channel Per Carrier (SCPC) Systems 293 6.3.1 SCPC/FM/FDMA System 293 6.3.2 SCPC/PSK/FDMA System 294 6.4 Multiple Channels Per Carrier (MCPC) Systems 295 6.4.1 MCPC/FDM/FM/FDMA System 295 6.4.2 MCPC/PCM-TDM/PSK/FDMA System 296 6.5 Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) 297 6.6 TDMA Frame Structure 297 6.6.1 Reference Burst 298 6.6.2 Traffic Burst 298 6.6.3 Guard Time 299 6.7 TDMA Burst Structure 299 6.7.1 Carrier and Clock Recovery Sequence 299 6.7.2 Unique Word 299 6.7.3 Signalling Channel 300 6.7.4 Traffic Information 301 6.8 Computing Unique Word Detection Probability 301 6.9 TDMA Frame Efficiency 302 6.10 Control and Coordination of Traffic 303 6.11 Frame Acquisition and Synchronization 305 6.11.1 Extraction of Traffic Bursts from Receive Frames 305 6.11.2 Transmission of Traffic Bursts 305 6.11.3 Frame Synchronization 305 6.12 FDMA vs. TDMA 307 6.12.1 Advantages of TDMA over FDMA 308 6.12.2 Disadvantages of TDMA over FDMA 308 6.13 Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) 308 6.13.1 DS-CDMA Transmission and Reception 309 6.13.2 Frequency Hopping CDMA (FH-CDMA) System 311 6.13.3 Time Hopping CDMA (TH-CDMA) System 313 6.13.4 Comparison of DS-CDMA, FH-CDMA and TH-CDMA Systems 314 6.14 Space Domain Multiple Access (SDMA) 316 6.14.1 Frequency Re-use in SDMA 316 6.14.2 SDMA/FDMA System 317 6.14.3 SDMA/TDMA System 318 6.14.4 SDMA/CDMA System 319 Further Readings 319 Glossary 320 7 Satellite Link Design Fundamentals 322 7.1 Transmission Equation 322 7.2 Satellite Link Parameters 324 7.2.1 Choice of Operating Frequency 324 7.2.2 Propagation Considerations 324 7.2.3 Noise Considerations 325 7.2.4 Interference-related Problems 325 7.3 Frequency Considerations 326 7.3.1 Frequency Allocation and Coordination 326 7.4 Propagation Considerations 330 7.4.1 Free-space Loss 330 7.4.2 Gaseous Absorption 331 7.4.3 Attenuation due to Rain 333 7.4.4 Cloud Attenuation 334 7.4.5 Signal Fading due to Refraction 334 7.4.6 Ionosphere-related Effects 335 7.4.7 Fading due to Multipath Signals 338 7.5 Techniques to Counter Propagation Effects 341 7.5.1 Attenuation Compensation Techniques 341 7.5.2 Depolarization Compensation Techniques 342 7.6 Noise Considerations 342 7.6.1 Thermal Noise 342 7.6.2 Noise Figure 343 7.6.3 Noise Temperature 344 7.6.4 Noise Figure and Noise Temperature of Cascaded Stages 345 7.6.5 Antenna Noise Temperature 346 7.6.6 Overall System Noise Temperature 350 7.7 Interference-related Problems 353 7.7.1 Intermodulation Distortion 354 7.7.2 Interference between the Satellite and Terrestrial Links 357 7.7.3 Interference due to Adjacent Satellites 357 7.7.4 Cross-polarization Interference 361 7.7.5 Adjacent Channel Interference 361 7.8 Antenna Gain-to-Noise Temperature (G/T) Ratio 365 7.9 Link Design 367 7.9.1 Link Design Procedure 368 7.9.2 Link Budget 368 7.10 Multiple Spot Beam Technology 371 Further Readings 374 Glossary 375 8 Earth Station 378 8.1 Earth Station 378 8.2 Types of Earth Station 380 8.2.1 Fixed Satellite Service (FSS) Earth Station 381 8.2.2 Broadcast Satellite Service (BSS) Earth Stations 382 8.2.3 Mobile Satellite Service (MSS) Earth Stations 383 8.2.4 Single Function Stations 384 8.2.5 Gateway Stations 385 8.2.6 Teleports 386 8.3 Earth Station Architecture 386 8.4 Earth Station Design Considerations 387 8.4.1 Key Performance Parameters 388 8.4.2 Earth Station Design Optimization 390 8.4.3 Environmental and Site Considerations 391 8.5 Earth Station Testing 392 8.5.1 Unit and Subsystem Level Testing 392 8.5.2 System Level Testing 392 8.6 Earth Station Hardware 398 8.6.1 RF Equipment 398 8.6.2 IF and Baseband Equipment 408 8.6.3 Terrestrial Interface 409 8.7 Satellite Tracking 412 8.7.1 Satellite Tracking System -- Block Diagram 412 8.7.2 Tracking Techniques 412 8.8 Some Representative Earth Stations 419 8.8.1 Goonhilly Satellite Earth Station 419 8.8.2 Madley Communications Centre 421 8.8.3 Madrid Deep Space Communications Complex 421 8.8.4 Canberra Deep Space Communications Complex 422 8.8.5 Goldstone Deep Space Communications Complex 423 8.8.6 Honeysuckle Creek Tracking Station 424 8.8.7 Kaena Point Satellite Tracking Station 426 8.8.8 Bukit Timah Satellite Earth Station 426 8.8.9 INTELSAT Teleport Earth Stations 426 8.8.10 SUPARCO Satellite Ground Station 428 8.8.11 Makarios Satellite Earth Station 428 8.8.12 Raisting Earth Station 428 8.8.13 Indian Deep Space Network 429 Glossary 430 9 Networking Concepts 433 9.1 Introduction 433 9.2 Network Characteristics 433 9.2.1 Availability 434 9.2.2 Reliability 434 9.2.3 Security 435 9.2.4 Throughput 436 9.2.5 Scalability 437 9.2.6 Topology 437 9.2.7 Cost 437 9.3 Applications and Services 437 9.3.1 Satellite and Network Services 438 9.3.2 Satellite Services 438 9.3.3 Network Services 438 9.3.4 Internet Services 439 9.4 Network Topologies 442 9.4.1 Bus Topology 442 9.4.2 Star Topology 443 9.4.3 Ring Topology 444 9.4.4 Mesh Topology 444 9.4.5 Tree Topology 445 9.4.6 Hybrid Topology 446 9.5 Network Technologies 447 9.5.1 Circuit Switched Networks 447 9.5.2 Packet Switched Networks 448 9.5.3 Circuit Switched versus Packet Switched Networks 449 9.6 Networking Protocols 450 9.6.1 Common Networking Protocols 450 9.6.2 The Open Systems Interconnect (OSI) Reference Model 453 9.6.3 Internet Protocol (IP) 456 9.6.4 Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) 457 9.6.5 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) 457 9.6.6 File Transfer Protocol (FTP) 457 9.6.7 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) 458 9.6.8 User Datagram Protocol (UDP) 458 9.6.9 Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) 459 9.7 Satellite Constellations 459 9.7.1 Constellation Geometry 459 9.7.2 Major Satellite Constellations 460 9.8 Internetworking with Terrestrial Networks 465 9.8.1 Repeaters, Bridges, Switches and Routers 465 9.8.2 Protocol Translation, Stacking and Tunnelling 466 9.8.3 Quality of Service 466 Further Readings 467 Glossary 467 PART II SATELLITE APPLICATIONS 10 Communication Satellites 473 10.1 Introduction to Communication Satellites 473 10.2 Communication-related Applications of Satellites 474 10.2.1 Geostationary Satellite Communication Systems 475 10.2.2 Non-geostationary Satellite Communication Systems 475 10.3 Frequency Bands 475 10.4 Payloads 475 10.4.1 Types of Transponders 477 10.4.2 Transponder Performance Parameters 478 10.5 Satellite versus Terrestrial Networks 479 10.5.1 Advantages of Satellites Over Terrestrial Networks 479 10.5.2 Disadvantages of Satellites with Respect to Terrestrial Networks 480 10.6 Satellite Telephony 481 10.6.1 Point-to-Point Trunk Telephone Networks 482 10.6.2 Mobile Satellite Telephony 482 10.7 Satellite Television 484 10.7.1 A Typical Satellite TV Network 484 10.7.2 Satellite--Cable Television 485 10.7.3 Satellite--Local Broadcast TV Network 486 10.7.4 Direct-to-Home Satellite Television 487 10.7.5 Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) 490 10.7.6 DVB-S and DVB-S2 Standards 491 10.7.7 DVB-RCS and DVB-RCS2 Standards 493 10.7.8 DVB-T and DVB-T2 Standards 493 10.7.9 DVB-H and DVB-SH Standards 494 10.8 Satellite Radio 496 10.9 Satellite Data Communication Services 496 10.9.1 Satellite Data Broadcasting 496 10.9.2 VSATs (Very Small Aperture Terminals) 497 10.10 Important Missions 502 10.10.1 International Satellite Systems 502 10.10.2 Regional Satellite Systems 512 10.10.3 National Satellite Systems 513 10.11 Future Trends 514 10.11.1 Development of Satellite Constellations in LEO Orbits 516 10.11.2 Development of Personal Communication Services (PCS) 516 10.11.3 Use of Higher Frequency Bands 517 10.11.4 Development of Light Quantum Communication Techniques 517 10.11.5 Development of Broadband Services to Mobile Users 517 10.11.6 Development of Hybrid Satellite/Terrestrial Networks 517 10.11.7 Advanced Concepts 518 Further Readings 519 Glossary 521 11 Remote Sensing Satellites 524 11.1 Remote Sensing -- An Overview 524 11.1.1 Aerial Remote Sensing 525 11.1.2 Satellite Remote Sensing 525 11.2 Classification of Satellite Remote Sensing Systems 526 11.2.1 Optical Remote Sensing Systems 526 11.2.2 Thermal Infrared Remote Sensing Systems 528 11.2.3 Microwave Remote Sensing Systems 529 11.3 Remote Sensing Satellite Orbits 531 11.4 Remote Sensing Satellite Payloads 531 11.4.1 Classification of Sensors 531 11.4.2 Sensor Parameters 534 11.5 Passive Sensors 535 11.5.1 Passive Scanning Sensors 536 11.5.2 Passive Non-scanning Sensors 539 11.6 Active Sensors 540 11.6.1 Active Non-scanning Sensors 540 11.6.2 Active Scanning Sensors 540 11.7 Types of Images 542 11.7.1 Primary Images 542 11.7.2 Secondary Images 542 11.8 Image Classification 545 11.9 Image Interpretation 546 11.9.1 Interpreting Optical and Thermal Remote Sensing Images 546 11.9.2 Interpreting Microwave Remote Sensing Images 547 11.9.3 GIS in Remote Sensing 547 11.10 Applications of Remote Sensing Satellites 548 11.10.1 Land Cover Classification 548 11.10.2 Land Cover Change Detection 549 11.10.3 Water Quality Monitoring and Management 550 11.10.4 Flood Monitoring 551 11.10.5 Urban Monitoring and Development 552 11.10.6 Measurement of Sea Surface Temperature 552 11.10.7 Deforestation 553 11.10.8 Global Monitoring 553 11.10.9 Predicting Disasters 555 11.10.10 Other Applications 558 11.11 Major Remote Sensing Missions 558 11.11.1 Landsat Satellite System 558 11.11.2 SPOT Satellite System 561 11.11.3 Radarsat Satellite System 564 11.11.4 Indian Remote Sensing Satellite System 565 11.12 Future Trends 573 Further Readings 574 Glossary 575 12 Weather Satellites 577 12.1 Weather Forecasting -- An Overview 577 12.2 Weather Forecasting Satellite Fundamentals 580 12.3 Images from Weather Forecasting Satellites 580 12.3.1 Visible Images 580 12.3.2 IR Images 582 12.3.3 Water Vapour Images 583 12.3.4 Microwave Images 584 12.3.5 Images Formed by Active Probing 585 12.4 Weather Forecasting Satellite Orbits 586 12.5 Weather Forecasting Satellite Payloads 587 12.5.1 Radiometer 588 12.5.2 Active Payloads 589 12.6 Image Processing and Analysis 592 12.6.1 Image Enhancement Techniques 592 12.7 Weather Forecasting Satellite Applications 593 12.7.1 Measurement of Cloud Parameters 594 12.7.2 Rainfall 594 12.7.3 Wind Speed and Direction 595 12.7.4 Ground-level Temperature Measurements 596 12.7.5 Air Pollution and Haze 596 12.7.6 Fog 596 12.7.7 Oceanography 596 12.7.8 Severe Storm Support 597 12.7.9 Fisheries 598 12.7.10 Snow and Ice Studies 598 12.8 Major Weather Forecasting Satellite Missions 599 12.8.1 GOES Satellite System 599 12.8.2 Meteosat Satellite System 605 12.8.3 Advanced TIROS-N (ATN) NOAA Satellites 608 12.9 Future of Weather Forecasting Satellite Systems 612 Further Readings 612 Glossary 613 13 Navigation Satellites 614 13.1 Development of Satellite Navigation Systems 614 13.1.1 Doppler Effect based Satellite Navigation Systems 615 13.1.2 Trilateration-based Satellite Navigation Systems 615 13.2 Global Positioning System (GPS) 621 13.2.1 Space Segment 621 13.2.2 Control Segment 622 13.2.3 User Segment 623 13.3 Working Principle of the GPS 625 13.3.1 Principle of Operation 625 13.3.2 GPS Signal Structure 627 13.3.3 Pseudorange Measurements 628 13.3.4 Determination of the Receiver Location 629 13.4 GPS Positioning Services and Positioning Modes 631 13.4.1 GPS Positioning Services 631 13.4.2 GPS Positioning Modes 632 13.5 GPS Error Sources 634 13.6 GLONASS Satellite System 637 13.6.1 GLONASS Segments 638 13.6.2 GLONASS Signal Structure 639 13.7 GPS-GLONASS Integration 641 13.8 EGNOS Satellite Navigation System 642 13.9 Galileo Satellite Navigation Systems 645 13.9.1 Three-Phase Development Programme 645 13.9.2 Services 646 13.10 Indian Regional Navigational Satellite System (IRNSS) 647 13.11 Compass Satellite Navigation System 648 13.12 Hybrid Navigation Systems 648 13.13 Applications of Satellite Navigation Systems 650 13.13.1 Military Applications 650 13.13.2 Civilian Applications 651 13.14 Future of Satellite Navigation Systems 654 Further Readings 655 Glossary 656 14 Scientific Satellites 658 14.1 Satellite-based versus Ground-based Scientific Techniques 658 14.2 Payloads on Board Scientific Satellites 659 14.2.1 Payloads for Studying Earth’s Geodesy 659 14.2.2 Payloads for Earth Environment Studies 660 14.2.3 Payloads for Astronomical Studies 661 14.3 Applications of Scientific Satellites -- Study of Earth 665 14.3.1 Space Geodesy 665 14.3.2 Tectonics and Internal Geodynamics 669 14.3.3 Terrestrial Magnetic Fields 670 14.4 Observation of the Earth’s Environment 670 14.4.1 Study of the Earth’s Ionosphere and Magnetosphere 671 14.4.2 Study of the Earth’s Upper Atmosphere (Aeronomy) 677 14.4.3 Study of the Interaction between Earth and its Environment 679 14.5 Astronomical Observations 680 14.5.1 Observation of the Sun 681 14.6 Missions for Studying Planets of the Solar System 686 14.6.1 Mercury 691 14.6.2 Venus 692 14.6.3 Mars 694 14.6.4 Outer Planets 697 14.6.5 Moon 703 14.6.6 Asteroids 705 14.6.7 Comets 706 14.7 Missions Beyond the Solar System 707 14.8 Other Fields of Investigation 710 14.8.1 Microgravity Experiments 710 14.8.2 Life Sciences 711 14.8.3 Material Sciences 712 14.8.4 Cosmic Ray and Fundamental Physics Research 713 14.9 Future Trends 714 Further Readings 715 Glossary 715 15 Military Satellites 717 15.1 Military Satellites -- An Overview 717 15.1.1 Applications of Military Satellites 718 15.2 Military Communication Satellites 718 15.3 Development of Military Communication Satellite Systems 719 15.3.1 American Systems 720 15.3.2 Russian Systems 724 15.3.3 Satellites Launched by other Countries 725 15.4 Frequency Spectrum Utilized by Military Communication Satellite Systems 726 15.5 Dual-use Military Communication Satellite Systems 727 15.6 Reconnaisance Satellites 728 15.6.1 Image Intelligence or IMINT Satellites 728 15.7 SIGINT Satellites 732 15.7.1 Development of SIGINT Satellites 733 15.8 Early Warning Satellites 735 15.8.1 Major Early Warning Satellite Programmes 736 15.9 Nuclear Explosion Satellites 738 15.10 Military Weather Forecasting Satellites 738 15.11 Military Navigation Satellites 739 15.12 Space Weapons 739 15.12.1 Classification of Space Weapons 740 15.13 Strategic Defence Initiative 745 15.13.1 Ground Based Programmes 746 15.13.2 Directed Energy Weapon Programmes 749 15.13.3 Space Programmes 751 15.13.4 Sensor Programmes 752 15.14 Directed Energy Laser Weapons 752 15.14.1 Advantages 753 15.14.2 Limitations 753 15.14.3 Directed Energy Laser Weapon Components 754 15.14.4 Important Design Parametres 755 15.14.5 Important Laser Sources 756 15.14.6 Beam Control Technology 763 15.15 Advanced Concepts 764 15.15.1 New Surveillance Concepts Using Satellites 765 15.15.2 Long Reach Non-lethal Laser Dazzler 765 15.15.3 Long Reach Laser Target Designator 766 Further Readings 767 Glossary 767 16 Emerging Trends 769 16.1 Introduction 769 16.2 Space Tethers 769 16.2.1 Space Tethers -- Different Types 770 16.2.2 Applications 774 16.2.3 Space Tether Missions 775 16.2.4 Space Elevator 779 16.3 Aerostat Systems 781 16.3.1 Components of an Aerostat System 782 16.3.2 Types of Aerostat Systems 782 16.3.3 Applications 783 16.4 Millimetre Wave Satellite Communication 784 16.4.1 Millimetre Wave Band 784 16.4.2 Advantages 785 16.4.3 Propagation Considerations 787 16.4.4 Applications 788 16.4.5 Millimetre Wave Satellite Missions 789 16.5 Space Stations 793 16.5.1 Importance of Space Stations 794 16.5.2 Space Stations of the Past 794 16.5.3 Currently Operational Systems 797 16.5.4 Planned Space Stations 799 16.5.5 Emerging Space Station Concepts 801 Further Readings 803 Glossary 804 Index 807

Read more less

Book SynopsisWind energy technology has progressed enormously over the last decade. In coming years it will continue to develop in terms of power ratings, performance and installed capacity of large wind turbines worldwide, with exciting developments in offshore installations. Designed to meet the training needs of wind engineers, this introductory text puts wind energy in context, from the natural resource to the assessment of cost effectiveness and bridges the gap between theory and practice. The thorough coverage spans the scientific basics, practical implementations and the modern state of technology used in onshore and offshore wind farms for electricity generation. Key features: provides in-depth treatment of all systems associated with wind energy, including the aerodynamic and structural aspects of blade design, the flow of energy and loads through the wind turbine, the electrical components and power electronics including control systems explains the Trade Review“'Spanning the scientific basics, practical implementations and the state of modern technology, this title looks like an authoritative resource for anyone who needs to ensure their turbine knowledge is up to scratch." (Real Power, 1 April 2014) Table of ContentsPreface xiii About the Authors xiv 1 The History of Wind Energy 1 Jos Beurskens 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 The First Windmills: 600–1890 2 1.2.1 Technical Development of the First Horizontal Windmills 5 1.3 Generation of Electricity using Wind Farms: Wind Turbines 1890–1930 10 1.4 The First Phase of Innovation: 1930–1960 16 1.5 The Second Phase of Innovation and Mass Production: 1960 to Today 25 1.5.1 The State-Supported Development of Large Wind Turbines 28 1.5.2 The Development of Smaller Wind Turbines 36 1.5.3 Wind Farms, Offshore and Grid Connection 38 1.5.4 International Grids 41 1.5.5 To Summarise 43 References 43 2 The International Development of Wind Energy 45 Klaus Rave 2.1 The Modern Energy Debate 45 2.2 The Reinvention of the Energy Market 48 2.3 The Importance of the Power Grid 50 2.4 The New Value-added Chain 53 2.5 International Perspectives 55 2.6 Expansion into Selected Countries 58 2.7 The Role of the EU 59 2.8 International Institutions and Organisations 61 2.8.1 Scenarios 64 2.9 Global Wind Energy Outlook 2012 – The Global View into the Future 65 2.9.1 Development of the Market in Selected Countries 65 2.10 Conclusion 71 References 71 3 Wind Resources, Site Assessment and Ecology 73 Hermann van Radecke 3.1 Introduction 73 3.2 Wind Resources 73 3.2.1 Global Wind Systems and Ground Roughness 73 3.2.2 Topography and Roughness Length 75 3.2.3 Roughness Classes 76 3.2.4 Contour Lines and Obstacles 79 3.2.5 Wind Resources with WAsP, WindPRO, Windfarmer 81 3.2.6 Correlating Wind Potential with Mesoscale Models and Reanalysis Data 84 3.2.7 Wind in the Wind Farm 90 3.2.8 Wind Frequency Distribution 95 3.2.9 Site Classification and Annual Energy Production 96 3.2.10 Reference Yield and Duration of Increased Subsidy 99 3.3 Acoustics 101 3.3.1 The dB(A) Unit 101 3.3.2 Sources of Noise 103 3.3.3 Propagation through the Air 105 3.3.4 Imission Site and Benchmarks 105 3.3.5 Frequency Analysis, Tone Adjustment and Impulse Adjustment 106 3.3.6 Methods of Noise Reduction 106 3.3.7 Regulations for Minimum Distances 107 3.4 Shadow 107 3.5 Turbulence 109 3.5.1 Turbulence from Surrounding Environment 110 3.5.2 Turbulence Attributed to Turbines 111 3.6 Two Comprehensive Software Tools for Planning Wind Farms 111 3.7 Technical Guidelines, Fgw Guidelines and IEC Standards 112 3.8 Environmental Influences Bundes-Immissionsschutzgesetz (Federal Imission Control Act) and Approval Process 113 3.8.1 German Imission Protection Law (BImSchG) 114 3.8.2 Approval Process 115 3.8.3 Environmental Impact Assessment (Eia) 115 3.8.4 Specific Aspects of the Process 118 3.8.5 Acceptance 121 3.8.6 Monitoring and Clarifying Plant-Specific Data 121 3.9 Example Problems 121 3.10 Solutions to the Problems 123 References 124 4 Aerodynamics and Blade Design 126 Alois Schaffarczyk 4.1 Summary 126 4.2 Horizontal Plants 126 4.2.1 General 126 4.2.2 Basic Aerodynamic Terminology 127 4.3 Integral Momentum Theory 130 4.3.1 Momentum Theory of Wind Turbines: the Betz Limiting Value 130 4.3.2 Changes in Air Density with Temperature and Altitude 132 4.3.3 Influence of the Finite Blade Number 133 4.3.4 Swirl Losses and Local Optimisation of the Blades According to Glauert 134 4.3.5 Losses Due to Profile Drag 136 4.4 Momentum Theory of the Blade Elements 137 4.4.1 The Formulation 137 4.4.2 Example of an Implementation: WT-Perf 139 4.4.3 Optimisation and Design Rules for Blades 139 4.4.4 Extension of the Blade Element Method: The Differential Formulation 140 4.4.5 Three-Dimensional Computational Fluid Dynamics (Cfd) 141 4.4.6 Summary: Horizontal Plants 142 4.5 Vertical Plants 142 4.5.1 General 142 4.5.2 Aerodynamics of H Rotors 144 4.5.3 Aeroelastics of Vertical Axis Rotors 149 4.5.4 A 50 kW Rotor as an Example 150 4.5.5 Design Rules for Small Wind Turbines According to H-Darrieus Type A 150 4.5.6 Summary: Vertical Rotors 151 4.6 Wind-Driven Vehicles with a Rotor 151 4.6.1 Introduction 151 4.6.2 On the Theory of Wind-Driven Vehicles 152 4.6.3 Numerical Example 153 4.6.4 The Kiel Design Method 153 4.6.5 Evaluation 154 4.6.6 Completed Vehicles 155 4.6.7 Summary: Wind Vehicles 156 4.7 Exercises 157 References 158 5 Rotor Blades 162 Lothar Dannenberg 5.1 Introduction 162 5.2 Loads on Rotor Blades 163 5.2.1 Types of Loads 163 5.2.2 Fundamentals of the Strength Calculations 165 5.2.3 Cross-Sectional Values of Rotor Blades 167 5.2.4 Stresses and Deformations 172 5.2.5 Section Forces in the Rotor Blade 176 5.2.6 Bending and Inclination 178 5.2.7 Results According to Beam Theory 179 5.3 Vibrations and Buckling 180 5.3.1 Vibrations 180 5.3.2 Buckling and Stability Calculations 183 5.4 Finite Element Calculations 184 5.4.1 Stress Calculations 184 5.4.2 Fem Buckling Calculations 185 5.4.3 FEM Vibration Calculations 186 5.5 Fibre-Reinforced Plastics 187 5.5.1 Introduction 187 5.5.2 Materials (Fibres, Resins, Additives, Sandwich Materials) 188 5.5.3 Laminates and Laminate Properties 192 5.6 Production of Rotor Blades 195 5.6.1 Structural Parts of the Rotor Blades 195 5.6.2 Composite Manufacturing Methods 198 5.6.3 Assembly of the Rotor Blade 199 References 200 6 The Drive Train 202 Sönke Siegfriedsen 6.1 Introduction 202 6.2 Blade Angle Adjustment Systems 203 6.3 Wind Direction Tracking 209 6.3.1 General 209 6.3.2 Description of the Function 209 6.3.3 Components 210 6.3.4 Variations in Wind Direction Tracking Arrangements 213 6.4 Drive Train Components 215 6.4.1 Rotor Locking and Rotor Rotating Arrangements 216 6.4.2 Rotor Shaft and Mountings 217 6.4.3 Gears 220 6.4.4 Brake and Coupling 223 6.4.5 Generator 225 6.5 Drive Train Concepts 227 6.5.1 Direct-Driven – Double Mounting 228 6.5.2 Direct-Driven – Torque Support 230 6.5.3 One–Two Step Geared Drives – Double Bearings 232 6.5.4 One–Two Step Geared Drives – Torque Support 234 6.5.5 Three–Four Step Geared Drives – Double Mountings 235 6.5.6 Three–Four Step Geared Drives – Three-Point Mountings 237 6.5.7 Three–Four Step Geared Drives – Torque Support 239 6.6 Damage and Causes of Damage 240 6.7 Design of Drive Train Components 241 6.7.1 LDD 244 6.7.2 RFC 244 6.8 Intellectual Property in the Wind Industry 246 6.8.1 Example Patents of Drive Trains 247 Further Reading 251 7 Tower and Foundation 253 Torsten Faber 7.1 Introduction 253 7.2 Guidelines and Standards 255 7.3 Tower Loading 255 7.3.1 Fatigue Loads 255 7.3.2 Extreme Loads 257 7.4 Verification of the Structure 258 7.4.1 Proof of Load Capacity 258 7.4.2 Proof of Fitness for Use 259 7.4.3 Proof of Foundation 259 7.4.4 Vibration Calculations (Eigen Frequencies) 260 7.5 Design Details 261 7.5.1 Door Openings in Steel Tube Towers 262 7.5.2 Ring Flange Connections 262 7.5.3 Welded Connections 262 7.6 Materials for Towers 263 7.6.1 Steel 263 7.6.2 Concrete 263 7.6.3 Timber 264 7.6.4 Glass Fibre-Reinforced Plastic 265 7.7 Model Types 265 7.7.1 Tubular Towers 265 7.7.2 Lattice Masts 266 7.7.3 Guyed Towers 266 7.8 Foundations for Onshore WTs 267 7.8.1 Force of Gravity 267 7.8.2 Piles 267 7.8.3 Cables 267 7.9 Exercises 268 7.10 Solutions 269 References 272 8 Power Electronics and Generator Systems for Wind Turbines 273 Friedrich W. Fuchs 8.1 Introduction 273 8.2 Single-Phase AC Voltage and Three-Phase AC Voltage Systems 275 8.3 Transformer 278 8.3.1 Principle and Calculations 278 8.3.2 Equivalent Circuit Diagram, Phasor Diagram 279 8.3.3 Simplified Equivalent Circuit Diagram 281 8.3.4 Three-Phase Transformers 282 8.4 Generators for Wind Turbines 283 8.4.1 Induction Machine with Short-Circuit Rotor 284 8.4.2 Induction Machine with Slip Ring Rotor 295 8.5 Synchronous Machines 303 8.5.1 General Function 303 8.5.2 Voltage Equations and Equivalent Circuit Diagram 304 8.5.3 Power and Torque 306 8.5.4 Models of Externally Excited Synchronous Machines 307 8.5.5 Permanently Excited Synchronous Machines 308 8.5.6 Variable Speed Operation of Synchronous Machines 309 8.6 Converter Systems for Wind Turbines 310 8.6.1 General Function 310 8.6.2 Frequency Converter in Two-Level Topology 311 8.6.3 Frequency Converter with Multi-Level Circuits 317 8.7 Control of Variable-Speed Converter-Generator Systems 318 8.7.1 Control of the Converter-Fed Induction Generator with Short-Circuit Rotor 319 8.7.2 Control of the Doubly-Fed Induction Machine 325 8.7.3 Control of the Synchronous Machine 326 8.7.4 Control of the Grid-Side Converter 326 8.7.5 Design of the Controls 329 8.8 Compliance with the Grid Connection Requirements 329 8.9 Further Electronic Components 331 8.10 Features of the Power Electronics Generator System in Overview 332 8.11 Exercises 333 References 338 9 Control of Wind Energy Systems 340 Reiner Johannes Schütt 9.1 Fundamental Relationships 341 9.1.1 Allocation of the WTS Automation 341 9.1.2 System Properties of Energy Conversion in WTs 344 9.1.3 Energy Transformation at the Rotor 344 9.1.4 Energy Transformation at the Drive Train 347 9.1.5 Energy Conversion at the Generator-Converter System 348 9.1.6 Idealised Operating Characteristic Curves of WTs 351 9.2 WT Control Systems 352 9.2.1 Yaw Angle Control 352 9.2.2 Blade Angle Control 353 9.2.3 Active Power Control 354 9.2.4 Reactive Power Control 357 9.2.5 Summary of the Control Behaviour and Extended Operating Ranges of the WT 358 9.3 Operating Management Systems for WTs 358 9.3.1 Control of the Operating Sequence of WTs 359 9.3.2 Safety Systems 362 9.4 Wind Farm Control and Automation Systems 363 9.5 Remote Control and Monitoring 365 9.6 Communication Systems for WTS 366 References 368 10 Grid Integration 369 Sven Wanser and Frank Ehlers 10.1 Energy Supply Grids in Overview 369 10.1.1 General 369 10.1.2 Voltage Level of Electrical Supply Grids 370 10.1.3 Grid Structures 370 10.2 Grid Control 372 10.2.1 Controlling the Power Range 373 10.2.2 Compensating Power and Balancing Grids 373 10.2.3 Base Load, Medium Load and Peak Load 374 10.2.4 Frequency Stability 375 10.2.5 Primary Control, Secondary Control and Tertiary Control 376 10.2.6 Voltage Stability 378 10.2.7 System Services by means of Wind Turbines 378 10.3 Basic Terminology of Grid Integration of Wind Turbines 380 10.3.1 Basic Electrical Terminology 380 10.3.2 Grid Quality 384 10.4 Grid Connections for WTs 387 10.4.1 Rating the Grid Operating Media 388 10.4.2 Checking the Voltage Changes/Voltage Band 390 10.4.3 Checking the Grid Reaction ‘Fast Voltage Change’ 395 10.4.4 Checking the Short-Circuit Strength 396 10.5 Grid Connection of WTs 397 10.5.1 Switchgear 398 10.5.2 Protective Equipment 399 10.5.3 Integration into the Grid System 401 10.6 Further Developments in Grid Integration and Outlook 401 10.6.1 Grid Expansion 402 10.6.2 Load Displacement 404 10.6.3 Energy Storage 404 References 405 11 Offshore Wind Energy 406 Lothar Dannenberg 11.1 Offshore Wind Turbines 406 11.1.1 Introduction 406 11.1.2 Differences between Offshore and Onshore WTs 407 11.1.3 Environmental Conditions and Nature Protection 409 11.2 Currents and Loads 409 11.2.1 Currents 409 11.2.2 Current Loads 410 11.2.3 Vortex Shedding of Bodies Subject to Flows 412 11.3 Waves, Wave Loads 413 11.3.1 Wave Theories 413 11.3.2 Superposition of Waves and Currents 423 11.3.3 Loads Due to Waves (Morison Method) 425 11.4 Swell 430 11.4.1 Regular Swell 430 11.4.2 Irregular or Natural Swells 430 11.4.3 Statistics 431 11.4.4 Swell Spectra 432 11.4.5 Influence of Currents 436 11.4.6 Long-Term Statistics of the Swell 436 11.4.7 Extreme Waves 436 11.5 Scouring Formation, Growth, Corrosion and Ice 437 11.5.1 Scouring 437 11.5.2 Marine Growth 438 11.5.3 Ice Loads 439 11.5.4 Corrosion 439 11.6 Foundations for OWTs 441 11.6.1 Introduction 441 11.6.2 Fixed Foundations 442 11.6.3 Floating Foundations 447 11.6.4 Operating Strength 448 11.7 Soil Mechanics 450 11.7.1 Introduction 450 11.7.2 Soil Properties 450 11.7.3 Calculation of Load-Bearing Behaviour of the Sea Bed 451 References 454 Index 455

Read more less

Book SynopsisSystem Simulation Techniques with MATLAB and Simulink comprehensively explains how to use MATLAB and Simulink to perform dynamic systems simulation tasks for engineering and non-engineering applications.Table of ContentsForeword xiiiPreface xv1 Introduction to System Simulation Techniques and Applications 11.1 Overview of System Simulation Techniques 11.2 Development of Simulation Software 21.3 Introduction to MATLAB 51.4 Structure of the Book 7Exercises 9References 92 Fundamentals of MATLAB Programming 112.1 MATLAB Environment 112.2 Data Types in MATLAB 132.3 Matrix Computations in MATLAB 162.5 Programming and Tactics of MATLAB Functions 232.6 Two-dimensional Graphics in MATLAB 272.7 Three-dimensional Graphics 332.8 Graphical User Interface Design in MATLAB 362.9 Accelerating MATLAB Functions 52Exercises 60References 633 MATLAB Applications in Scientific Computations 653.1 Analytical and Numerical Solutions 663.2 Solutions to Linear Algebra Problems 673.3 Solutions of Calculus Problems 853.4 Solutions of Ordinary Differential Equations 913.5 Nonlinear Equation Solutions and Optimization 1103.6 Dynamic Programming and its Applications in Path Planning 1203.7 Data Interpolation and Statistical Analysis 124Exercises 136References 1424 Mathematical Modeling and Simulation with Simulink 1454.1 Brief Description of the Simulink Block Library 1464.2 Simulink Modeling 1594.3 Model Manipulation and Simulation Analysis 1644.4 Illustrative Examples of Simulink Modeling 1724.5 Modeling, Simulation and Analysis of Linear Systems 1804.6 Simulation of Continuous Nonlinear Stochastic Systems 184Exercises 188References 1915 Commonly Used Blocks and Intermediate-level Modeling Skills 1935.1 Commonly Used Blocks and Modeling Skills 1935.2 Modeling and Simulation of Multivariable Linear Systems 2025.3 Nonlinear Components with Lookup Table Blocks 2095.4 Block Diagram Based Solutions of Differential Equations 2175.5 Output Block Library 2265.6 Three-dimensional Animation of Simulation Results 2385.7 Subsystems and Block Masking Techniques 245Exercises 260References 2646 Advanced Techniques in Simulink Modeling and Applications 2656.1 Command-line Modeling in Simulink 2656.2 System Simulation and Linearization 2726.3 S-function Programming and Applications 2806.4 Examples of Optimization in Simulation: Optimal Controller Design Applications 296Exercises 303References 3067 Modeling and Simulation of Engineering Systems 3077.1 Physical System Modeling with Simscape 3087.2 Description of SimPowerSystems 3187.3 Modeling and Simulation of Electronic Systems 3227.4 Simulation of Motors and Electric Drive Systems 3367.5 Modeling and Simulation of Mechanical Systems 346Exercises 360References 3628 Modeling and Simulation of Non-Engineering Systems 3638.1 Modeling and Simulation of Pharmacokinetics Systems 3638.2 Video and Image Processing Systems 3768.3 Finite State Machine Simulation and Stateflow Applications 3908.4 Simulation of Discrete Event Systems with SimEvents 408Exercises 416References 4179 Hardware-in-the-loop Simulation and Real-time Control 4199.1 Simulink and Real-Time Workshop 4199.2 Introduction to dSPACE and its Blocks 4299.3 Introduction to Quanser and its Blocks 4309.4 Hardware-in-the-loop Simulation and Real-time Control Examples 4339.5 Low Cost Solutions with NIAT 4399.6 HIL Solutions with Even Lower Costs 4469.6.3 The MESABox 449Exercises 450References 451Appendix: Functions and Models 453Index 459

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive, practical book on software management that dispels real-world issues through relevant case studies Software managers inevitably will meet obstacles while trying to deliver quality products and provide value to customers, often with tight time restrictions. The result: Software War Stories. This book provides readers with practical advice on how to handle the many issues that can arise as a software project unfolds. It utilizes case studies that focus on what can be done to establish and meet reasonable expectations as they occur in government, industrial, and academic settings. The book also offers important discussions on both traditional and agile methods as well as lean development concepts. Software War Stories: Covers the basics of management as applied to situations ranging from agile projects to large IT projects with infrastructure problems Includes coverage of topics ranging from planning, estiTable of ContentsFOREWORD by Roger S. Pressman xiii PREFACE xv CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED 1 Goals and Scope 1 Understanding the Enterprise 2 Review of Software Management Fundamentals 3 Theory versus Practice: Which Is It? 6 Emphasizing Practitioner Roles 7 Setting Realistic Expectations 8 How Do You Know Whether You Will Be Successful? 13 Recognizing Bad Smells and Trusting Your Blink 13 Separating the Controllables from the Noncontrollables 14 Surveying the Tools of the Trade 15 Line Management Tools and Techniques 16 Project Management Tools and Techniques 17 Digging Deep to Find the Root Cause 18 Questions to Be Answered 18 Summary of Key Points 19 References 20 Web Pointers 20 CHAPTER 2 INDUSTRIAL CASE: ORGANIZING FOR ERP WITHIN A LARGE INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SHOP 23 Learning Objectives: Putting Project Management to Work 23 Setting the Stage: The Three-Headed Dragon 23 Options, Recommendation, and Reactions during the Transition to ERP 26 Outcomes and Lessons Learned When Introducing Matrix Management 32 Exercise: If You Were King, What Organizational Changes Would You Make to Breakdown the Silos? 33 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 35 References 35 Web Pointers 36 CHAPTER 3 INDUSTRIAL CASE: WHAT IS A REASONABLE COST AND SCHEDULE FOR A TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROJECT UPGRADE? 37 Learning Objectives: Establishing Realistic Cost and Schedule Goals 37 Setting the Stage: Can We Do It for the Target Cost? 37 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions While Striving to Satisfy Key Clients 41 Outcomes and Lessons Learned Using Incremental Development 49 Exercise: How Do You Get Your Bosses to Believe Your Estimates? 50 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 51 References 52 Web Pointers 52 CHAPTER 4 INDUSTRIAL CASE: GETTING BACK ON TRACK WITHIN A MANUFACTURING ENVIRONMENT 55 Learning Objectives: Getting Back on Track 55 Setting the Stage: Recognizing and Addressing the Trouble Signs 55 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions While Attempting to Restore Order 57 Outcomes and Lessons Learned Associated with Your Get-Well Plan 63 Exercise: When Trying to Get a Software Project Back on Track, What Do You Focus On? 64 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 69 References 69 Web Pointers 70 CHAPTER 5 INDUSTRIAL CASE: STAFF TURNOVER HAVING AN IMPACT IN FINANCIAL FIRM 73 Learning Objectives: Addressing Staffi ng Issues 73 Setting the Stage: Understanding the Learning Curve 73 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions While Building a Modern Test Organization 76 Outcomes and Lessons Learned While Addressing Test Issues 81 Exercise: What Nonfinancial Incentives Would You Use to Reduce Staff Turnover? 82 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 83 References 84 Web Pointers 85 CHAPTER 6 INDUSTRIAL CASE: ACQUIRING SOFTWARE FOR PIPELINE OPERATIONS 87 Learning Objectives: Developing Requirements Using Multidisciplinary Teams 87 Setting the Stage: How to Avoid Gold Plating and Other Common Maladies 87 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions When Specifying Requirements 89 Outcomes and Lessons Learned Relative to the Use of Feature-Based Specifications 97 Exercise: When Managing Requirements, What Are the Traps to Watch Out For? 97 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 99 References 100 Web Pointers 100 CHAPTER 7 INDUSTRIAL CASE: LAUNCHING SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS SALES ON THE INTERNET AND SOCIAL MEDIA 102 Learning Objectives: How Do You Transition a Start-Up from R&D to Doing Business? 102 Setting the Stage: Capitalizing on the Opportunities 102 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions as You Get Ready for Your Product Launch 104 Outcomes and Lessons Learned as Your Product Hits the Street 111 Exercise: How Do You Satisfy Business and Customer Needs When Selling Software? 112 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 114 References 115 Web Pointers 115 CHAPTER 8 GOVERNMENT CASE: MANAGING THE ACQUISITION OF A LARGE DEFENSE PROJECT 117 Learning Objectives: What to Do When a Contractor Is behind Schedule, over Budget, and Performing Badly 117 Setting the Stage: Who Do We Blame? 117 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions Resulting from an Independent Assessment 121 Outcomes and Lessons Learned When the Truth Is Exposed 126 Exercise: When Addressing Software Cost and Schedule Problems, How Do You Determine Their Root Causes? 127 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 129 References 129 Web Pointers 130 CHAPTER 9 GOVERNMENT CASE: TOO MUCH GOVERNANCE/OVERSIGHT HINDERS PROGRESS IN HEALTH CARE 132 Learning Objectives: How to Handle Extreme Governance Requirements Under Pressure 132 Setting the Stage: Governance and the Competitive Environment 132 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions Aimed at Validating the Architecture of a New Pharmacy System 136 Outcomes and Lessons Learned When Dealing with Customer Demands for Change 139 Exercise: How Much Oversight Is Enough within a Constrained but Competitive Contractual Environment? 141 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 143 References 144 Web Pointers 144 CHAPTER 10 GOVERNMENT CASE: NEW CONCEPTS FOR AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL 147 Learning Objectives: Making the Transition to Agile Methods 147 Setting the Stage: Change Management within Conservative Organizations 147 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions during the Transition to Agile Methods on a Large Project Being Developed Globally 149 Outcomes and Lessons Learned as You Scale Agile Methods for Use 154 Exercise: How Do You Mechanize the Agile Notion That Software Requirements Are a Learning Exercise Rather Than a Specification Process? 155 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 158 References 159 Web Pointers 160 CHAPTER 11 GOVERNMENT CASE: ADDRESSING CYBER CRIME ON THE INTERNET 163 Learning Objectives: How to Get Help in Covering Unbudgeted Tasks 163 Setting the Stage: The Quick Update Cycle 163 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions to Approaches to Handle Frequent Requests to Refresh Network Defenses 165 Outcomes and Lessons Learned Related to Getting Budget Relief 170 Exercise: How Do You Quickly Change a Software Product and Keep Customers Happy at the Same Time? 171 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 175 References 175 Web Pointers 176 CHAPTER 12 ACADEMIC CASE: HOW BEST TO EDUCATE THOSE ENTERING INDUSTRY 178 Learning Objectives: Getting New University Hires Up-to-Speed Quickly 178 Setting the Stage: What Does Industry Need from Universities? 178 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions When Recruiting at Universities 182 Outcomes and Lessons Learned Based on Recruiting Results 184 Exercise: What Education and Training Do You Provide for New Software Hires? 186 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 189 References 190 Web Pointers 190 CHAPTER 13 ACADEMIC CASE: RESEARCH AGENDAS THAT MATTER TO INDUSTRY 191 Learning Objectives: Sponsored Research Agendas 191 Setting the Stage: Research versus Teaching: A Dilemma? 191 Fact-Finding 193 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions Based on Research Discussions 193 Organization 194 Project 194 Process 195 Product 196 Recommendations 196 Outcomes and Lessons Learned Based on University Performance 197 Exercise: How Do You Stimulate Pursuit of Software Research in Academia That Has a Near Rather Than Far-Term Impact? 199 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 201 References 202 Web Pointers 202 CHAPTER 14 PULLING IT ALL TOGETHER 205 Software Management Secrets of Success 205 Gaining Insight and Advantage in Practice 206 Ten Management Techniques to Rely On 207 Ten Problems to Be Wary of When Pursuing Success 211 Things You Can and Cannot Do in General 212 If I Were King: My Six Wishes 213 Summary 214 References 214 Web Pointers 215 APPENDIX A ACRONYMS AND GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS 217 Acronyms Used within the Book 217 Key Terms Used within the Book 221 APPENDIX B RECOMMENDED READINGS, REFERENCES, AND RESOURCES 227 Recommended Readings 227 References 228 Other Resources 229 APPENDIX C SAMPLE SOLUTIONS 231 Chapter 2: Industrial Case: Organizing for ERP within a Large Information Technology Shop 231 Chapter 3: Industrial Case: What Is a Reasonable Cost and Schedule for a Telecommunications Project Upgrade? 233 Chapter 4: Industrial Case: Getting a Project Back on Track within a Manufacturing Environment 236 Chapter 5: Industrial Case: Staff Turnover Having an Impact in Financial Firm 240 Chapter 6: Industrial Case: Acquiring Software for Pipeline Operations 243 Chapter 7: Industrial Case: Launching Software Applications Sales on the Internet and Social Media 245 Chapter 8: Government Case: Managing the Acquisition of a Large Defense Project 248 Chapter 9: Government Case: Too Much Governance/Oversight Hinders Progress in Health Care 251 Chapter 10: Government Case: New Concepts for Air Traffi c Control 253 Chapter 11: Government Case: Addressing Cyber Crime on the Internet 256 Chapter 12: Academic Case: How Best to Educate Those Entering Industry 258 Chapter 13: Academic Case: Research Agendas That Matter to Industry 260 INDEX 261

Read more less

Book SynopsisA fully comprehensive introduction to smart grid standards and their applications for developers, consumers and service providers The critical role of standards for smart grid has already been realized by world-wide governments and industrial organizations. There are hundreds of standards for Smart Grid which have been developed in parallel by different organizations. It is therefore necessary to arrange those standards in such a way that it is easier for readers to easily understand and select a particular standard according to their requirements without going into the depth of each standard, which often spans from hundreds to thousands of pages. The book will allow people in the smart grid areas and in the related industries to easily understand the fundamental standards of smart grid, and quickly find the building-block standards they need from hundreds of standards for implementing a smart grid system. The authors highlight the most advanced works andTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii 1 An Overview of the Smart Grid 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 An Overview of Smart Grid-Related Organizations 3 1.2.1 SDOs Dealing with the Smart Grid 4 1.2.2 Technical Consortia, Forums, and Panels Dealing with the Smart Grid 9 1.2.3 Other Political, Market, and Trade Organizations, Forums, and Alliances 12 1.3 Status of the United States (US) 15 1.3.1 Strategy Development and Planning 15 1.3.2 Policy and Law Enforcement 18 1.3.3 Government and Company Pilot Projects 19 1.4 Status of the European Union (EU) 20 1.4.1 Activities of the European Union 20 1.4.2 Activities of EU Member Countries 22 1.5 Status of Japan 25 1.6 Status of South Korea 27 1.7 Status of China 28 1.8 Conclusions 30 References 30 2 Renewable Energy Generation 35 2.1 Introduction 35 2.2 Renewable Energy Systems and the Smart Grid 37 2.2.1 Hydroelectric Power 37 2.2.2 Solar Energy 40 2.2.3 Wind Energy 51 2.2.4 Fuel Cell 56 2.2.5 Geothermal Energy 60 2.2.6 Biomass 64 2.3 Challenges of Renewable Energy Systems 73 2.3.1 High Capital Cost 73 2.3.2 Integrating Renewable to the On-Grid 74 2.3.3 Reliable Supply of Power 74 2.3.4 Power Transmission 74 2.3.5 Power Distribution 74 2.4 Conclusion 75 References 75 3 Power Grid 79 3.1 Power Grid Systems 80 3.2 An Overview of the Important Key Standards for the Power Grid 81 3.3 Communications in the Smart Grid 82 3.3.1 Communications for Substations: IEC 61850 Standards 82 3.3.2 Communications for Telecontrol: IEC 60870-5 Standards 88 3.3.3 Inter-Control Center Communications: IEC 60870-6 Standards 93 3.4 Energy Management Systems 97 3.4.1 Application Program Interface: the IEC 61970 Standards 97 3.4.2 Software Inter-Application Integration: the IEC 61968 Standards 102 3.5 Teleprotection Equipment 106 3.5.1 An Overview of the IEC 60834 106 3.5.2 Types of Teleprotection Command Schemes 107 3.5.3 Requirements for Command Type Teleprotection Systems 108 3.5.4 Teleprotection System Performance Requirements 108 3.5.5 Teleprotection System Performance Tests 110 3.6 Application Cases of Related Standards in the Power Grid 111 3.6.1 Case 1: Engineering Process in Smart Substation Automation 111 3.6.2 Case 2: Information Exchange Services and Service Tracking 117 3.7 Analysis of Relationships among Related Standards 125 3.7.1 IEC 61970 and IEC 61968 125 3.7.2 IEC 61850 and IEC 61970 126 3.7.3 IEC 61850 and IEC 60870 126 3.7.4 TASE.2 and MMS 127 3.7.5 Latest Progresses of Related Standards 128 3.8 Conclusion 129 Appendix 3.A A SED File Example (Extensible Markup Language) 129 References 140 4 Smart Storage and Electric Vehicles 145 4.1 Introduction 145 4.2 Electric Storage 146 4.2.1 An Overview of Electric Storage 146 4.2.2 Electric Storage Technologies and Applications 147 4.2.3 Standardization Projects and Efforts 151 4.3 Distributed Energy Resources 154 4.3.1 An Overview of Distributed Energy Resources 154 4.3.2 Technologies and Applications 155 4.3.3 Various Standardization Processes and Projects 158 4.4 E-Mobility/Electric Vehicles 160 4.4.1 Introduction of E-Mobility/Electric Vehicles 160 4.4.2 The Rise and Fall of Electric Vehicles 161 4.4.3 Types of Electric Vehicles 162 4.4.4 Electric Vehicle Batteries 164 4.4.5 Grid to Vehicle (G2V) and Vehicle to Grid (V2G) Opportunities and Challenges 166 4.4.6 Standardization of E-Mobility/Electric Vehicles 170 4.5 Conclusion 178 References 180 5 Smart Energy Consumption 183 5.1 Introduction 183 5.2 Demand Response 184 5.2.1 An Overview of Demand Response Technologies 184 5.2.2 Demand Response Technology and Barriers 185 5.2.3 Standardization Efforts Related to Demand Response 186 5.3 Advanced Metering Infrastructure Standards 188 5.3.1 The AMI System 189 5.3.2 The IEC 62056 and ANSI C12 Standards 189 5.3.3 Metering Standardization Projects and Efforts 194 5.4 Smart Home and Building Automation Standards 197 5.4.1 ISO/IEC Information Technology – Home Electronic System (HES) 198 5.4.2 ZigBee/HomePlug Smart Energy Profile 2.0 207 5.4.3 OpenHAN 2.0 217 5.4.4 Z-Wave 221 5.4.5 ECHONET 224 5.4.6 ZigBee Home Automation Public Application Profile 228 5.4.7 BACnet 231 5.4.8 LONWORKS 233 5.4.9 INSTEON 235 5.4.10 KNX 235 5.4.11 ONE-NET 238 5.4.12 A Comparison of Smart Home and Building Automation Standards 239 5.5 Conclusion 242 References 242 6 Communications in the Smart Grid 247 6.1 Introduction 247 6.1.1 Communication Requirements for the Smart Grid 248 6.1.2 List of Standards 250 6.2 Architecture of the Communication System in the Smart Grid 256 6.2.1 IP in the Smart Grid 257 6.3 Wired Communication 259 6.3.1 Power Line Communication 259 6.3.2 Optical Communication 264 6.3.3 Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) and Ethernet 266 6.4 Wireless Communication 268 6.4.1 Introduction 268 6.4.2 Wireless Very Short Distance Communication 270 6.4.3 Wireless Personal and Local Area Networks and Related Technologies in the Unlicensed Spectrum 275 6.4.4 Cellular Networks in the Licensed Spectrum and WiMAX Technology 285 6.4.5 Satellite Communication 291 6.5 Conclusion 292 References 294 7 Security and Safety for Standardized Smart Grid Networks 299 7.1 Introduction 299 7.2 Threats and Vulnerabilities of Smart Grids 300 7.2.1 Network Vulnerabilities 300 7.2.2 Errors of Communications 301 7.3 Communication Network Standards of Smart Grids 302 7.3.1 Wireless Network Standards 302 7.3.2 Wired Network Standards and Their Safety Extensions 302 7.4 Wireless Network Security Mechanisms in the Smart Grids 303 7.4.1 An Overview of Security Mechanisms in the Wireless Standardized Smart Grid 303 7.4.2 Device Joining 303 7.4.3 Securing Normal Traffic 307 7.5 Wired Network Security/Safety Mechanisms in the Smart Grid 309 7.5.1 An Overview of Security Technologies in the Wired Smart Grid 310 7.5.2 Basic Security Mechanisms of Communication Infrastructure 311 7.5.3 Principles of Safety Extensions 312 7.5.4 Security Measures of Safety Extension 313 7.6 Typical Standards of Functional Security and Safety 316 7.6.1 IEC 62351 Standards 316 7.6.2 IEC 61508 Standards 319 7.7 Discussion 321 7.7.1 Safety versus Security 321 7.7.2 Security Level 321 7.7.3 Safety Level 322 7.7.4 Open Issues 322 7.8 Conclusion 324 References 325 8 Interoperability 329 8.1 Introduction 329 8.1.1 Interoperability and Interchangeability 330 8.1.2 The Challenges of Network Interoperability 330 8.1.3 Adding Application Interoperability 331 8.2 Interoperability Standards 332 8.3 NIST Identified List of Standards to Be Reviewed 333 8.4 NIST Interoperability 339 8.5 Conceptual Reference Model for the Smart Grid 339 8.6 Different Priority Areas Identified for Standardization 340 8.6.1 Wide-Area Situational Awareness 341 8.6.2 Demand Response and Consumer Energy Efficiency 341 8.6.3 Smart Energy Storage 342 8.6.4 Electric Transportation 342 8.6.5 Cybersecurity 342 8.6.6 Network Communications 343 8.6.7 Advanced Metering Infrastructure 344 8.6.8 Distribution Grid Management 344 8.7 Priority Action Plans 344 8.8 Different Layers of Interoperability 346 8.9 Conclusion 347 References 348 9 Integration of Variable Renewable Resources 351 9.1 Introduction 351 9.2 Challenges of Grid Integration of Intermittent Renewable Systems 352 9.2.1 Operation of a Conventional Electric Power System 352 9.2.2 Impact of Adding Intermittent Renewable Systems to the Power Grid 354 9.3 Transitioning to Highly Renewable Electricity Grid 357 9.3.1 Planning Studies 357 9.4 Very High Penetration and Grid-Scale Storage 363 9.4.1 Grid-Matching Analysis – Case of the Israeli Grid 363 9.4.2 Storage Design and Dispatch – Case of Interconnected Grid 366 9.5 List of Standards Related to Integration of Renewable Resources 374 9.6 Conclusion and Recommendations 375 References 375 10 Future of the Smart Grid 379 10.1 The Premise of the Smart Grid 379 10.2 What the Smart Grid Should Deliver? 380 10.2.1 Clean Electricity 381 10.2.2 System Flexibility 381 10.2.3 Affordable Service 383 10.2.4 Reliable and Sustainable Electricity Grid 387 10.3 Challenges of the Smart Grid 387 10.3.1 Designing for a Broader Purpose 387 10.3.2 Operational Challenges 389 10.3.3 Policy Challenges 390 10.4 Future Directions 391 10.5 Conclusion 392 References 392 List of Standards for the Smart Grid 395 Index 459

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn advanced level examination of the latest developments in power transformer protection This book addresses the technical challenges of transformer malfunction analysis as well as protection. One of the current research directions is the malfunction mechanism analysis due to nonlinearity of transformer core and comprehensive countermeasures on improving the performance of transformer differential protection. Here, the authors summarize their research outcomes and present a set of recent research advances in the electromagnetic transient analysis, the application on power transformer protections, and present a more systematic investigation and review in this field. This research area is still progressing, especially with the fast development of Smart Grid. This book is an important addition to the literature and will enhance significant advancement in research. It is a good reference book for researchers in power transformer protection research and a good text book for graduaTable of ContentsAbout the Authors ix Preface xi 1 Principles of Transformer Differential Protection and Existing Problem Analysis 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Fundamentals of Transformer Differential Protection 2 1.2.1 Transformer Faults 2 1.2.2 Differential Protection of Transformers 3 1.2.3 The Unbalanced Current and Measures to Eliminate Its Effect 5 1.3 Some Problems with Power Transformer Main Protection 7 1.3.1 Other Types of Power Transformer Differential Protections 7 1.3.2 Research on Novel Protection Principles 9 1.4 Analysis of Electromagnetic Transients and Adaptability of Second Harmonic Restraint Based Differential Protection of a UHV Power Transformer 17 1.4.1 Modelling of the UHV Power Transformer 18 1.4.2 Simulation and Analysis 20 1.5 Study on Comparisons among Some Waveform Symmetry Principle Based Transformer Differential Protection 27 1.5.1 The Comparison and Analysis of Several Kinds of Symmetrical Waveform Theories 27 1.5.2 The Theory of Waveform Symmetry of Derivatives of Current and Its Analysis 28 1.5.3 Principle and Analysis of the Waveform Correlation Method 32 1.5.4 Analysis of Reliability and Sensitivity of Several Criteria 33 1.6 Summary 36 References 36 2 Malfunction Mechanism Analysis due to Nonlinearity of Transformer Core 39 2.1 Introduction 39 2.2 The Ultra-Saturation Phenomenon of Loaded Transformer Energizing and its Impacts on Differential Protection 43 2.2.1 Loaded Transformer Energizing Model Based on Second Order Equivalent Circuit 43 2.2.2 Preliminary Simulation Studies 48 2.3 Studies on the Unusual Mal-Operation of Transformer Differential Protection during the Nonlinear Load Switch-In 57 2.3.1 Simulation Model of the Nonlinear Load Switch-In 57 2.3.2 Simulation Results and Analysis of Mal-Operation Mechanism of Differential Protection 62 2.4 Analysis of a Sort of Unusual Mal-operation of Transformer Differential Protection due to Removal of External Fault 70 2.4.1 Modelling of the External Fault Inception and Removal and Current Transformer 70 2.4.2 Analysis of Low Current Mal-operation of Differential Protection 72 2.5 Analysis and Countermeasure of Abnormal Operation Behaviours of the Differential Protection of the Converter Transformer 80 2.5.1 Recurrence and Analysis of the Reported Abnormal Operation of the Differential Protection of the Converter Transformer 80 2.5.2 Time-Difference Criterion to Discriminate between Faults and Magnetizing Inrushes of the Converter Transformer 86 2.6 Summary 95 References 95 3 Novel Analysis Tools on Operating Characteristics of Transformer Differential Protection 97 3.1 Introduction 97 3.2 Studies on the Operation Behaviour of Differential Protection during a Loaded Transformer Energizing 99 3.2.1 Simulation Models of Loaded Transformer Switch-On and CT 99 3.2.2 Analysis of the Mal-operation Mechanism of Differential Protection 102 3.3 Comparative Investigation on Current Differential Criteria between One Using Phase Current and One Using Phase–Phase Current Difference for the Transformer using Y-Delta Connection 1093.3.1 Analyses of Applying the Phase Current Differential to the Power Transformer with Y/Δ Connection and its Existing Bases 109 3.3.2 Rationality Analyses of Applying the Phase Current Differential Criterion to the Power Transformer with Y/Δ Connection 113 3.4 Comparative Analysis on Current Percentage Differential Protections Using a Novel Reliability Evaluation Criterion 117 3.4.1 Introduction to CPD and NPD 117 3.4.2 Performance Comparison between CPD and NPD in the Case of CT Saturation 118 3.4.3 Performance Comparison between CPD and NPD in the Case of Internal Fault 121 3.5 Comparative Studies on Percentage Differential Criteria Using Phase Current and Superimposed Phase Current 123 3.5.1 The Dynamic Locus of p - 1p +1 in the Case of CT Saturation 123 3.5.2 Sensitivity Comparison between the Phase Current Based and the Superimposed Current Based Differential Criteria 126 3.5.3 Security Comparison between the Phase Current Based and the Superimposed Current Based Differential Criteria 128 3.5.4 Simulation Analyses 130 3.6 A Novel Analysis Methodology of Differential Protection Operation Behaviour 132 3.6.1 The Relationship between Transforming Rate and the Angular Change Rate under CT Saturation 132 3.6.2 Principles of Novel Percentage Restraint Criteria 133 3.6.3 Analysis of Novel Percentage Differential Criteria 142 3.7 Summary 151 References 151 4 Novel Magnetizing Inrush Identification Schemes 153 4.1 Introduction 153 4.2 Studies for Identification of the Inrush Based on Improved Correlation Algorithm 155 4.2.1 Basic Principle of Waveform Correlation Scheme 155 4.2.2 Design and Test of the Improved Waveform Correlation Principle 159 4.3 A Novel Method for Discrimination of Internal Faults and Inrush Currents by Using Waveform Singularity Factor 163 4.3.1 Waveform Singularity Factor Based Algorithm 163 4.3.2 Testing Results and Analysis 164 4.4 A New Principle of Discrimination between Inrush Current and Internal Fault Current of Transformer Based on Self-Correlation Function 169 4.4.1 Basic Principle of Correlation Function Applied to Random Single Analysis 169 4.4.2 Theory and Analysis of Waveform Similarity Based on Self-Correlation Function 170 4.4.3 EPDL Testing Results and Analysis 173 4.5 Identifying Inrush Current Using Sinusoidal Proximity Factor 174 4.5.1 Sinusoidal Proximity Factor Based Algorithm 174 4.5.2 Testing Results and Analysis 176 4.6 A Wavelet Transform Based Scheme for Power Transformer Inrush Identification 181 4.6.1 Principle of Wavelet Transform 181 4.6.2 Inrush Identification with WPT 185 4.6.3 Results and Analysis 185 4.7 A Novel Adaptive Scheme of Discrimination between Internal Faults and Inrush Currents of Transformer Using Mathematical Morphology 190 4.7.1 Mathematical Morphology 190 4.7.2 Principle and Scheme Design 193 4.7.3 Testing Results and Analysis 194 4.8 Identifying Transformer Inrush Current Based on Normalized Grille Curve 202 4.8.1 Normalized Grille Curve 202 4.8.2 Experimental System 205 4.8.3 Testing Results and Analysis 207 4.9 A Novel Algorithm for Discrimination between Inrush Currents and Internal Faults Based on Equivalent Instantaneous Leakage Inductance 211 4.9.1 Basic Principle 211 4.9.2 EILI-Based Criterion 217 4.9.3 Experimental Results and Analysis 218 4.10 A Two-Terminal Network-Based Method for Discrimination between Internal Faults and Inrush Currents 222 4.10.1 Basic Principle 222 4.10.2 Experimental System 230 4.10.3 Testing Results and Analysis 230 4.11 Summary 234 References 234 5 Comprehensive Countermeasures for Improving the Performance of Transformer Differential Protection 237 5.1 Introduction 237 5.2 A Method to Eliminate the Magnetizing Inrush Current of Energized Transformers 242 5.2.1 Principles and Modelling of the Inrush Suppressor and Parameter Design 242 5.2.2 Simulation Validation and Results Analysis 249 5.3 Identification of the Cross-Country Fault of a Power Transformer for Fast Unblocking of Differential Protection 255 5.3.1 Criterion for Identifying Cross-Country Faults Using the Variation of the Saturated Secondary Current with Respect to the Differential Current 255 5.3.2 Simulation Analyses and Test Verification 257 5.4 Adaptive Scheme in the Transformer Main Protection 268 5.4.1 The Fundamental of the Time Difference Based Method to Discriminate between the Fault Current and the Inrush of the Transformer 268 5.4.2 Preset Filter 269 5.4.3 Comprehensive Protection Scheme 271 5.4.4 Simulation Tests and Analysis 274 5.5 A Series Multiresolution Morphological Gradient Based Criterion to Identify CT Saturation 294 5.5.1 Time Difference Extraction Criterion Using Mathematical Morphology 294 5.5.2 Simulation Study and Results Analysis 297 5.5.3 Performance Verification with On-site Data 302 5.6 A New Adaptive Method to Identify CT Saturation Using a Grille Fractal 304 5.6.1 Analysis of the Behaviour of CT Transient Saturation 304 5.6.2 The Basic Principle and Algorithm of Grille Fractal 308 5.6.3 Self-Adaptive Generalized Morphological Filter 312 5.6.4 The Design of Protection Program and the Verification of Results 313 5.7 Summary 317 References 317 Index 319

Read more less

Book SynopsisA top-down approach that enables readers to master and apply core principles Using an innovative top-down approach, this text makes it possible for readers to master and apply the principles of contemporary power electronics and electromechanic power conversion, exploring both systems and individual components.Table of ContentsPREFACE xi 1 INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND POWER CONVERSION 1 1.1 Electricity as an Energy Carrier 1 1.2 Development of Electrical Energy Conversion Systems 4 1.3 System Building Blocks 6 1.4 Guide to the Book 7 1.4.1 Generation, Storage and Consumption of Electricity 8 1.4.2 Power Transfer and Matching of Loads and Sources 8 1.4.3 Electromechanics 9 1.4.4 Power Electronics 9 Problems 9 2 ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCES AND ENERGY STORAGE 11 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Primary Sources 12 2.2.1 Centralised Sources 12 2.2.2 Decentralised Sources 17 2.3 Secondary Sources 20 2.3.1 Basic Concepts 20 2.3.2 Storage as Chemical Energy—Hydrogen 23 2.3.3 Storage as Electrochemical Energy 23 2.3.4 Storage as Electrical Energy 25 2.3.5 Storage as Mechanical Energy 26 2.4 Highlights 29 Problems 30 3 POWER, REACTIVE POWER AND POWER FACTOR 35 3.1 Introduction 35 3.2 Power in DC Circuits 36 3.3 Power in Resistive AC Circuits 38 3.4 Effective or rms Values 39 3.5 Phasor Representation 41 3.6 Power in AC Circuits 45 3.6.1 Power in a Capacitive Circuit 46 3.7 Apparent Power, Real Power and Power Factor 49 3.8 Complex Power 50 3.9 Electrical Energy Cost and Power Factor Correction 52 3.10 Fourier Series 56 3.11 Harmonics in Power Systems 60 3.12 Power and Non-Sinusoidal Waveforms 61 3.13 Effective or rms Value of Non-Sinusoidal Waveforms 65 3.14 Power Factor of Non-Sinusoidal Waveforms 66 3.15 Harmonics in Power Systems 70 3.16 Three-Phase Systems 73 3.17 Harmonics in Balanced Three-Phase Systems 75 3.18 Highlights 77 Problems 80 Further Reading 82 4 MAGNETICALLY COUPLED NETWORKS 85 4.1 Introduction 85 4.2 Basic Concepts 85 4.2.1 Ampère’s Circuital Law 86 4.2.2 Faraday’s Induction Law 87 4.2.3 Relationship between Magnetic Flux and Magnetic Field Strength 89 4.2.4 Inductance 93 4.2.5 Basic Magnetic Circuits 95 4.2.6 Magnetic Circuit with an Air Gap 99 4.3 Mutual Inductance 101 4.3.1 Simple Air-Core Transformer 103 4.3.2 Leakage Flux and the Transformer Core 104 4.4 Ideal Transformer 112 4.4.1 Referral of an Impedance 113 4.4.2 Leakage and Magnetising Inductances 114 4.5 Highlights 118 Problems 120 Further Reading 121 5 DYNAMICS OF ROTATIONAL SYSTEMS 123 5.1 Introduction 123 5.2 Preliminaries 124 5.3 Rotational Dynamics 127 5.3.1 Torque 127 5.3.2 Angular Displacement, Speed and Acceleration 128 5.3.3 Equations of Rotational Motion 129 5.3.4 Moment of Inertia 129 5.3.5 Rotating System 130 5.4 Coupling Mechanisms 133 5.4.1 Belt and Pulley 134 5.4.2 Gears 136 5.5 Highlights 138 Problems 140 Further Reading 140 6 POWER ELECTRONIC CONVERTERS 141 6.1 Introduction 141 6.2 Linear Voltage Regulator 142 6.3 Switched Approach 145 6.4 Basic Assumptions 150 6.4.1 Switching Components 150 6.4.2 Linear Components 150 6.5 Buck Converter 152 6.5.1 State I 153 6.5.2 State II 154 6.5.3 Combining the Two States 154 6.5.4 Simplified Analysis Approach 155 6.5.5 What if vc(t) ≠ Vc? 157 6.6 Discontinious Conduction Mode 162 6.6.1 Boundary between CCM and DCM 162 6.6.2 Relationship between Vs and Vc in DCM 164 6.7 Other Basic Converter Structures 169 6.7.1 Boost Converter 169 6.7.2 Buck–Boost Converter 171 6.8 DC–DC Converters with Isolation 172 6.8.1 Coupled Inductor Isolation: Flyback 173 6.8.2 Transformer Isolation: Half-bridge 178 6.8.3 Transformer Isolation: Full-bridge 182 6.9 Highlights 187 Problems 189 Further Reading 193 7 SIMPLE ELECTRICAL MACHINES 195 7.1 Introduction 195 7.2 Motional Voltage and Electromagnetic Force 196 7.2.1 Conductor Moving in a Uniform Magnetic Field 196 7.2.2 Current-Carrying Conductor in a Uniform Magnetic Field 201 7.2.3 Right-Hand Rule 204 7.3 Simple Linear DC Machine 204 7.3.1 Starting of the Linear DC Motor 206 7.3.2 Linear DC Machine Operating as a Motor 207 7.3.3 Linear DC Machine Operating as a Generator 208 7.3.4 Electrical Equivalent Circuit of the Linear DC Machine 209 7.3.5 Mechanical Equivalent Circuit of the Linear DC Machine 211 7.3.6 A Practical Example: The Railgun 211 7.4 Basic Operation of the DC Machine 214 7.4.1 Induced Voltage 214 7.4.2 Mechanical Voltage Rectification 217 7.4.3 Force and Torque 219 7.4.4 Power Balance between Mechanical and Electrical Power 221 7.4.5 The benefit of a Uniform Air Gap 223 7.5 Practical DC Machine Construction 224 7.5.1 Induced Voltage in a Real DC Machine 225 7.5.2 Torque Produced in a Real DC Machine 227 7.6 Practical DC Machine Configurations 231 7.6.1 Permanent Magnet DC Machine 234 7.6.2 Field Winding DC Machines 240 7.6.3 Losses 244 7.7 DC Machine as a Component in a System 246 7.8 Highlights 248 Problems 250 Further Reading 252 8 AC MACHINES 253 8.1 Introduction 253 8.2 Three-Phase AC Electrical Port 253 8.3 AC Machine Stator 256 8.3.1 Rotating Magnetic Field 257 8.3.2 Reversing the Direction of Rotation 260 8.3.3 Increasing the Number of Poles 261 8.3.4 Flux Created in the Air Gap 262 8.3.5 Induced Voltage in Three-Phase Stator Windings 266 8.3.6 Increasing the Number of Poles 268 8.3.7 Changing the Magnitude of the Induced Voltage 269 8.4 Synchronous Machine 271 8.4.1 The Equivalent Circuit 273 8.4.2 Phasor Diagram 275 8.4.3 Power Angle Characteristic Equation 276 8.4.4 Controlling the Power Factor 278 8.5 Induction Machine 281 8.5.1 Induced Currents in the Induction Machine Rotor 281 8.5.2 Development of an Equivalent Circuit 287 8.5.3 Measurement of the Induction Machine Parameters 291 8.5.4 Performance Calculations 293 8.5.5 Induction Motor as a Component in a System 297 8.6 Highlights 299 Problems 302 Further Reading 304 INDEX 305

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith an emphasis on antennas and propagation, Radio Propagation and Adaptive Antennas investigates every aspect of wireless communication network design and function. The book delves into, among other applicable radio propagation topics, multipath phenomena, slow and fast fading, free-space propagation, and obstructed reflection and diffraction.Table of ContentsPreface vii Part I Fundamentals of Wireless Links and Networks 1 Wireless Communication Links with Fading 1 2 Antenna Fundamentals 34 3 Fundamentals of Wireless Networks 54 Part II Fundamentals of Radio Propagation 4 Electromagnetic Aspects of Wave Propagation over Terrain 81 5 Terrestrial Radio Communications 117 6 Indoor Radio Propagation 179 Part III Fundamentals of Adaptive Antennas 7 Adaptive Antennas for Wireless Networks 216 8 Prediction of Signal Distribution in Space, Time, and Frequency Domains in Radio Channels for Adaptive Antenna Applications 280 9 Prediction of Operational Characteristics of Adaptive Antennas 375 Part IV Practical Aspects of Terrestrial Networks Performance: Cellular and Noncellular 10 Multipath Fading Phenomena in Terrestrial Wireless Communication Links 413 11 Cellular and Noncellular Communication Networks Design Based on Radio Propagation Phenomena 494 Part V Atmospheric and Satellite Communication Links and Networks 12 Effects of the Troposphere on Radio Propagation 536 13 Ionospheric Radio Propagation 591 14 Land–Satellite Communication Links 639 Index 677

Read more less

Book SynopsisFocusing on basic skills and tips for career enhancement, Engineer Your Own Success is a guide to improving efficiency and performance in any engineering field. It imparts valuable organization tips, communication advice, networking tactics, and practical assistance for preparing for the PE examevery necessary skill for success. Authored by a highly renowned career coach, this book is a battle plan for climbing the rungs of any engineering ladder.Table of ContentsA Note From The Series Editor xiii Acknowledgments xv Foreword xvii Preface xix Introduction: Use This Book Strategically 1 PART I YOUR GUIDE TO ENGINEERING A SUCCESSFUL JOB SEARCH 3 1 Building a Winning Résumé 5 1.1 Building a Winning Résumé (Online and Offline) 5 1.2 There Is One Key Factor to a Great Résumé 6 1.3 The Importance of Customizing Your Résumé 6 1.4 There Is a Formula to Building a Winning Résumé 7 1.5 Determining the Proper Length of a Résumé 8 1.6 Effectively Show Non-engineering Experience on Your Résumé 12 1.7 The Importance of Honesty During the Interview Process 13 1.8 Seven Steps to Creating a LinkedIn Profile That Can Land a Job 14 1.9 Your LinkedIn Profile and Your Résumé Should Be Perfect Professional Snapshots 16 1.10 Key Points to Remember 18 2 Landing and Acing an Engineering Job Interview 19 2.1 Leverage LinkedIn Groups to Land a Job Interview 19 2.2 Understanding Prospective Employers and Their Needs 20 2.3 Interview Research and Preparation 22 2.4 Interview Etiquette and Attire 23 2.5 Performing During the Actual Interview 24 2.6 The Follow-Up to the Interview 25 2.7 Jobs Can Affect Your PE License 26 2.8 Key Points to Remember 26 Part II THE 7 KEY ELEMENTS TO AN EXTRAORDINARY ENGINEERING CAREER 29 3 Career Goals Act as Your Destination 31 3.1 Career Goals Act as Your Destination 31 3.2 Start by Defining “Success” 32 3.3 Define Your Values 33 3.4 Ask Yourself Where Why What How and Who 34 3.5 More on Why 35 3.6 Think Big and Then Think BIGGER! 36 3.7 Formulate and Prioritize Your Goals 37 3.8 Be SMART and Use Small Steps for Big Results 37 3.9 Let Your Definition of Success Guide You 40 3.10 Motivate Yourself to Pursue Your Goals 41 3.11 Time to Celebrate! 42 3.12 Key Points to Remember 42 4 Obtain Credentials That Will Help You to Reach Your Goals 45 4.1 Credentials Bring You Credibility 45 4.2 Set Yourself Apart from Others 46 4.3 Recognizing the Difference between Patience and Procrastination 47 4.4 Exam Preparation: Start With the End in Mind 48 4.5 Tips for Approaching the PE Exam 49 4.5.1 Take the Fundamentals of Engineering Exam as Soon as Possible 49 4.5.2 Start the PE Exam Application Process as Early as Possible 50 4.5.3 Submit the Application as Soon as Possible 51 4.5.4 Don’t Take the Exam Just to See What It Contains 51 4.5.5 Take a Review Course Whether You Want to or Not 52 4.5.6 Ask Others What Worked for Them 52 4.5.7 Bring the Right Materials to the Exam 53 4.5.8 The Day of the Exam 54 4.5.9 The Day After the Exam 55 4.5.10 Credentialing Processes around the World 55 4.6 If You Fall Off the Horse Get Right Back On 55 4.7 Master’s in Engineering or Business Administration? 56 4.8 Awards Are Underrated 58 4.9 Take Advantage of Company Benefits 58 4.10 Key Points to Remember 59 5 Find and Become a Mentor 61 5.1 The Many Faces of a Mentor 61 5.2 Finding a Mentoring Program and Selecting the Right Mentor 62 5.2.1 Try to Select Someone from Your Specific Discipline 63 5.2.2 Consider Your Level of Comfort 64 5.2.3 Don’t Settle on the First One That Comes Along 64 5.3 The Mentoring Relationship for Protégés 64 5.3.1 Establish Levels of Confidentiality 65 5.3.2 Set Expectations for Mutual Accountability 65 5.4 The Importance of Accountability 66 5.5 Getting the Most from Your Mentor 67 5.6 Become a Mentor 67 5.7 Selecting the Right Protégé 68 5.8 Being the Best Mentor You Can Be 69 5.9 How to Graciously End a Mentoring Relationship 70 5.10 Actions to Avoid for Mentors and Protégés 71 5.11 Key Points to Remember 71 6 Become a Great Communicator 73 6.1 In Today’s World Communication Is a Whole Different Ball Game 73 6.2 Project/Team Communication Starts In House 74 6.3 Communicate Early and Often 75 6.4 How to (Almost) Explain Rocket Science to a Nontechnical Person 76 6.5 Honesty Really Is the Best Policy 77 6.6 How You Say Something Is Just as Important as What You Say 79 6.7 Public Speaking: The Ultimate Differentiator 80 6.8 How to Improve Your Public Speaking Skills 82 6.9 Confidence Encourages Communication 84 6.10 Sometimes Listening Is the Most Powerful Form of Communication 85 6.11 Responsiveness Impacts Reputation 86 6.12 Key Points to Remember 87 7 The Ability to Network 89 7.1 What Is Networking and Why Is It Important? 89 7.2 Secrets to Building Lasting Relationships 90 7.2.1 Their Interests Should Interest You 91 7.2.2 Listen to Others 91 7.2.3 Relationship Value Is a Two-Way Street 92 7.3 Network in Your Industry through Professional Societies and Organizations 92 7.4 Finding and Developing Project Leads Gets You Noticed 94 7.5 Opportunities Have No Limits 96 7.6 You Are Never Too Young (or Old!) to Network 97 7.7 Overcoming Low Confidence and Language Barriers 98 7.8 How to Deal with a Boss or Supervisor Who Is Holding You Back 99 7.9 Interoffice Politics and Workplace Relationships 101 7.10 Monitoring and Controlling Your Professional Image in Social Networking 102 7.10.1 Controlling Your Facebook Twitter and Google+ Messaging 102 7.10.2 Maximizing LinkedIn 103 7.11 Key Points to Remember 104 8 Stay Focused Organized Productive and Stress-Free 107 8.1 The Three Rules to Time Management and Work–Family Balance 107 8.2 Rule #1: Be Organized in All of Your Efforts 108 8.2.1 Deploy a Minimalist Mind-Set 109 8.2.2 Use the Old (and New) Trusty Notepad 110 8.2.3 Manage the Never-Ending Pile of Business Cards 112 8.2.4 Remember That Missed Appointments Equal Missed Opportunities 114 8.2.4.1 Use Your Calendar Religiously 114 8.2.4.2 Fill in All Pertinent Information 114 8.2.4.3 Confirm All Meetings 115 8.2.5 Avoid the “I Am Not Sure What Color My Desk Is” Syndrome 115 8.2.6 Prepare for Your Annual Performance Review 116 8.3 Rule #2: Stay Focused and Productive 118 8.3.1 Create Consistency through Routines 118 8.3.2 Establish Your Most Important Tasks Early Each Day 119 8.3.3 Complete or Assign Your MITs First Thing Each Day 120 8.3.4 Control Your Own Schedule by Breaking Bad E-Mail Habits 121 8.3.5 Slow Things Down through Meditation 123 8.3.6 Focus Intently on What You Are Doing 123 8.4 Rule #3: Avoid Stress and Worry at All Costs 124 8.4.1 Simplification through Elimination 125 8.4.2 Empty Your E-Mail Inbox Twice per Day 125 8.4.3 A Good To-Do List Can Work Wonders 126 8.4.4 Keep Your Body (and Mind) in Shape 128 8.4.5 Eat and Sleep Well 129 8.5 Work–Family Balance Is Achievable 130 8.5.1 Define Work–Family Balance 130 8.5.2 Build Flexibility into Your Career 131 8.5.3 Be Present in the Moment 132 8.6 Key Points to Remember 133 9 Be a Leader Every Day 135 9.1 You Are a Leader 135 9.2 The Power of Positivity 136 9.3 Great Leaders See Only Opportunity 137 9.4 Understanding Your Role 139 9.5 Delegate Delegate and Then Delegate Some More 140 9.6 Earn the Trust and Respect of Your Team 142 9.7 There Is No “I” in Team 143 9.8 Key Points to Remember 144 10 The Time Is Now: Take Action 147 10.1 The Time Is Now 147 10.2 Do Not Settle for Less 148 10.3 You Must Make Time for Your Own Development 148 10.4 Think Like an Entrepreneur in Your Career 149 10.5 Take Action 150 10.6 Key Points to Remember 150 11 Tools and Templates for Setting and Achieving Your Career Goals 153 11.1 Template for a Winning Résumé 154 11.2 Action Exercise Worksheet—Define Your Values 155 11.3A Action Exercise Worksheet—Define Your End Results in One Year 155 11.3B Action Exercise Worksheet—Define Your End Results in Two Years 156 11.3C Action Exercise Worksheet—Define Your End Results in Five Years 157 11.4 Action Exercise Worksheet—Formulate and Prioritize Goals 158 11.5 Action Exercise Worksheet—SMART Process to Achieve Goal #1 158 11.5 Action Exercise Worksheet—SMART Process to Achieve Goal #2 159 11.5 Action Exercise Worksheet—SMART Process to Achieve Goal #3 160 11.6 Action Exercise Worksheet 161 11.7 Action Exercise Worksheet 162 11.8 Action Exercise Worksheet 163 12 Engineering Your Own Success Stories from Practicing Engineers 165 12.1 Planning to Be an Extraordinary Engineer 165 12.2 Realizing a Dream of Becoming a Structural Engineer 166 12.3 A Big Step Forward for an Aspiring World-Class Engineer 167 12.4 A Boost of Confidence to Spur Maximum Potential 168 12.5 The Push Needed to Take Action 169 12.6 I Decided to Start Planning for Me in My Career 170 13 The Best of the Blog 171 13.1 What Is Your Ultimate Career Goal? (September 10 2010) 171 13.2 From Design Engineer to Manager in 2012: You Can Do It! (January 4 2012) 172 13.3 Twelve Rules of Zen Monks That May Help You Reduce Stress and Improve Quality in Your Engineering Career (June 5 2012) 174 13.4 It’s My Birthday! Who I Am Away from Work and Important Lessons That I Have Learned (August 26 2012) 176 13.5 What to Do in Your Engineering Career When You Don’t Know What to Do (May 30 2013) 178 13.6 Preparation Is Key to Engineering Balance in Your Career and Life (July 25 2013) 179 13.7 Six Ways to Reinvigorate Your Engineering Career Development (July 31 2013) 181 13.8 The Only Stability You Have in Your Engineering Career Is You (September 24 2013) 182 13.9 Be Cautious Even When You Find One of the Highest-Paying Engineering Jobs (August 15 2013) 184 13.10 If You Set Lofty Goals You Will Engineer Their Reality (October 22 2013) 185 13.11 Seven Keys to Success for Engineers and Alaskan Sled Dogs (November 14 2013) 187 13.12 Do All Engineers Need to Check Things Off to Feel Productive? (December 11 2013) 188 13.13 How to Not Mess Up Your Annual Review for Engineers (December 24 2013) 189 13.14 Three Steps to Becoming a Partner in an Engineering Firm Directly from an Engineering Partner (February 5 2014) 191 Appendix: Recommended Reading 193 About the Author 199 Index 201

Read more less

Book SynopsisExplores and identifies the main issues, concepts, principles and evolution of software testing, including software quality engineering and testing concepts, test data generation, test deployment analysis, and software test managementThis book examines the principles, concepts, and processes that are fundamental to the software testing function. This book is divided into five broad parts. Part I introduces software testing in the broader context of software engineering and explores the qualities that testing aims to achieve or ascertain, as well as the lifecycle of software testing. Part II covers mathematical foundations of software testing, which include software specification, program correctness and verification, concepts of software dependability, and a software testing taxonomy. Part III discusses test data generation, specifically, functional criteria and structural criteria. Test oracle design, test driver design, and test outcome analysis is covered in PaTable of ContentsPreface xiv Part I Introduction to Software Testing 1 1 Software Engineering: A Discipline Like No Other 3 1.1 A Young, Restless Discipline 3 1.2 An Industry Under Stress 5 1.3 Large, Complex Products 5 1.4 Expensive Products 7 1.5 Absence of Reuse Practice 9 1.6 Fault-Prone Designs 9 1.7 Paradoxical Economics 10 1.7.1 A Labor-Intensive Industry 10 1.7.2 Absence of Automation 11 1.7.3 Limited Quality Control 11 1.7.4 Unbalanced Lifecycle Costs 12 1.7.5 Unbalanced Maintenance Costs 12 1.8 Chapter Summary 13 1.9 Bibliographic Notes 13 2 Software Quality Attributes 14 2.1 Functional Attributes 15 2.1.1 Boolean Attributes 15 2.1.2 Statistical Attributes 15 2.2 Operational Attributes 17 2.3 Usability Attributes 18 2.4 Business Attributes 19 2.5 Structural Attributes 20 2.6 Chapter Summary 21 2.7 Exercises 21 2.8 Bibliographic Notes 22 3 A Software Testing Lifecycle 23 3.1 A Software Engineering Lifecycle 23 3.2 A Software Testing Lifecycle 27 3.3 The V-Model of Software Testing 32 3.4 Chapter Summary 33 3.5 Bibliographic Notes 34 Part II Foundations of Software Testing 35 4 Software Specifications 37 4.1 Principles of Sound Specification 38 4.1.1 A Discipline of Specification 38 4.2 Relational Mathematics 39 4.2.1 Sets and Relations 39 4.2.2 Operations on Relations 39 4.2.3 Properties of Relations 41 4.3 Simple Input Output Programs 42 4.3.1 Representing Specifications 42 4.3.2 Ordering Specifications 46 4.3.3 Specification Generation 48 4.3.4 Specification Validation 53 4.4 Reliability Versus Safety 60 4.5 State-based Systems 61 4.5.1 A Relational Model 62 4.5.2 Axiomatic Representation 64 4.5.3 Specification Validation 70 4.6 Chapter Summary 72 4.7 Exercises 72 4.8 Problems 76 4.9 Bibliographic Notes 78 5 Program Correctness and Verification 79 5.1 Correctness: A Definition 80 5.2 Correctness: Propositions 83 5.2.1 Correctness and Refinement 83 5.2.2 Set Theoretic Characterizations 85 5.2.3 Illustrations 86 5.3 Verification 88 5.3.1 Sample Formulas 89 5.3.2 An Inference System 91 5.3.3 Illustrative Examples 94 5.4 Chapter Summary 98 5.5 Exercises 99 5.6 Problems 100 5.7 Bibliographic Notes 100 6 Failures, Errors, and Faults 101 6.1 Failure, Error, and Fault 101 6.2 Faults and Relative Correctness 103 6.2.1 Fault, an Evasive Concept 103 6.2.2 Relative Correctness 104 6.3 Contingent Faults and Definite Faults 107 6.3.1 Contingent Faults 107 6.3.2 Monotonic Fault Removal 109 6.3.3 A Framework for Monotonic Fault Removal 114 6.3.4 Definite Faults 114 6.4 Fault Management 116 6.4.1 Lines of Defense 116 6.4.2 Hybrid Validation 118 6.5 Chapter Summary 121 6.6 Exercises 122 6.7 Problems 123 6.8 Bibliographic Notes 124 7 A Software Testing Taxonomy 125 7.1 The Trouble with Hyphenated Testing 125 7.2 A Classification Scheme 126 7.2.1 Primary Attributes 127 7.2.2 Secondary Attributes 131 7.3 Testing Taxonomy 136 7.3.1 Unit-Level Testing 136 7.3.2 System-Level Testing 138 7.4 Exercises 139 7.5 Bibliographic Notes 140 Part III Test Data Generation 141 8 Test Generation Concepts 143 8.1 Test Generation and Target Attributes 143 8.2 Test Outcomes 146 8.3 Test Generation Requirements 148 8.4 Test Generation Criteria 152 8.5 Empirical Adequacy Assessment 155 8.6 Chapter Summary 160 8.7 Exercises 161 8.8 Bibliographic Notes 162 8.9 Appendix: Mutation Program 163 9 Functional Criteria 165 9.1 Domain Partitioning 165 9.2 Test Data Generation from Tabular Expressions 171 9.3 Test Generation for State Based Systems 176 9.4 Random Test Data Generation 184 9.5 Tourism as a Metaphor for Test Data Selection 188 9.6 Chapter Summary 190 9.7 Exercises 190 9.8 Bibliographic Notes 192 10 Structural Criteria 193 10.1 Paths and Path Conditions 194 10.1.1 Execution Paths 194 10.1.2 Path Functions 196 10.1.3 Path Conditions 201 10.2 Control Flow Coverage 202 10.2.1 Statement Coverage 202 10.2.2 Branch Coverage 204 10.2.3 Condition Coverage 207 10.2.4 Path Coverage 209 10.3 Data Flow Coverage 214 10.3.1 Definitions and Uses 214 10.3.2 Test Generation Criteria 217 10.3.3 A Hierarchy of Criteria 220 10.4 Fault-Based Test Generation 220 10.4.1 Sensitizing Faults 221 10.4.2 Selecting Input Data for Fault Sensitization 225 10.4.3 Selecting Input Data for Error Propagation 227 10.5 Chapter Summary 228 10.6 Exercises 229 10.7 Bibliographic Notes 232 Part IV Test Deployment and Analysis 233 11 Test Oracle Design 235 11.1 Dilemmas of Oracle Design 235 11.2 From Specifications to Oracles 238 11.3 Oracles for State-Based Products 242 11.3.1 From Axioms to Oracles 243 11.3.2 From Rules to Oracles 244 11.4 Chapter Summary 250 11.5 Exercises 251 12 Test Driver Design 253 12.1 Selecting a Specification 253 12.2 Selecting a Process 255 12.3 Selecting a Specification Model 257 12.3.1 Random Test Generation 257 12.3.2 Pre-Generated Test Data 263 12.3.3 Faults and Fault Detection 266 12.4 Testing by Symbolic Execution 269 12.5 Chapter Summary 274 12.6 Exercises 275 12.7 Bibliographic Notes 279 13 Test Outcome Analysis 280 13.1 Logical Claims 281 13.1.1 Concrete Testing 281 13.1.2 Symbolic Testing 282 13.1.3 Concolic Testing 283 13.2 Stochastic Claims: Fault Density 284 13.3 Stochastic Claims: Failure Probability 287 13.3.1 Faults are Not Created Equal 287 13.3.2 Defining/Quantifying Reliability 289 13.3.3 Modeling Software Reliability 291 13.3.4 Certification Testing 294 13.3.5 Reliability Estimation and Reliability Improvement 295 13.3.6 Reliability Standards 299 13.3.7 Reliability as an Economic Function 300 13.4 Chapter Summary 307 13.5 Exercises 308 13.6 Problems 310 13.7 Bibliographic Notes 310 Part V Management of Software Testing 311 14 Metrics for Software Testing 313 14.1 Fault Proneness 314 14.1.1 Cyclomatic Complexity 315 14.1.2 Volume 316 14.2 Fault Detectability 317 14.3 Error Detectability 320 14.4 Error Maskability 323 14.5 Failure Avoidance 324 14.6 Failure Tolerance 326 14.7 An Illustrative Example 327 14.7.1 Cyclomatic Complexity 327 14.7.2 Volume 328 14.7.3 State Redundancy 328 14.7.4 Functional Redundancy 328 14.7.5 Non-injectivity 329 14.7.6 Non-determinacy 329 14.7.7 Summary 330 14.8 Chapter Summary 330 14.9 Exercises 331 14.10 Bibliographic Notes 332 15 Software Testing Tools 333 15.1 A Classification Scheme 333 15.2 Scripting Tools 334 15.2.1 CppTest 334 15.2.2 SilkTest 335 15.3 Record-and-Replay Tools 336 15.3.1 TestComplete 336 15.3.2 Selenium IDE 337 15.4 Performance-Testing Tools 338 15.4.1 LoadRunner 338 15.4.2 Grinder 339 15.4.3 QF-Test 340 15.4.4 Appvance PerformanceCloud 340 15.4.5 JMeter 341 15.5 Oracle Design Tools 342 15.5.1 JUnit 342 15.5.2 TestNG 343 15.6 Exception Discovery 343 15.6.1 Rational Purify 343 15.6.2 Astree 344 15.7 Collaborative Tools 345 15.7.1 FitNesse 345 15.8 Chapter Summary 345 16 Testing Product Lines 347 16.1 PLE: A Streamlined Reuse Model 347 16.2 Testing Issues 351 16.3 Testing Approaches 353 16.4 Illustration 354 16.4.1 Domain Analysis 354 16.4.2 Domain Modeling 356 16.4.3 A Reference Architecture 359 16.4.4 Domain Implementation 360 16.4.5 Testing at Domain Engineering 365 16.4.6 Testing at Application Engineering 369 16.5 Chapter Summary 372 16.6 Exercises 372 16.7 Problems 372 16.8 Bibliographic References 373 Bibliography 374 Index 377

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis second edition of Power Line Communications will show some adjustments in content including new material on PLC for home and industry, PLC for multimedia, PLC for smart grid and PLC for vehicles.Table of Contents1 List of Contributors Preface xv List of Acronyms xvii Introduction xix 1.1 What is a Name? 1 1.2 Historical Notes 2 1.3 About the Book 4 References 6 2 Channel Characterization 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Channel Modeling Fundamentals 10 2.3 Models for Low Voltage (LV) Channels: Outdoor and Indoor Case 31 2.4 Models for Medium Voltage (MV) Channels 75 2.5 Models for Outdoor Channels: High Voltage Case 86 2.6 MIMO Channels 102 2.7 Noise and Interference 122 2.8 Reference Channel Models and Software 138 2.9 Channels in other Scenarios 140 References 165 3 Electromagnetic Compatibility 175 3.1 Introduction 175 3.2 Parameters for EMC Considerations 176 3.3 Electromagnetic Emission 182 3.4 Electromagnetic Susceptibility 186 3.5 EMC Coordination 188 3.6 EMC Standardization and Regulation in Europe 194 3.7 Coupling Between Power Line and other Wireline Communications Systems 203 3.8 Final Remarks 217 References 219 4 Coupling 221 4.1 Introduction 221 4.2 Coupling Networks 225 4.3 LV Coupling 245 4.4 HV Coupling 250 4.5 MV Coupling 253 4.6 Summary 255 References 256 5 Digital Transmission Techniques 259 5.1 Introduction 259 5.2 Single Carrier Modulation 260 5.3 Multicarrier Modulations 286 5.4 Current and Voltage Modulations 306 5.5 Ultra-wideband Modulation 323 5.6 Impulse Noise Mitigation 328 5.7 MIMO Transmission 341 5.8 Coding Techniques 356 References 373 6 Medium Access Control and Layers Above in PLC 383 6.1 Introduction 383 6.2 MAC Layer Concepts 384 6.3 Protocols for Different Power Line Communications Applications and Domains386 6.4 Multiple-User Resource Allocation 404 6.5 Cooperative Power Line Communications 426 References 442 7 PLC for Home and Industry Automation 449 7.1 Introduction 449 7.2 Home and Industry Automation Using PLC 450 7.3 Popular Home Automation Protocols 451 7.4 Power Line Communication Application for Refrigeration Containers Ships 455 7.5 Windowed Frequency Hopping System AMIS CX1-Profile 462 7.6 DigitalSTROM@ 468 7.7 Conclusion 470 References 471 8 Multimedia PLC Systems 473 8.1 Introduction 473 8.2 QoS Requirements for Multimedia Traffic 473 8.3 Optimizing PLC for Multimedia 477 8.3.1 Overall Design Considerations for Multimedia PLC 477 8.4 Standards on Broadband PLC-Networking Technology 479 8.5 The IEEE 1901 Broadband over Power Line Standard 479 8.6 Performance Evaluation 494 8.7 HomePlug AV2 497 8.8 ITU-T G.996x (G.hn) 499 References 508 9 PLC for Smart Grid 511 9.1 Introduction 511 9.2 Standards 519 9.3 Regulation 536 9.4 Applications 545 9.5 Conclusions 561 References 562 10 PLC for Vehicles 567 10.1 Introduction 567 10.2 Advantages of PLC 567 10.3 Studies of PLC for Vehicles 568 10.4 Challenges for PLC 573 10.5 An Experimental Implementation 578 10.5.1 Vehicle PLC Testbed 579 10.6 Alternative to and Integration of PLC 583 References 585 11 Conclusions 589

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book serves as a tool for any engineer who wants to learn about circuits, electrical machines and drives, power electronics, and power systems basics From time to time, engineers find they need to brush up on certain fundamentals within electrical engineering. This clear and concise book is the ideal learning tool for them to quickly learn the basics or develop an understanding of newer topics. Fundamentals of Electric Power Engineering: From Electromagnetics to Power Systems helps nonelectrical engineers amass power system information quickly by imparting tools and trade tricks for remembering basic concepts and grasping new developments. Created to provide more in-depth knowledge of fundamentalsrather than a broad range of applications onlythis comprehensive and up-to-date book: Covers topics such as circuits, electrical machines and drives, power electronics, and power system basics as well as new generation technologies AlloTable of ContentsPREFACE xv ABOUT THE AUTHORS xix PART I PRELIMINARY MATERIAL 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 The Scope of Electrical Engineering, 3 1.2 This Book’s Scope and Organization, 7 1.3 International Standards and Their Usage in This Book, 8 1.3.1 International Standardization Bodies, 8 1.3.2 The International System of Units (SI), 9 1.3.3 Graphic Symbols for Circuit Drawings, 11 1.3.4 Names, Symbols, and Units, 13 1.3.5 Other Conventions, 15 1.4 Specific Conventions and Symbols in This Book, 15 1.4.1 Boxes Around Text, 16 1.4.2 Grayed Boxes, 16 1.4.3 Terminology, 17 1.4.4 Acronyms, 17 1.4.5 Reference Designations, 18 2 The Fundamental Laws of Electromagnetism 19 2.1 Vector Fields, 20 2.2 Definition of E and B; Lorentz’s Force Law, 22 2.3 Gauss’s Law, 25 2.4 Ampère’s Law and Charge Conservation, 26 2.4.1 Magnetic Field and Matter, 31 2.5 Faraday’s Law, 32 2.6 Gauss’s Law for Magnetism, 35 2.7 Constitutive Equations of Matter, 36 2.7.1 General Considerations, 36 2.7.2 Continuous Charge Flow Across Conductors, 36 2.8 Maxwell’s Equations and Electromagnetic Waves, 38 2.9 Historical Notes, 40 2.9.1 Short Biography of Faraday, 40 2.9.2 Short Biography of Gauss, 40 2.9.3 Short Biography of Maxwell, 41 2.9.4 Short Biography of Ampère, 41 2.9.5 Short Biography of Lorentz, 41 PART II ELECTRIC CIRCUIT CONCEPT AND ANALYSIS 43 3 Circuits as Modelling Tools 45 3.1 Introduction, 46 3.2 Definitions, 48 3.3 Charge Conservation and Kirchhoff’s Current Law, 50 3.3.1 The Charge Conservation Law, 50 3.3.2 Charge Conservation and Circuits, 51 3.3.3 The Electric Current, 53 3.3.4 Formulations of Kirchhoff’s Current Law, 55 3.4 Circuit Potentials and Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law, 60 3.4.1 The Electric Field Inside Conductors, 60 3.4.2 Formulations of Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law, 64 3.5 Solution of a Circuit, 65 3.5.1 Determining Linearly Independent Kirchhoff Equations (Loop-Cuts Method), 66 3.5.2 Constitutive Equations, 68 3.5.3 Number of Variables and Equations, 70 3.6 The Substitution Principle, 73 3.7 Kirchhoff’s Laws in Comparison with Electromagnetism Laws, 75 3.8 Power in Circuits, 76 3.8.1 Tellegen’s Theorem and Energy Conservation Law in Circuits, 78 3.9 Historical Notes, 80 3.9.1 Short Biography of Kirchhoff, 80 3.9.2 Short Biography of Tellegen, 80 4 Techniques for Solving DC Circuits 83 4.1 Introduction, 84 4.2 Modelling Circuital Systems with Constant Quantities as Circuits, 84 4.2.1 The Basic Rule, 84 4.2.2 Resistors: Ohm’s Law, 87 4.2.3 Ideal and “Real” Voltage and Current Sources, 89 4.3 Solving Techniques, 91 4.3.1 Basic Usage of Combined Kirchhoff-Constitutive Equations, 92 4.3.2 Nodal Analysis, 95 4.3.3 Mesh Analysis, 98 4.3.4 Series and Parallel Resistors; Star/Delta Conversion, 99 4.3.5 Voltage and Current Division, 103 4.3.6 Linearity and Superposition, 105 4.3.7 Thévenin’s Theorem, 107 4.4 Power and Energy and Joule’s Law, 112 4.5 More Examples, 114 4.6 Resistive Circuits Operating with Variable Quantities, 120 4.7 Historical Notes, 121 4.7.1 Short Biography of Ohm, 121 4.7.2 Short Biography of Thévenin, 121 4.7.3 Short Biography of Joule, 122 4.8 Proposed Exercises, 122 5 Techniques for Solving AC Circuits 131 5.1 Introduction, 132 5.2 Energy Storage Elements, 132 5.2.1 Power in Time-Varying Circuits, 133 5.2.2 The Capacitor, 133 5.2.3 Inductors and Magnetic Circuits, 136 5.3 Modelling Time-Varying Circuital Systems as Circuits, 140 5.3.1 The Basic Rule, 140 5.3.2 Modelling Circuital Systems When Induced EMFs Between Wires Cannot Be Neglected, 145 5.3.3 Mutual Inductors and the Ideal Transformer, 146 5.3.4 Systems Containing Ideal Transformers: Magnetically Coupled Circuits, 150 5.4 Simple R–L and R–C Transients, 152 5.5 AC Circuit Analysis, 155 5.5.1 Sinusoidal Functions, 155 5.5.2 Steady-State Behaviour of Linear Circuits Using Phasors, 156 5.5.3 AC Circuit Passive Parameters, 163 5.5.4 The Phasor Circuit, 164 5.5.5 Circuits Containing Sources with Different Frequencies, 169 5.6 Power in AC Circuits, 171 5.6.1 Instantaneous, Active, Reactive, and Complex Powers, 171 5.6.2 Circuits Containing Sources Having Different Frequencies, 177 5.6.3 Conservation of Complex, Active, and Reactive Powers, 178 5.6.4 Power Factor Correction, 180 5.7 Historical Notes, 184 5.7.1 Short Biography of Boucherot, 184 5.8 Proposed Exercises, 184 6 Three-Phase Circuits 191 6.1 Introduction, 191 6.2 From Single-Phase to Three-Phase Systems, 192 6.2.1 Modelling Three-Phase Lines When Induced EMFs Between Wires Are Not Negligible, 198 6.3 The Single-Phase Equivalent of the Three-Phase Circuit, 200 6.4 Power in Three-Phase Systems, 202 6.5 Single-Phase Feeding from Three-Phase Systems, 206 6.6 Historical Notes, 209 6.6.1 Short Biography of Tesla, 209 6.7 Proposed Exercises, 209 PART III ELECTRIC MACHINES AND STATIC CONVERTERS 213 7 Magnetic Circuits and Transformers 215 7.1 Introduction, 215 7.2 Magnetic Circuits and Single-Phase Transformers, 215 7.3 Three-Phase Transformers, 225 7.4 Magnetic Hysteresis and Core Losses, 227 7.5 Open-Circuit and Short-Circuit Tests, 230 7.6 Permanent Magnets, 233 7.7 Proposed Exercises, 235 8 Fundamentals of Electronic Power Conversion 239 8.1 Introduction, 239 8.2 Power Electronic Devices, 240 8.2.1 Diodes, Thyristors, Controllable Switches, 240 8.2.2 The Branch Approximation of Thyristors and Controllable Switches, 242 8.2.3 Diodes, 243 8.2.4 Thyristors, 246 8.2.5 Insulated-Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs), 248 8.2.6 Summary of Power Electronic Devices, 250 8.3 Power Electronic Converters, 251 8.3.1 Rectifiers, 251 8.3.2 DC–DC Converters, 257 8.3.3 Inverters, 264 8.4 Analysis of Periodic Quantities, 276 8.4.1 Introduction, 276 8.4.2 Periodic Quantities and Fourier’s Series, 276 8.4.3 Properties of Periodic Quantities and Examples, 279 8.4.4 Frequency Spectrum of Periodic Signals, 280 8.5 Filtering Basics, 283 8.5.1 The Basic Principle, 283 8.6 Summary, 289 9 Principles of Electromechanical Conversion 291 9.1 Introduction, 292 9.2 Electromechanical Conversion in a Translating Bar, 292 9.3 Basic Electromechanics in Rotating Machines, 297 9.3.1 Rotating Electrical Machines and Faraday’s Law, 297 9.3.2 Generation of Torques in Rotating Machines, 301 9.3.3 Electromotive Force and Torque in Distributed Coils, 302 9.3.4 The Uniform Magnetic Field Equivalent, 304 9.4 Reluctance-Based Electromechanical Conversion, 305 10 DC Machines and Drives and Universal Motors 309 10.1 Introduction, 310 10.2 The Basic Idea and Generation of Quasi-Constant Voltage, 310 10.3 Operation of a DC Generator Under Load, 315 10.4 Different Types of DC Machines, 318 10.4.1 Generators and Motors, 318 10.4.2 Starting a DC Motor with Constant Field Current, 320 10.4.3 Independent, Shunt, PM, and Series Excitation Motors, 326 10.5 Universal Motors, 329 10.6 DC Electric Drives, 331 10.7 Proposed Exercises, 335 11 Synchronous Machines and Drives 337 11.1 The Basic Idea and Generation of EMF, 338 11.2 Operation Under Load, 345 11.2.1 The Rotating Magnetic Field, 345 11.2.2 Stator–Rotor Interaction, 348 11.2.3 The Phasor Diagram and the Single-Phase Equivalent Circuit, 350 11.3 Practical Considerations, 353 11.3.1 Power Exchanges, 353 11.3.2 Generators and Motors, 357 11.4 Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Machines, 359 11.5 Synchronous Electric Drives, 360 11.5.1 Introduction, 360 11.5.2 PM, Inverter-Fed, Synchronous Motor Drives, 361 11.5.3 Control Implementation, 366 11.6 Historical Notes, 370 11.6.1 Short Biography of Ferraris and Behn-Eschemburg, 370 11.7 Proposed Exercises, 371 12 Induction Machines and Drives 373 12.1 Induction Machine Basics, 374 12.2 Machine Model and Analysis, 378 12.3 No-Load and Blocked-Rotor Tests, 391 12.4 Induction Machine Motor Drives, 394 12.5 Single-Phase Induction Motors, 399 12.5.1 Introduction, 399 12.5.2 Different Motor Types, 402 12.6 Proposed Exercises, 404 PART IV POWER SYSTEMS BASICS 409 13 Low-Voltage Electrical Installations 411 13.1 Another Look at the Concept of the Electric Power System, 411 13.2 Electrical Installations: A Basic Introduction, 413 13.3 Loads, 418 13.4 Cables, 422 13.4.1 Maximum Permissible Current and Choice of the Cross-Sectional Area, 422 13.5 Determining Voltage Drop, 427 13.6 Overcurrents and Overcurrent Protection, 429 13.6.1 Overloads, 429 13.6.2 Short Circuits, 430 13.6.3 Breaker Characteristics and Protection Against Overcurrents, 432 13.7 Protection in Installations: A Long List, 437 14 Electric Shock and Protective Measures 439 14.1 Introduction, 439 14.2 Electricity and the Human Body, 440 14.2.1 Effects of Current on Human Beings, 440 14.2.2 The Mechanism of Current Dispersion in the Earth, 443 14.2.3 A Circuital Model for the Human Body, 444 14.2.4 The Human Body in a Live Circuit, 446 14.2.5 System Earthing: TT, TN, and IT, 448 14.3 Protection Against Electric Shock, 450 14.3.1 Direct and Indirect Contacts, 450 14.3.2 Basic Protection (Protection Against Direct Contact), 451 14.3.3 Fault Protection (Protection Against Indirect Contact), 453 14.3.4 SELV Protection System, 458 14.4 The Residual Current Device (RCD) Principle of Operation, 459 14.5 What Else?, 462 References, 462 15 Large Power Systems: Structure and Operation 465 15.1 Aggregation of Loads and Installations: The Power System, 465 15.2 Toward AC Three-Phase Systems, 466 15.3 Electricity Distribution Networks, 468 15.4 Transmission and Interconnection Grids, 470 15.5 Modern Structure of Power Systems and Distributed Generation, 473 15.6 Basics of Power System Operation, 475 15.6.1 Frequency Regulation, 478 15.6.2 Voltage Regulation, 480 15.7 Vertically Integrated Utilities and Deregulated Power Systems, 482 15.8 Recent Challenges and Smart Grids, 484 15.9 Renewable Energy Sources and Energy Storage, 486 15.9.1 Photovoltaic Plants, 486 15.9.2 Wind Power Plants, 490 15.9.3 Energy Storage, 494 Appendix: Transmission Line Modelling and Port-Based Circuits 501 A.1 Modelling Transmission Lines Through Circuits, 501 A.1.1 Issues and Solutions When Displacement Currents are Neglected, 502 A.1.2 Steady-State Analysis Considering Displacement Currents, 506 A.1.3 Practical Considerations, 509 A.2 Modelling Lines as Two-Port Components, 510 A.2.1 Port-Based Circuits, 510 A.2.2 Port-Based Circuit and Transmission Lines, 511 A.2.3 A Sample Application, 512 A.3 Final Comments, 513 SELECTED REFERENCES 515 ANSWERS TO THE PROPOSED EXERCISES 519 INDEX 529

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides an insight into the key practical aspects and best practice of 4G-LTE network design, performance, and deployment Design, Deployment and Performance of 4G-LTE Networks addresses the key practical aspects and best practice of 4G networks design, performance, and deployment.Table of ContentsAuthors’ Biographies xv Preface xvii Acknowledgments xix Abbreviations and Acronyms xxi 1 LTE Network Architecture and Protocols 1 Ayman Elnashar and Mohamed A. El-saidny 1.1 Evolution of 3GPP Standards 2 1.1.1 3GPP Release 99 3 1.1.2 3GPP Release 4 3 1.1.3 3GPP Release 5 3 1.1.4 3GPP Release 6 4 1.1.5 3GPP Release 7 4 1.1.6 3GPP Release 8 5 1.1.7 3GPP Release 9 and Beyond 5 1.2 Radio Interface Techniques in 3GPP Systems 6 1.2.1 Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) 6 1.2.2 Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) 6 1.2.3 Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) 7 1.2.4 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) 7 1.3 Radio Access Mode Operations 7 1.3.1 Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) 8 1.3.2 Time Division Duplex (TDD) 8 1.4 Spectrum Allocation in UMTS and LTE 8 1.5 LTE Network Architecture 10 1.5.1 Evolved Packet System (EPS) 10 1.5.2 Evolved Packet Core (EPC) 11 1.5.3 Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) 13 1.5.4 LTE User Equipment 13 1.6 EPS Interfaces 14 1.6.1 S1-MME Interface 14 1.6.2 LTE-Uu Interface 15 1.6.3 S1-U Interface 17 1.6.4 S3 Interface (SGSN-MME) 18 1.6.5 S4 (SGSN to SGW) 18 1.6.6 S5/S8 Interface 19 1.6.7 S6a (Diameter) 21 1.6.8 S6b Interface (Diameter) 21 1.6.9 S6d (Diameter) 22 1.6.10 S9 Interface (H-PCRF-VPCRF) 23 1.6.11 S10 Interface (MME-MME) 23 1.6.12 S11 Interface (MME–SGW) 23 1.6.13 S12 Interface 23 1.6.14 S13 Interface 24 1.6.15 SGs Interface 24 1.6.16 SGi Interface 25 1.6.17 Gx Interface 26 1.6.18 Gy and Gz Interfaces 27 1.6.19 DNS Interface 27 1.6.20 Gn/Gp Interface 27 1.6.21 SBc Interface 28 1.6.22 Sv Interface 28 1.7 EPS Protocols and Planes 29 1.7.1 Access and Non-Access Stratum 29 1.7.2 Control Plane 29 1.7.3 User Plane 30 1.8 EPS Procedures Overview 31 1.8.1 EPS Registration and Attach Procedures 31 1.8.2 EPS Quality of Service (QoS) 34 1.8.3 EPS Security Basics 36 1.8.4 EPS Idle and Active States 38 1.8.5 EPS Network Topology for Mobility Procedures 39 1.8.6 EPS Identifiers 44 References 44 2 LTE Air Interface and Procedures 47 Mohamed A. El-saidny 2.1 LTE Protocol Stack 47 2.2 SDU and PDU 48 2.3 LTE Radio Resource Control (RRC) 50 2.4 LTE Packet Data Convergence Protocol Layer (PDCP) 52 2.4.1 PDCP Architecture 53 2.4.2 PDCP Data and Control SDUs 53 2.4.3 PDCP Header Compression 54 2.4.4 PDCP Ciphering 54 2.4.5 PDCP In-Order Delivery 54 2.4.6 PDCP in LTE versus HSPA 55 2.5 LTE Radio Link Control (RLC) 55 2.5.1 RLC Architecture 56 2.5.2 RLC Modes 57 2.5.3 Control and Data PDUs 60 2.5.4 RLC in LTE versus HSPA 60 2.6 LTE Medium Access Control (MAC) 61 2.7 LTE Physical Layer (PHY) 61 2.7.1 HSPA(+) Channel Overview 61 2.7.2 General LTE Physical Channels 71 2.7.3 LTE Downlink Physical Channels 71 2.7.4 LTE Uplink Physical Channels 72 2.8 Channel Mapping of Protocol Layers 73 2.8.1 E-UTRAN Channel Mapping 73 2.8.2 UTRAN Channel Mapping 76 2.9 LTE Air Interface 76 2.9.1 LTE Frame Structure 76 2.9.2 LTE Frequency and Time Domains Structure 76 2.9.3 OFDM Downlink Transmission Example 80 2.9.4 Downlink Scheduling 81 2.9.5 Uplink Scheduling 88 2.9.6 LTE Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) 89 2.10 Data Flow Illustration Across the Protocol Layers 90 2.10.1 HSDPA Data Flow 90 2.10.2 LTE Data Flow 91 2.11 LTE Air Interface Procedures 92 2.11.1 Overview 92 2.11.2 Frequency Scan and Cell Identification 92 2.11.3 Reception of Master and System Information Blocks (MIB and SIB) 93 2.11.4 Random Access Procedures (RACH) 94 2.11.5 Attach and Registration 95 2.11.6 Downlink and Uplink Data Transfer 96 2.11.7 Connected Mode Mobility 96 2.11.8 Idle Mode Mobility and Paging 99 References 100 3 Analysis and Optimization of LTE System Performance 103 Mohamed A. El-saidny 3.1 Deployment Optimization Processes 104 3.1.1 Profiling Device and User Behavior in the Network 105 3.1.2 Network Deployment Optimization Processes 107 3.1.3 Measuring the Performance Targets 108 3.1.4 LTE Troubleshooting Guidelines 119 3.2 LTE Performance Analysis Based on Field Measurements 123 3.2.1 Performance Evaluation of Downlink Throughput 127 3.2.2 Performance Evaluation of Uplink Throughput 131 3.3 LTE Case Studies and Troubleshooting 134 3.3.1 Network Scheduler Implementations 135 3.3.2 LTE Downlink Throughput Case Study and Troubleshooting 136 3.3.3 LTE Uplink Throughput Case Studies and Troubleshooting 139 3.3.4 LTE Handover Case Studies 146 3.4 LTE Inter-RAT Cell Reselection 153 3.4.1 Introduction to Cell Reselection 155 3.4.2 LTE to WCDMA Inter-RAT Cell Reselection 155 3.4.3 WCDMA to LTE Inter-RAT Cell Reselection 160 3.5 Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Optimization Considerations 165 3.5.1 SIB-19 Planning Strategy for UTRAN to E-UTRAN Cell Reselection 165 3.5.2 SIB-6 Planning Strategy for E-UTRAN to UTRAN Cell Reselection 167 3.5.3 Inter-RAT Case Studies from Field Test 168 3.5.4 Parameter Setting Trade-off 174 3.6 LTE to LTE Inter-frequency Cell Reselection 177 3.6.1 LTE Inter-Frequency Cell Reselection Rules 177 3.6.2 LTE Inter-Frequency Optimization Considerations 177 3.7 LTE Inter-RAT and Inter-frequency Handover 180 3.7.1 Inter-RAT and Inter-Frequency Handover Rules 187 3.7.2 Inter-RAT and Inter-Frequency Handover Optimization Considerations 188 References 189 4 Performance Analysis and Optimization of LTE Key Features: C-DRX, CSFB, and MIMO 191 Mohamed A. El-saidny and Ayman Elnashar 4.1 LTE Connected Mode Discontinuous Reception (C-DRX) 192 4.1.1 Concepts of DRX for Battery Saving 193 4.1.2 Optimizing C-DRX Performance 195 4.2 Circuit Switch Fallback (CSFB) for LTE Voice Calls 204 4.2.1 CSFB to UTRAN Call Flow and Signaling 206 4.2.2 CSFB to UTRAN Features and Roadmap 216 4.2.3 Optimizing CSFB to UTRAN 231 4.3 Multiple-Input, Multiple-Output (MIMO) Techniques 252 4.3.1 Introduction to MIMO Concepts 252 4.3.2 3GPP MIMO Evolution 256 4.3.3 MIMO in LTE 258 4.3.4 Closed-Loop MIMO (TM4) versus Open-Loop MIMO (TM3) 261 4.3.5 MIMO Optimization Case Study 267 References 270 5 Deployment Strategy of LTE Network 273 Ayman Elnashar 5.1 Summary and Objective 273 5.2 LTE Network Topology 273 5.3 Core Network Domain 276 5.3.1 Policy Charging and Charging (PCC) Entities 280 5.3.2 Mobility Management Entity (MME) 283 5.3.3 Serving Gateway (SGW) 286 5.3.4 PDN Gateway (PGW) 287 5.3.5 Interworking with PDN (DHCP) 289 5.3.6 Usage of RADIUS on the Gi/SGi Interface 291 5.3.7 IPv6 EPC Transition Strategy 293 5.4 IPSec Gateway (IPSec GW) 294 5.4.1 IPSec GW Deployment Strategy and Redundancy Options 299 5.5 EPC Deployment and Evolution Strategy 300 5.6 Access Network Domain 303 5.6.1 E-UTRAN Overall Description 303 5.6.2 Home eNB 305 5.6.3 Relaying 307 5.6.4 End-to-End Routing of the eNB 308 5.6.5 Macro Sites Deployment Strategy 312 5.6.6 IBS Deployment Strategy 317 5.6.7 Passive Inter Modulation (PIM) 319 5.7 Spectrum Options and Guard Band 327 5.7.1 Guard Band Requirement 327 5.7.2 Spectrum Options for LTE 327 5.8 LTE Business Case and Financial Analysis 333 5.8.1 Key Financial KPIs [31] 334 5.9 Case Study: Inter-Operator Deployment Scenario 341 References 347 6 Coverage and Capacity Planning of 4G Networks 349 Ayman Elnashar 6.1 Summary and Objectives 349 6.2 LTE Network Planning and Rollout Phases 349 6.3 LTE System Foundation 351 6.3.1 LTE FDD Frame Structure 351 6.3.2 Slot Structure and Physical Resources 353 6.3.3 Reference Signal Structure 356 6.4 PCI and TA Planning 360 6.4.1 PCI Planning Introduction 360 6.4.2 PCI Planning Guidelines 361 6.4.3 Tracking Areas (TA) Planning 362 6.5 PRACH Planning 370 6.5.1 Zadoff-Chu Sequence 371 6.5.2 PRACH Planning Procedures 372 6.5.3 Practical PRACH Planning Scenarios 373 6.6 Coverage Planning 375 6.6.1 RSSI, RSRP, RSRQ, and SINR 375 6.6.2 The Channel Quality Indicator 378 6.6.3 Modulation and Coding Scheme and Link Adaptation 381 6.6.4 LTE Link Budget and Coverage Analysis 385 6.6.5 Comparative Analysis with HSPA+ 401 6.6.6 Link Budget for LTE Channels 405 6.6.7 RF Propagation Models and Model Tuning 409 6.7 LTE Throughput and Capacity Analysis 418 6.7.1 Served Physical Layer Throughput Calculation 418 6.7.2 Average Spectrum Efficiency Estimation 418 6.7.3 Average Sector Capacity 419 6.7.4 Capacity Dimensioning Process 419 6.7.5 Capacity Dimensioning Exercises 423 6.7.6 Calculation of VoIP Capacity in LTE 426 6.7.7 LTE Channels Planning 431 6.8 Case Study: LTE FDD versus LTE TDD 437 References 443 7 Voice Evolution in 4G Networks 445 Mahmoud R. Sherif 7.1 Voice over IP Basics 445 7.1.1 VoIP Protocol Stack 445 7.1.2 VoIP Signaling (Call Setup) 449 7.1.3 VoIP Bearer Traffic (Encoded Speech) 449 7.2 Voice Options for LTE 451 7.2.1 SRVCC and CSFB 451 7.2.2 Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) 452 7.3 IMS Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) 455 7.3.1 IMS Overview 456 7.3.2 VoLTE Call Flow and Interaction with IMS 460 7.3.3 Voice Call Continuity Overview 469 7.3.4 SRVCC from VoLTE to 3G/2G 471 7.3.5 Enhanced SRVCC (eSRVCC) 480 7.4 Key VoLTE Features 482 7.4.1 End-to-End QoS Support 482 7.4.2 Semi-Persistent Scheduler 486 7.4.3 TTI Bundling 488 7.4.4 Connected Mode DRX 491 7.4.5 Robust Header Compression (ROHC) 492 7.4.6 VoLTE Vocoders and De-Jitter Buffer 497 7.5 Deployment Considerations for VoLTE 503 References 505 8 4G Advanced Features and Roadmap Evolutions from LTE to LTE-A 507 Ayman Elnashar and Mohamed A. El-saidny 8.1 Performance Comparison between LTE’s UE Category 3 and 4 509 8.1.1 Trial Overview 512 8.1.2 Downlink Performance Comparison in Near and Far Cell Conditions 513 8.1.3 Downlink Performance Comparison in Mobility Conditions 515 8.2 Carrier Aggregation 516 8.2.1 Basic Definitions of LTE Carrier Aggregation 518 8.2.2 Band Types of LTE Carrier Aggregation 519 8.2.3 Impact of LTE Carrier Aggregation on Protocol Layers 520 8.3 Enhanced MIMO 520 8.3.1 Enhanced Downlink MIMO 522 8.3.2 Uplink MIMO 523 8.4 Heterogeneous Network (HetNet) and Small Cells 523 8.4.1 Wireless Backhauling Applicable to HetNet Deployment 524 8.4.2 Key Features for HetNet Deployment 528 8.5 Inter-Cell Interference Coordination (ICIC) 529 8.6 Coordinated Multi-Point Transmission and Reception 531 8.6.1 DL CoMP Categories 531 8.6.2 UL CoMP Categories 533 8.6.3 Performance Evaluation of CoMP 533 8.7 Self-Organizing, Self-Optimizing Networks (SON) 535 8.7.1 Automatic Neighbor Relation (ANR) 536 8.7.2 Mobility Robust Optimization (MRO) 537 8.7.3 Mobility Load Balancing (MLB) 539 8.7.4 SON Enhancements in LTE-A 540 8.8 LTE-A Relays and Home eNodeBs (HeNB) 540 8.9 UE Positioning and Location-Based Services in LTE 541 8.9.1 LBS Overview 541 8.9.2 LTE Positioning Architecture 543 References 544 Index 547

Read more less

Book SynopsisExtended models, methods, and applications in power system risk assessment Risk Assessment of Power Systems: Models, Methods, and Applications, Second Edition fills the gap between risk theory and real-world application. Author Wenyuan Li is a leading authority on power system risk and has more than twenty-five years of experience in risk evaluation. This book offers real-world examples to help readers learn to evaluate power system risk during planning, design, operations, and maintenance activities. Some of the new additions in the Second Edition include: New research and applied achievements in power system risk assessment A discussion of correlation models in risk evaluation How to apply risk assessment to renewable energy sources and smart grids Asset management based on condition monitoring and risk evaluation Voltage instability risk assessment and its application to system planning Table of ContentsPreface xix Preface to the First Edition xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Risk in Power Systems 1 1.2 Basic Concepts of Power System Risk Assessment 4 1.2.1 System Risk Evaluation 4 1.2.2 Data in Risk Evaluation 6 1.2.3 Unit Interruption Cost 7 1.3 Outline of the Book 9 2 Outage Models of System Components 15 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 Models of Independent Outages 16 2.2.1 Repairable Forced Failure 17 2.2.2 Aging Failure 18 2.2.3 Nonrepairable Chance Failure 24 2.2.4 Planned Outage 24 2.2.5 Semiforced Outage 27 2.2.6 Partial Failure Mode 28 2.2.7 Multiple Failure Mode 30 2.3 Models of Dependent Outages 31 2.3.1 Common-Cause Outage 31 2.3.2 Component-Group Outage 36 2.3.3 Station-Originated Outage 37 2.3.4 Cascading Outage 39 2.3.5 Environment-Dependent Failure 40 2.4 Conclusions 42 3 Parameter Estimation in Outage Models 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Point Estimation on Mean and Variance of Failure Data 46 3.2.1 Sample Mean 46 3.2.2 Sample Variance 48 3.3 Interval Estimation on Mean and Variance of Failure Data 49 3.3.1 General Concept of Confidence Interval 49 3.3.2 Confidence Interval of Mean 50 3.3.3 Confidence Interval of Variance 53 3.4 Estimating Failure Frequency of Individual Components 54 3.4.1 Point Estimation 54 3.4.2 Interval Estimation 55 3.5 Estimating Probability from a Binomial Distribution 56 3.6 Experimental Distribution of Failure Data and its Test 57 3.6.1 Experimental Distribution of Failure Data 58 3.6.2 Test of Experimental Distribution 59 3.7 Estimating Parameters in Aging Failure Models 60 3.7.1 Mean Life and its Standard Deviation in the Normal Model 61 3.7.2 Shape and Scale Parameters in the Weibull Model 63 3.7.3 Example 66 3.8 Conclusions 70 4 Elements of Risk Evaluation Methods 73 4.1 Introduction 73 4.2 Methods for Simple Systems 74 4.2.1 Probability Convolution 74 4.2.2 Series and Parallel Networks 75 4.2.3 Minimum Cutsets 78 4.2.4 Markov Equations 79 4.2.5 Frequency-Duration Approaches 81 4.3 Methods for Complex Systems 84 4.3.1 State Enumeration 84 4.3.2 Nonsequential Monte Carlo Simulation 87 4.3.3 Sequential Monte Carlo Simulation 89 4.4 Correlation Models in Risk Evaluation 91 4.4.1 Correlation Measures 92 4.4.2 Correlation Matrix Methods 93 4.4.3 Copula Functions 95 4.5 Conclusions 102 5 Risk Evaluation Techniques for Power Systems 105 5.1 Introduction 105 5.2 Techniques Used in Generation-Demand Systems 106 5.2.1 Convolution Technique 106 5.2.2 State Sampling Method 110 5.2.3 State Duration Sampling Method 112 5.3 Techniques Used in Radial Distribution Systems 114 5.3.1 Analytical Technique 114 5.3.2 State Duration Sampling Method 117 5.4 Techniques Used in Substation Configurations 118 5.4.1 Failure Modes and Modeling 119 5.4.2 Connectivity Identification 121 5.4.3 Stratified State Enumeration Method 123 5.4.4 State Duration Sampling Method 127 5.5 Techniques Used in Composite Generation and Transmission Systems 129 5.5.1 Basic Procedure 130 5.5.2 Component Failure Models 131 5.5.3 Load Curve Models 131 5.5.4 Contingency Analysis 133 5.5.5 Optimization Models for Load Curtailments 135 5.5.6 State Enumeration Method 138 5.5.7 State Sampling Method 139 5.6 Conclusions 141 6 Application of Risk Evaluation to Transmission Development Planning 143 6.1 Introduction 143 6.2 Concept of Probabilistic Planning 144 6.2.1 Basic Procedure 144 6.2.2 Cost Analysis 145 6.2.3 Present Value 146 6.3 Risk Evaluation Approach 146 6.3.1 Risk Evaluation Procedure 147 6.3.2 Risk Cost Model 147 6.4 Example 1: Selecting the Lowest-Cost Planning Alternative 149 6.4.1 System Description 149 6.4.2 Planning Alternatives 151 6.4.3 Risk Evaluation 152 6.4.4 Overall Economic Analysis 155 6.4.5 Summary 157 6.5 Example 2: Applying Different Planning Criteria 158 6.5.1 System and Planning Alternatives 158 6.5.2 Study Conditions and Data 159 6.5.3 Risk and Risk Cost Evaluation 161 6.5.4 Overall Economic Analysis 163 6.5.5 Summary 166 6.6 Conclusions 167 7 Application of Risk Evaluation to Transmission Operation Planning 169 7.1 Introduction 169 7.2 Concept of Risk Evaluation in Operation Planning 170 7.3 Risk Evaluation Method 173 7.4 Example 1: Determining the Lowest-Risk Operation Mode 175 7.4.1 System and Study Conditions 175 7.4.2 Assessing Impacts of Load Transfer 177 7.4.3 Comparing Different Reconfigurations 177 7.4.4 Selecting Operation Mode under the N−2 Condition 179 7.4.5 Summary 181 7.5 Example 2: A Simple Case by Hand Calculation 181 7.5.1 Basic Concept 181 7.5.2 Case Description 182 7.5.3 Study Conditions and Data 183 7.5.4 Risk Evaluation 185 7.5.5 Summary 188 7.6 Conclusions 188 8 Application of Risk Evaluation to Generation Source Planning 191 8.1 Introduction 191 8.2 Procedure of Reliability Planning 192 8.3 Simulation of Generation and Risk Costs 193 8.3.1 Simulation Approach 193 8.3.2 Minimization Cost Model 194 8.3.3 Expected Generation and Risk Costs 195 8.4 Example 1: Selecting Location and Size of Cogenerators 196 8.4.1 Basic Concept 196 8.4.2 System and Cogeneration Candidates 197 8.4.3 Risk Sensitivity Analysis 199 8.4.4 Maximum Benefit Analysis 201 8.4.5 Summary 205 8.5 Example 2: Making a Decision to Retire a Local Generation Plant 205 8.5.1 Case Description 206 8.5.2 Risk Evaluation 206 8.5.3 Total Cost Analysis 208 8.5.4 Summary 210 8.6 Conclusions 210 9 Application of Risk Evaluation to Selecting Substation Configurations 211 9.1 Introduction 211 9.2 Load Curtailment Model 212 9.3 Risk Evaluation Approach 215 9.3.1 Component Failure Models 215 9.3.2 Procedure of Risk Evaluation 215 9.3.3 Economic Analysis Method 216 9.4 Example 1: Selecting Substation Configuration 217 9.4.1 Two Substation Configurations 217 9.4.2 Risk Evaluation 218 9.4.3 Economic Analysis 222 9.4.4 Summary 223 9.5 Example 2: Evaluating Effects of Substation Configuration Changes 223 9.5.1 Simplified Model for Evaluating Substation Configurations 223 9.5.2 Problem Description 224 9.5.3 Risk Evaluation 227 9.5.4 Summary 228 9.6 Example 3: Selecting Transmission Line Arrangement Associated with Substations 229 9.6.1 Description of Two Options 229 9.6.2 Risk Evaluation and Economic Analysis 230 9.6.3 Summary 233 9.7 Conclusions 233 10 Application of Risk Evaluation to Renewable Energy Systems 235 10.1 Introduction 235 10.2 Risk Evaluation of Wind Turbine Power Converter System (WTPCS) 237 10.2.1 Basic Concepts 237 10.2.2 Power Losses and Temperatures of WTPCS Components 238 10.2.3 Risk Evaluation of WTPCS 240 10.2.4 Case Study 245 10.2.5 Summary 251 10.3 Risk Evaluation of Photovoltaic Power Systems 251 10.3.1 Two Basic Structures of Photovoltaic Power Systems 251 10.3.2 Risk Parameters of Photovoltaic Inverters 254 10.3.3 Risk Evaluation of Photovoltaic Power System 258 10.3.4 Case Study 263 10.3.5 Summary 270 10.4 Conclusions 272 11 Application of Risk Evaluation to Composite Systems with Renewable Sources 275 11.1 Introduction 275 11.2 Risk Assessment of a Composite System with Wind Farms and Solar Power Stations 276 11.2.1 Probability Models of Renewable Sources and Bus Load Curves 276 11.2.2 Multiple Correlations among Renewable Sources and Bus/Regional Loads 279 11.2.3 Risk Assessment Considering Multiple Correlations 282 11.2.4 Case Study 283 11.2.5 Summary 295 11.3 Determination of Transfer Capability Required by Wind Generation 296 11.3.1 System, Conditions, and Method 296 11.3.2 Wind Generation Model 298 11.3.3 Equivalence of Wind Power in Generation Systems 299 11.3.4 Transfer Capability Required by Wind Generation 303 11.3.5 Summary 309 11.4 Conclusions 310 12 Risk Evaluation of Wide Area Measurement and Control System 313 12.1 Introduction 313 12.2 Hierarchical Structure and Failure Analysis of WAMCS 314 12.2.1 Hierarchical Structure of WAMCS 314 12.2.2 Failure Analysis Technique for WAMCS 315 12.3 Risk Evaluation of Phasor Measurement Units 317 12.3.1 Markov State Models of PMU Modules 317 12.3.2 Equivalent Two-State Model of PMU 324 12.4 Risk Evaluation of Regional Communication Networks in WAMCS 325 12.4.1 Classification of Regional Communication Networks 325 12.4.2 Survival Mechanisms of Regional Networks 328 12.4.3 Risk Evaluation in Two Survival Mechanisms 329 12.4.4 Equivalent Two-State Model of a Regional Communication Network 334 12.5 Risk Evaluation of Backbone Network in WAMCS 335 12.5.1 Equivalent Risk Model of Backbone Communication Network 336 12.5.2 Risk Evaluation of Optic Fiber System 337 12.6 Numerical Results 343 12.6.1 Risk Indices of PMU 343 12.6.2 Risk Indices of Regional Communication Networks 345 12.6.3 Risk Indices of the Backbone Communication Network 347 12.6.4 Risk Indices of Overall WAMCS 348 12.7 Conclusions 349 13 Reliability-Centered Maintenance 351 13.1 Introduction 351 13.2 Basic Tasks in RCM 352 13.2.1 Comparison between Maintenance Alternatives 352 13.2.2 Lowest-Risk Maintenance Scheduling 353 13.2.3 Predictive Maintenance versus Corrective Maintenance 353 13.2.4 Ranking Importance of Components 354 13.3 Example 1: Transmission Maintenance Scheduling 355 13.3.1 Procedure of Transmission Maintenance Planning 355 13.3.2 Description of the System and Maintenance Outage 357 13.3.3 The Lowest-Risk Schedule of the Cable Replacement 358 13.3.4 Summary 359 13.4 Example 2: Workforce Planning in Maintenance 360 13.4.1 Problem Description 360 13.4.2 Procedure 361 13.4.3 Case Study and Results 362 13.4.4 Summary 363 13.5 Example 3: A Simple Case Performed by Hand Calculations 363 13.5.1 Case Description 363 13.5.2 Study Conditions and Data 365 13.5.3 EENS Evaluation 365 13.5.4 Summary 367 13.6 Conclusions 367 14 Probabilistic Spare-Equipment Analysis 369 14.1 Introduction 369 14.2 Spare-Equipment Analysis Based on Reliability Criteria 370 14.2.1 Unavailability of Components 370 14.2.2 Group Reliability and Spare-Equipment Analysis 372 14.3 Spare-Equipment Analysis Using the Probabilistic Cost Method 373 14.3.1 Failure Cost Model 373 14.3.2 Unit Failure Cost Estimation 374 14.3.3 Annual Investment Cost Model 375 14.3.4 Present Value Approach 375 14.3.5 Procedure of Spare-Equipment Analysis 376 14.4 Example 1: Determining Number and Timing of Spare Transformers 376 14.4.1 Transformer Group and Data 376 14.4.2 Spare-Transformer Analysis Based on Group Failure Probability 377 14.4.3 Spare-Transformer Plans Based on the Probabilistic Cost Model 378 14.4.4 Summary 381 14.5 Example 2: Determining Redundancy Level of 500 kV Reactors 381 14.5.1 Problem Description 381 14.5.2 Study Conditions and Data 383 14.5.3 Redundancy Analysis 385 14.5.4 Summary 387 14.6 Conclusions 387 15 Asset Management Based on Condition Monitoring and Risk Evaluation 389 15.1 Introduction 389 15.2 Maintenance Strategy of Overhead Lines 390 15.2.1 Risk Evaluation Using Condition Monitoring Data 391 15.2.2 Overhead Line Maintenance Strategy 397 15.2.3 Case Study 399 15.2.4 Summary 401 15.3 Replacement Strategy for Aged Transformers 402 15.3.1 Transformer Aging Failure Unavailability Using Condition Monitoring Data 403 15.3.2 Transformer Replacement Strategy 407 15.3.3 Case Study 410 15.3.4 Summary 413 15.4 Conclusions 414 16 Reliability-Based Transmission-Service Pricing 417 16.1 Introduction 417 16.2 Basic Concept 418 16.2.1 Incremental Reliability Value 419 16.2.2 Impacts of Customers on System Reliability 420 16.2.3 Reliability Component in Price Design 421 16.3 Calculation Methods 422 16.3.1 Unit Incremental Reliability Value 422 16.3.2 Generation Credit for Reliability Improvement 423 16.3.3 Load Charge for Reliability Degradation 423 16.3.4 Load Charge Rate Due to Generation Credit 424 16.4 Rate Design 424 16.4.1 Charge Rate for Wheeling Customers 424 16.4.2 Charge Rate for Native Customers 425 16.4.3 Credit to Generation Customers 425 16.5 Application Example 425 16.5.1 Calculation of the UIRV 427 16.5.2 Calculation of the GCRI 427 16.5.3 Calculation of the LCRD 427 16.5.4 Calculation of the LCRGC 428 16.5.5 Calculations of Charge Rates 428 16.6 Conclusions 430 17 Voltage Instability Risk Assessment and its Application to System Planning 431 17.1 Introduction 431 17.2 Method of Assessing Voltage Instability Risk 432 17.2.1 Maximum Loadability Model for System States 432 17.2.2 Models for Identifying Weak Branches and Buses 436 17.2.3 Determination of Contingency System States 443 17.2.4 Procedure of Calculating Voltage Instability Risk Indices 444 17.3 Tracing and Locating Voltage Instability Risk for Planning Alternatives 447 17.4 Case Studies 448 17.4.1 Results of the IEEE 14-Bus System 448 17.4.2 Results of the 171-Bus Utility System 453 17.5 Conclusions 456 18 Probabilistic Transient Stability Assessment 459 18.1 Introduction 459 18.2 Probabilistic Modeling and Simulation Methods 460 18.2.1 Selection of Pre-Fault System States 460 18.2.2 Fault Models 461 18.2.3 Monte Carlo Simulation of Fault Events 463 18.2.4 Transient Stability Simulation 464 18.3 Procedure 464 18.3.1 Procedure for the First Type of Study 465 18.3.2 Procedure for the Second Type of Study 465 18.4 Examples 465 18.4.1 System Description and Data 465 18.4.2 Transfer Limit Calculation in the Columbia River System 470 18.4.3 Generation Rejection Requirement in the Peace River System 472 18.4.4 Summary 475 18.5 Conclusions 475 Appendix A Basic Probability Concepts 477 A.1 Probability Calculation Rules 477 A.1.1 Intersection 477 A.1.2 Union 477 A.1.3 Full Conditional Probability 478 A.2 Random Variable and its Distribution 478 A.3 Important Distributions in Risk Evaluation 479 A.3.1 Exponential Distribution 479 A.3.2 Normal Distribution 479 A.3.3 Log-Normal Distribution 481 A.3.4 Weibull Distribution 481 A.3.5 Gamma Distribution 482 A.3.6 Beta Distribution 483 A.4 Numerical Characteristics 483 A.4.1 Mathematical Expectation 483 A.4.2 Variance and Standard Deviation 484 A.4.3 Covariance and Correlation Coefficients 484 A.5 Nonparametric Kernel Density Estimator 485 A.5.1 Basic Concept 485 A.5.2 Determination of the Bandwidth 486 Appendix B Elements of Monte Carlo Simulation 489 B.1 General Concept 489 B.2 Random Number Generators 490 B.2.1 Multiplicative Congruent Generator 490 B.2.2 Mixed Congruent Generator 491 B.3 Inverse Transform Method of Generating Random Variates 491 B.4 Important Random Variates in Risk Evaluation 492 B.4.1 Exponential Distribution Random Variate 492 B.4.2 Normal Distribution Random Variate 493 B.4.3 Log-Normal Distribution Random Variate 494 B.4.4 Weibull Distribution Random Variate 494 B.4.5 Gamma Distribution Random Variate 495 B.4.6 Beta Distribution Random Variate 495 Appendix C Power Flow Models 497 C.1 AC Power Flow Models 497 C.1.1 Power Flow Equations 497 C.1.2 Newton–Raphson Method 497 C.1.3 Fast Decoupled Method 498 C.2 DC Power Flow Models 499 C.2.1 Basic Equation 499 C.2.2 Line Flow Equation 500 Appendix D Optimization Algorithms 503 D.1 Simplex Methods for Linear Programming 503 D.1.1 Primal Simplex Method 503 D.1.2 Dual Simplex Method 505 D.2 Interior Point Method for Nonlinear Programming 506 D.2.1 Optimality and Feasibility Conditions 506 D.2.2 Procedure of the Algorithm 508 Appendix E Three Probability Distribution Tables 511 References 515 Further Reading 523 Index 525

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsList of Contributors xv Preface xvii 1 Introduction 1Xiang Zhou and Chongjin Xie 1.1 High-Capacity Fiber Transmission Technology Evolution, 1 1.2 Fundamentals of Coherent Transmission Technology, 4 1.2.1 Concept of Coherent Detection, 4 1.2.2 Digital Signal Processing, 5 1.2.3 Key Devices, 7 1.3 Outline of this Book, 8 References, 9 2 Multidimensional Optimized Optical Modulation Formats 13Magnus Karlsson and Erik Agrell 2.1 Introduction, 13 2.2 Fundamentals of Digital Modulation, 15 2.2.1 System Models, 15 2.2.2 Channel Models, 17 2.2.3 Constellations and Their Performance Metrics, 18 2.3 Modulation Formats and Their Ideal Performance, 20 2.3.1 Format Optimizations and Comparisons, 21 2.3.2 Optimized Formats in Nonlinear Channels, 30 2.4 Combinations of Coding and Modulation, 31 2.4.1 Soft-Decision Decoding, 31 2.4.2 Hard-Decision Decoding, 37 2.4.3 Iterative Decoding, 39 2.5 Experimental Work, 40 2.5.1 Transmitter Realizations and Transmission Experiments, 40 2.5.2 Receiver Realizations and Digital Signal Processing, 45 2.5.3 Formats Overview, 49 2.5.4 Symbol Detection, 50 2.5.5 Realizing Dimensions, 51 2.6 Summary and Conclusions, 54 References, 56 3 Advances in Detection and Error Correction for Coherent Optical Communications: Regular, Irregular, and Spatially Coupled LDPC Code Designs 65Laurent Schmalen, Stephan ten Brink, and Andreas Leven 3.1 Introduction, 65 3.2 Differential Coding for Optical Communications, 67 3.2.1 Higher-Order Modulation Formats, 67 3.2.2 The Phase-Slip Channel Model, 69 3.2.3 Differential Coding and Decoding, 71 3.2.4 Maximum a Posteriori Differential Decoding, 78 3.2.5 Achievable Rates of the Differentially Coded Phase-Slip Channel, 81 3.3 LDPC-Coded Differential Modulation, 83 3.3.1 Low-Density Parity-Check (LDPC) Codes, 85 3.3.2 Code Design for Iterative Differential Decoding, 91 3.3.3 Higher-Order Modulation Formats with V < Q, 100 3.4 Coded Differential Modulation with Spatially Coupled LDPC Codes, 101 3.4.1 Protograph-Based Spatially Coupled LDPC Codes, 102 3.4.2 Spatially Coupled LDPC Codes with Iterative Demodulation, 105 3.4.3 Windowed Differential Decoding of SC-LDPC Codes, 108 3.4.4 Design of Protograph-Based SC-LDPC Codes for Differential-Coded Modulation, 108 3.5 Conclusions, 112 Appendix: LDPC-Coded Differential Modulation—Decoding Algorithms, 112 Differential Decoding, 114 LDPC Decoding, 115 References, 117 4 Spectrally Efficient Multiplexing: Nyquist-WDM 123Gabriella Bosco 4.1 Introduction, 123 4.2 Nyquist Signaling Schemes, 125 4.2.1 Ideal Nyquist-WDM (Δf = Rs), 126 4.2.2 Quasi-Nyquist-WDM (Δf > Rs), 128 4.2.3 Super-Nyquist-WDM (Δf < Rs), 130 4.3 Detection of a Nyquist-WDM Signal, 134 4.4 Practical Nyquist-WDM Transmitter Implementations, 137 4.4.1 Optical Nyquist-WDM, 139 4.4.2 Digital Nyquist-WDM, 141 4.5 Nyquist-WDM Transmission, 146 4.5.1 Optical Nyquist-WDM Transmission Experiments, 148 4.5.2 Digital Nyquist-WDM Transmission Experiments, 148 4.6 Conclusions, 149 References, 150 5 Spectrally Efficient Multiplexing – OFDM 157An Li, Di Che, Qian Hu, Xi Chen, and William Shieh 5.1 OFDM Basics, 158 5.2 Coherent Optical OFDM (CO-OFDM), 161 5.2.1 Principle of CO-OFDM, 161 5.3 Direct-Detection Optical OFDM (DDO-OFDM), 169 5.3.1 Linearly Mapped DDO-OFDM, 169 5.3.2 Nonlinearly Mapped DDO-OFDM (NLM-DDO-OFDM), 173 5.4 Self-Coherent Optical OFDM, 174 5.4.1 Single-Ended Photodetector-Based SCOH, 175 5.4.2 Balanced Receiver-Based SCOH, 177 5.4.3 Stokes Vector Direct Detection, 177 5.5 Discrete Fourier Transform Spread OFDM System (DFT-S OFDM), 180 5.5.1 Principle of DFT-S OFDM, 180 5.5.2 Unique-Word-Assisted DFT-S OFDM (UW-DFT-S OFDM), 182 5.6 OFDM-Based Superchannel Transmissions, 183 5.6.1 No-Guard-Interval CO-OFDM (NGI-CO-OFDM) Superchannel, 184 5.6.2 Reduced-Guard-Interval CO-OFDM (RGI-CO-OFDM) Superchannel, 186 5.6.3 DFT-S OFDM Superchannel, 188 5.7 Summary, 193 References, 194 6 Polarization and Nonlinear Impairments in Fiber Communication Systems 201Chongjin Xie 6.1 Introduction, 201 6.2 Polarization of Light, 202 6.3 PMD and PDL in Optical Communication Systems, 206 6.3.1 PMD, 206 6.3.2 PDL, 208 6.4 Modeling of Nonlinear Effects in Optical Fibers, 209 6.5 Coherent Optical Communication Systems and Signal Equalization, 211 6.5.1 Coherent Optical Communication Systems, 211 6.5.2 Signal Equalization, 213 6.6 PMD and PDL Impairments in Coherent Systems, 215 6.6.1 PMD Impairment, 216 6.6.2 PDL Impairment, 222 6.7 Nonlinear Impairments in Coherent Systems, 228 6.7.1 System Model, 229 6.7.2 Homogeneous PDM-QPSK System, 230 6.7.3 Hybrid PDM-QPSK and 10-Gb/s OOK System, 233 6.7.4 Homogeneous PDM-16QAM System, 234 6.8 Summary, 240 References, 241 7 Analytical Modeling of the Impact of Fiber Non-Linear Propagation on Coherent Systems and Networks 247Pierluigi Poggiolini, Yanchao Jiang, Andrea Carena, and Fabrizio Forghieri 7.1 Why are Analytical Models Important?, 247 7.1.1 What Do Professionals Need?, 247 7.2 Background, 248 7.2.1 Modeling Approximations, 249 7.3 Introducing the GN–EGN Model Class, 260 7.3.1 Getting to the GN Model, 260 7.3.2 Towards the EGN Model, 265 7.4 Model Selection Guide, 269 7.4.1 From Model to System Performance, 269 7.4.2 Point-to-Point Links, 270 7.4.3 The Complete EGN Model, 272 7.4.4 Case Study: Determining the Optimum System Symbol Rate, 286 7.4.5 NLI Modeling for Dynamically Reconfigurable Networks, 289 7.5 Conclusion, 294 Acknowledgements, 295 Appendix, 295 A.1 The White-Noise Approximation, 295 A.1 BER Formulas for the Most Common QAM Systems, 295 A.2 The Link Function 𝜇, 296 A.3 The EGN Model Formulas for the X2-X4 and M1-M3 Islands, 297 A.4 Outline of GN–EGN Model Derivation, 299 A.5 List of Acronyms, 303 References, 305 8 Digital Equalization in Coherent Optical Transmission Systems 311Seb Savory 8.1 Introduction, 311 8.2 Primer on the Mathematics of Least Squares FIR Filters, 312 8.2.1 Finite Impulse Response Filters, 313 8.2.2 Differentiation with Respect to a Complex Vector, 314 8.2.3 Least Squares Tap Weights, 314 8.2.4 Application to Stochastic Gradient Algorithms, 316 8.2.5 Application to Wiener Filter, 317 8.2.6 Other Filtering Techniques and Design Methodologies, 318 8.3 Equalization of Chromatic Dispersion, 318 8.3.1 Nature of Chromatic Dispersion, 318 8.3.2 Modeling of Chromatic Dispersion in an Optical Fiber, 318 8.3.3 Truncated Impulse Response, 319 8.3.4 Band-Limited Impulse Response, 320 8.3.5 Least Squares FIR Filter Design, 321 8.3.6 Example Performance of the Chromatic Dispersion Compensating Filter, 321 8.4 Equalization of Polarization-Mode Dispersion, 323 8.4.1 Modeling of PMD, 324 8.4.2 Obtaining the Inverse Jones Matrix of the Channel, 325 8.4.3 Constant Modulus Update Algorithm, 325 8.4.4 Decision-Directed Equalizer Update Algorithm, 326 8.4.5 Radially Directed Equalizer Update Algorithm, 327 8.4.6 Parallel Realization of the FIR Filter, 327 8.4.7 Generalized 4 × 4 Equalizer for Mitigation of Frequency or Polarization-Dependent Loss and Receiver Skew, 328 8.4.8 Example Application to Fast Blind Equalization of PMD, 328 8.5 Concluding Remarks and Future Research Directions, 329 Acknowledgments, 330 References, 330 9 Nonlinear Compensation for Digital Coherent Transmission 333Guifang Li 9.1 Introduction, 333 9.2 Digital Backward Propagation (DBP), 334 9.2.1 How DBP Works, 334 9.2.2 Experimental Demonstration of DBP, 335 9.2.3 Computational Complexity of DBP, 336 9.3 Reducing DBP Complexity for Dispersion-Unmanaged WDM Transmission, 339 9.4 DBP for Dispersion-Managed WDM Transmission, 342 9.5 DBP for Polarization-Multiplexed Transmission, 349 9.6 Future Research, 350 References, 351 10 Timing Synchronization in Coherent Optical Transmission Systems 355Han Sun and Kuang-Tsan Wu 10.1 Introduction, 355 10.2 Overall System Environment, 357 10.3 Jitter Penalty and Jitter Sources in a Coherent System, 359 10.3.1 VCO Jitter, 359 10.3.2 Detector Jitter Definitions and Method of Numerical Evaluation, 361 10.3.3 Laser FM Noise- and Dispersion-Induced Jitter, 363 10.3.4 Coherent System Tolerance to Untracked Jitter, 366 10.4 Digital Phase Detectors, 368 10.4.1 Frequency-Domain Phase Detector, 369 10.4.2 Equivalence to the Squaring Phase Detector, 371 10.4.3 Equivalence to Godard’s Maximum Sampled Power Criterion, 373 10.4.4 Equivalence to Gardner’s Phase Detector, 374 10.4.5 Second Class of Phase Detectors, 377 10.4.6 Jitter Performance of the Phase Detectors, 378 10.4.7 Phase Detectors for Nyquist Signals, 380 10.5 The Chromatic Dispersion Problem, 383 10.6 The Polarization-Mode Dispersion Problem, 386 10.7 Timing Synchronization for Coherent Optical OFDM, 390 10.8 Future Research, 391 References, 392 11 Carrier Recovery in Coherent Optical Communication Systems 395Xiang Zhou 11.1 Introduction, 395 11.2 Optimal Carrier Recovery, 397 11.2.1 MAP-Based Frequency and Phase Estimator, 397 11.2.2 Cramér–Rao Lower Bound, 398 11.3 Hardware-Efficient Phase Recovery Algorithms, 399 11.3.1 Decision-Directed Phase-Locked Loop (PLL), 399 11.3.2 Mth-Power-Based Feedforward Algorithms, 401 11.3.3 Blind Phase Search (BPS) Feedforward Algorithms, 405 11.3.4 Multistage Carrier Phase Recovery Algorithms, 408 11.4 Hardware-Efficient Frequency Recovery Algorithms, 416 11.4.1 Coarse Auto-Frequency Control (ACF), 416 11.4.2 Mth-Power-Based Fine FO Estimation Algorithms, 418 11.4.3 Blind Frequency Search (BFS)-Based Fine FO Estimation Algorithm, 421 11.4.4 Training-Initiated Fine FO Estimation Algorithm, 423 11.5 Equalizer-Phase Noise Interaction and its Mitigation, 424 11.6 Carrier Recovery in Coherent OFDM Systems, 429 11.7 Conclusions and Future Research Directions, 430 References, 431 12 Real-Time Implementation of High-Speed Digital Coherent Transceivers 435Timo Pfau 12.1 Algorithm Constraints, 435 12.1.1 Power Constraint and Hardware Optimization, 436 12.1.2 Parallel Processing Constraint, 438 12.1.3 Feedback Latency Constraint, 440 12.2 Hardware Implementation of Digital Coherent Receivers, 442 References, 446 13 Photonic Integration 447Po Dong and Sethumadhavan Chandrasekhar 13.1 Introduction, 447 13.2 Overview of Photonic Integration Technologies, 449 13.3 Transmitters, 451 13.3.1 Dual-Polarization Transmitter Circuits, 451 13.3.2 High-Speed Modulators, 452 13.3.3 PLC Hybrid I/Q Modulator, 455 13.3.4 InP Monolithic I/Q Modulator, 455 13.3.5 Silicon Monolithic I/Q Modulator, 457 13.4 Receivers, 459 13.4.1 Polarization Diversity Receiver Circuits, 459 13.4.2 PLC Hybrid Receivers, 461 13.4.3 InP Monolithic Receivers, 462 13.4.4 Silicon Monolithic Receivers, 462 13.4.5 Coherent Receiver with 120∘ Optical Hybrids, 465 13.5 Conclusions, 467 Acknowledgments, 467 References, 467 14 Optical Performance Monitoring for Fiber-Optic Communication Networks 473Faisal N. Khan, Zhenhua Dong, Chao Lu, and Alan Pak Tao Lau 14.1 Introduction, 473 14.1.1 OPM and Their Roles in Optical Networks, 474 14.1.2 Network Functionalities Enabled by OPM, 475 14.1.3 Network Parameters Requiring OPM, 477 14.1.4 Desirable Features of OPM Techniques, 480 14.2 OPM Techniques For Direct Detection Systems, 482 14.2.1 OPM Requirements for Direct Detection Optical Networks, 482 14.2.2 Overview of OPM Techniques for Existing Direct Detection Systems, 483 14.2.3 Electronic DSP-Based Multi-Impairment Monitoring Techniques for Direct Detection Systems, 485 14.2.4 Bit Rate and Modulation Format Identification Techniques for Direct Detection Systems, 488 14.2.5 Commercially Available OPM Devices for Direct Detection Systems, 489 14.2.6 Applications of OPM in Deployed Fiber-Optic Networks, 489 14.3 OPM For Coherent Detection Systems, 490 14.3.1 Non-Data-Aided OSNR Monitoring for Digital Coherent Receivers, 491 14.3.2 Data-Aided (Pilot Symbols Based) OSNR Monitoring for Digital Coherent Receivers, 494 14.3.3 OPM at the Intermediate Network Nodes Using Low-Cost Structures, 495 14.3.4 OSNR Monitoring in the Presence of Fiber Nonlinearity, 496 14.4 Integrating OPM Functionalities in Networking, 499 14.5 Conclusions and Outlook, 499 Acknowledgments, 500 References, 500 15 Rate-Adaptable Optical Transmission and Elastic Optical Networks 507Patricia Layec, Annalisa Morea, Yvan Pointurier, and Jean-Christophe Antona 15.1 Introduction, 507 15.1.1 History of Elastic Optical Networks, 509 15.2 Key Building Blocks, 511 15.2.1 Optical Cross-Connect, 512 15.2.2 Elastic Transponder, 513 15.2.3 Elastic Aggregation, 515 15.2.4 Performance Prediction, 516 15.2.5 Resource Allocation Tools, 520 15.2.6 Control Plane for Flexible Optical Networks, 524 15.3 Practical Considerations for Elastic WDM Transmission, 527 15.3.1 Flexible Transponder Architecture, 527 15.3.2 Example of a Real-Time Energy-Proportional Prototype, 529 15.4 Opportunities for Elastic Technologies in Core Networks, 530 15.4.1 More Cost-Efficient Networks, 531 15.4.2 More Energy Efficient Network, 532 15.4.3 Filtering Issues and Superchannel Solution, 532 15.5 Long Term Opportunities, 534 15.5.1 Burst Mode Elasticity, 534 15.5.2 Elastic Passive Optical Networks, 536 15.5.3 Metro and Datacenter Networks, 537 15.6 Conclusions, 539 Acknowledgments, 539 References, 539 16 Space-Division Multiplexing and MIMO Processing 547Roland Ryf and Nicolas K. Fontaine 16.1 Space-Division Multiplexing in Optical Fibers, 547 16.2 Optical Fibers for SDM Transmission, 548 16.3 Optical Transmission in SDM Fibers with Low Crosstalk, 551 16.3.1 Digital Signal Processing Techniques for SDM Fibers with Low Crosstalk, 552 16.4 MIMO-Based Optical Transmission in SDM Fibers, 553 16.5 Impulse Response in SDM Fibers with Mode Coupling, 558 16.5.1 Multimode Fibers with no Mode Coupling, 561 16.5.2 Multimode Fibers with Weak Coupling, 561 16.5.3 Multimode Fibers with Strong Mode Coupling, 565 16.5.4 Multimode Fibers: Scaling to Large Number of Modes, 566 16.6 MIMO-Based SDM Transmission Results, 566 16.6.1 Digital Signal Processing for MIMO Transmission, 567 16.7 Optical Components for SDM Transmission, 568 16.7.1 Characterization of SDM Systems and Components, 570 16.7.2 Swept Wavelength Interferometry for Fibers with Multiple Spatial Paths, 571 16.7.3 Spatial Multiplexers, 576 16.7.4 Photonic Lanterns, 578 16.7.5 Spatial Diversity for SDM Components and Component sharing, 582 16.7.6 Wavelength-Selective Switches for SDM, 583 16.7.7 SDM Fiber Amplifiers, 590 16.8 Conclusion, 593 Acknowledgments, 593 References, 594 Index 609

Read more less

Book SynopsisOffers a comprehensive guide to understanding and interpreting digital images in medical and functional applications. This book focuses on image understanding and semantic interpretation, with clear introductions to related concepts and in-depth theoretical analysis. It is suitable for the reader interested in biomedical image understanding.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xv Preface xix Acronyms xxiii PART I INTRODUCTION 1 1 Overview of Biomedical Image Understanding Methods 3Wei Xiong, Jierong Cheng, Ying Gu, Shimiao Li and Joo Hwee Lim 1.1 Segmentation and Object Detection 5 1.1.1 Methods Based on Image Processing Techniques 6 1.1.2 Methods Using Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning Algorithms 7 1.1.3 Model and Atlas-Based Segmentation 8 1.1.4 Multispectral Segmentation 9 1.1.5 User Interactions in Interactive Segmentation Methods 10 1.1.6 Frontiers of Biomedical Image Segmentation 11 1.2 Registration 11 1.2.1 Taxonomy of Registration Methods 12 1.2.2 Frontiers of Registration for Biomedical Image Understanding 15 1.3 Object Tracking 16 1.3.1 Object Representation 17 1.3.2 Feature Selection for Tracking 18 1.3.3 Object Tracking Technique 19 1.3.4 Frontiers of Object Tracking 19 1.4 Classification 20 1.4.1 Feature Extraction and Feature Selection 21 1.4.2 Classifiers 22 1.4.3 Unsupervised Classification 23 1.4.4 Classifier Combination 24 1.4.5 Frontiers of Pattern Classification for Biomedical Image Understanding 25 1.5 Knowledge-Based Systems 26 1.5.1 Semantic Interpretation and Knowledge-Based Systems 26 1.5.2 Knowledge-Based Vision Systems 27 1.5.3 Knowledge-Based Vision Systems in Biomedical Image Analysis 28 1.5.4 Frontiers of Knowledge-Based Systems 29 References 29 PARTII SEGMENTATION AND OBJECT DETECTION 47 2 Medical Image Segmentation and its Application in Cardiac MRI 49Dong Wei, Chao Li, and Ying Sun 2.1 Introduction 50 2.2 Background 51 2.2.1 Active Contour Models 51 2.2.2 Parametric and Nonparametric Contour Representation 52 2.2.3 Graph-Based Image Segmentation 53 2.2.4 Summary 54 2.3 Parametric Active Contours – The Snakes 54 2.3.1 The Internal Spline Energy Eint 54 2.3.2 The Image-Derived Energy Eimg 55 2.3.3 The External Control Energy Econ 55 2.3.4 Extension of Snakes and Summary of Parametric Active Contours 57 2.4 Geometric Active Contours – The Level Sets 58 2.4.1 Variational Level Set Methods 58 2.4.2 Region-Based Variational Level Set Methods 60 2.4.3 Summary of Level Set Methods 64 2.5 Graph-Based Methods – The Graph Cuts 65 2.5.1 Basic Graph Cuts Formulation 65 2.5.2 Patch-Based Graph Cuts 66 2.5.3 An Example of Graph Cuts 68 2.5.4 Summary of Graph Cut Methods 72 2.6 Case Study: Cardiac Image Segmentation Using A Dual Level Sets Model 73 2.6.1 Introduction 73 2.6.2 Method 74 2.6.3 Experimental Results 79 2.6.4 Conclusion of the Case Study 81 2.7 Conclusion and Near-Future Trends 81 References 83 3 Morphometric Measurements of the Retinal Vasculature in Fundus Images With Vampire 91Emanuele Trucco, Andrea Giachetti, Lucia Ballerini, Devanjali Relan, Alessandro Cavinato, and Tom Macgillivray 3.1 Introduction 92 3.2 Assessing Vessel Width 93 3.2.1 Previous Work 93 3.2.2 Our Method 94 3.2.3 Results 95 3.2.4 Discussion 96 3.3 Artery or Vein? 98 3.3.1 Previous Work 98 3.3.2 Our Solution 99 3.3.3 Results 101 3.3.4 Discussion 103 3.4 Are My Program’s Measurements Accurate? 104 3.4.1 Discussion 106 References 107 4 Analyzing Cell and Tissue Morphologies Using Pattern Recognition Algorithms 113Hwee Kuan Lee, Yan Nei Law, Chao-Hui Huang, and Choon Kong Yap 4.1 Introduction, 113 4.2 Texture Segmentation of Endometrial Images Using the Subspace Mumford–Shah Model 115 4.2.1 Subspace Mumford–Shah Segmentation Model 116 4.2.2 Feature Weights 118 4.2.3 Once-and-For-All Approach 119 4.2.4 Results 119 4.3 Spot Clustering for Detection of Mutants in Keratinocytes 120 4.3.1 Image Analysis Framework 123 4.3.2 Results 124 4.4 Cells and Nuclei Detection 124 4.4.1 Model 125 4.4.2 Neural Cells and Breast Cancer Cells Data 127 4.4.3 Performance Evaluation 127 4.4.4 Robustness Study 127 4.4.5 Results 128 4.5 Geometric Regional Graph Spectral Feature 134 4.5.1 Conversion of Image Patches into Region Signatures 134 4.5.2 Comparing Region Signatures 135 4.5.3 Classification of Region Signatures 136 4.5.4 Random Masking and Object Detection 136 4.5.5 Results 137 4.6 Mitotic Cells in the H&E Histopathological Images of Breast Cancer Carcinoma 138 4.6.1 Mitotic Index Estimation 139 4.6.2 Mitotic Candidate Selection 140 4.6.3 Exclusive Independent Component Analysis (XICA) 140 4.6.4 Classification Using Sparse Representation 143 4.6.5 Training and Testing Over Channels 144 4.6.6 Results 146 4.7 Conclusions 147 References 147 PARTIII REGISTRATION AND MATCHING 153 5 3D Nonrigid Image Registration by Parzen-Window-Based Normalized Mutual Information and its Application on Mr-Guided Microwave Thermocoagulation of Liver Tumors 155Rui Xu, Yen-Wei Chen, Shigehiro Morikawa, and Yoshimasa Kurumi 5.1 Introduction 155 5.2 Parzen-Window-Based Normalized Mutual Information 157 5.2.1 Definition of Parzen-Window Method 157 5.2.2 Parzen-Window-Based Estimation of Joint Histogram 158 5.2.3 Normalized Mutual Information and its Derivative 160 5.3 Analysis of Kernel Selection 163 5.3.1 The Designed Kernel 163 5.3.2 Comparison in Theory 167 5.3.3 Comparison by Experiments 170 5.4 Application on MR-Guided Microwave Thermocoagulation of Liver Tumors 174 5.4.1 Introduction of MR-Guided Microwave Thermocoagulation of Liver Tumors 174 5.4.2 Nonrigid Registration by Parzen-Window-Based Mutual Information 175 5.4.3 Evaluation on Phantom Data 177 5.4.4 Evaluation on Clinical Cases 180 5.5 Conclusion 185 Acknowledgements 186 References 187 6 2D/3D Image Registration For Endovascular Abdominal Aortic Aneurysm (AAA) Repair 189Shun Miao and Rui Liao 6.1 Introduction 189 6.2 Background 190 6.2.1 Image Modalities 190 6.2.2 2D/3D Registration Framework 192 6.2.3 Feature-Based Registration 194 6.2.4 Intensity-Based Registration 196 6.2.5 Number of Imaging Planes 197 6.2.6 2D/3D Registration for Endovascular AAA Repair 198 6.3 Smart Utilization of Two X-Ray Images for Rigid-Body 2D/3D Registration 199 6.3.1 2D/3D Registration: Challenges in EVAR 199 6.3.2 3D Image Processing and DRR Generation 202 6.3.3 2D Image Processing 203 6.3.4 Similarity Measure 205 6.3.5 Optimization 207 6.3.6 Validation 210 6.4 Deformable 2D/3D Registration 211 6.4.1 Problem Formulation 212 6.4.2 Graph-Based Difference Measure 213 6.4.3 Length Preserving Term 215 6.4.4 Smoothness Term 215 6.4.5 Optimization 216 6.4.6 Validation 217 6.5 Visual Check of Patient Movement Using Pelvis Boundary Detection 220 6.6 Discussion and Conclusion 222 References 223 PARTIV OBJECT TRACKING 229 7 Motion Tracking in Medical Images 231Chuqing Cao, Chao Li, and Ying Sun 7.1 Introduction 232 7.1.1 Point-Based Tracking 233 7.1.2 Silhouette-Based Tracking 233 7.1.3 Kernel-Based Tracking 233 7.2 Background 234 7.2.1 Point-Based Tracking 234 7.2.2 Silhouette-Based Tracking 236 7.2.3 Kernel-Based Tracking 237 7.2.4 Summary 238 7.3 Bayesian Tracking Methods 238 7.3.1 Kalman Filters 239 7.3.2 Particle Filters 240 7.3.3 Summary of Bayesian Tracking Methods 241 7.4 Deformable Models 241 7.4.1 Mathematical Foundations of Deformable Models 241 7.4.2 Energy-Minimizing Deformable Models 242 7.4.3 Probabilistic Deformable Models 244 7.4.4 Summary of Deformable Models 245 7.5 Motion Tracking Based on the Harmonic Phase Algorithm 246 7.5.1 HARP Imaging 246 7.5.2 HARP Tracking 248 7.5.3 Summary 249 7.6 Case Study: Pseudo Ground Truth-Based Nonrigid Registration of MRI for Tracking the Cardiac Motion 250 7.6.1 Data Fidelity Term 251 7.6.2 Spatial Smoothness Constraint 252 7.6.3 Temporal Smoothness Constraint 253 7.6.4 Energy Minimization 254 7.6.5 Preliminary Results 255 7.6.6 Nonrigid Registration of Myocardial Perfusion MRI 255 7.6.7 Experimental Results 259 7.7 Discussion 264 7.8 Conclusion and Near-Future Trends 265 References 267 PARTV CLASSIFICATION 275 8 Blood Smear Analysis, Malaria Infection Detection, and Grading from Blood Cell Images 277Wei Xiong, Sim-Heng Ong, Joo-Hwee Lim, Jierong Cheng, and Ying Gu 8.1 Introduction 278 8.2 Pattern Classification Techniques 282 8.2.1 Supervised and Nonsupervised Learning 282 8.2.2 Bayesian Decision Theory 283 8.2.3 Clustering 284 8.2.4 Support Vector Machines 286 8.3 GWA Detection 287 8.3.1 Image Analysis 288 8.3.2 Association between the Object Area and the Number of Cells Per Object 289 8.3.3 Clump Splitting 291 8.3.4 Clump Characterization 293 8.3.5 Classification 295 8.4 Dual-Model-Guided Image Segmentation and Recognition 295 8.4.1 Related Work 296 8.4.2 Strategies and Object Functions 297 8.4.3 Endpoint Adjacency Map Construction and Edge Linking 299 8.4.4 Parsing Contours and Their Convex Hulls 300 8.4.5 A Recursive and Greedy Splitting Approach 301 8.4.6 Incremental Model Updating and Bayesian Decision 301 8.5 Infection Detection and Staging 302 8.5.1 Related Work 302 8.5.2 Methodology 303 8.6 Experimental Results 305 8.6.1 GWA Classification 305 8.6.2 RBC Segmentation 310 8.6.3 RBC Classification 315 8.7 Summary 320 References 321 9 Liver Tumor Segmentation Using SVM Framework and Pathology Characterization Using Content-Based Image Retrieval 325Jiayin Zhou, Yanling Chi, Weimin Huang, Wei Xiong, Wenyu Chen, Jimin Liu, and Sudhakar K. Venkatesh 9.1 Introduction 325 9.2 Liver Tumor Segmentation Under a Hybrid SVM Framework 327 9.2.1 Fundamentals of SVM for Classification 327 9.2.2 SVM Framework for Liver Tumor Segmentation and the Problems 330 9.2.3 A Three-Stage Hybrid SVM Scheme for Liver Tumor Segmentation 331 9.2.4 Experiment 334 9.2.5 Evaluation Metrics 335 9.2.6 Results 336 9.3 Liver Tumor Characterization by Content-Based Image Retrieval 338 9.3.1 Existing Work and the Rationale of Using CBIR 339 9.3.2 Methodology Overview and Preprocessing 340 9.3.3 Tumor Feature Representation 341 9.3.4 Similarity Query and Tumor Pathological Type Prediction 343 9.3.5 Experiment 345 9.3.6 Results 346 9.4 Discussion 351 9.4.1 About Liver Tumor Segmentation Using Machine Learning 351 9.4.2 About Liver Tumor Characterization Using CBIR 353 9.5 Conclusion 356 References 357 10 Benchmarking Lymph Node Metastasis Classification for Gastric Cancer Staging 361Su Zhang, Chao Li, Shuheng Zhang, Lifang Pang, and Huan Zhang 10.1 Introduction 362 10.1.1 Introduction of GSI-CT 363 10.1.2 Imaging Findings of Gastric Cancer 366 10.2 Related Feature Selection, Metric Learning, and Classification Methods 367 10.2.1 Feature Extraction 367 10.2.2 KNN 367 10.2.3 Feature Selection 369 10.2.4 AdaBoost and EAdaBoost Algorithms 374 10.3 Preprocessing Method for GSI-CT Data 377 10.3.1 Data Acquisition for GSI-CT Data 377 10.3.2 Univariate Analysis 378 10.4 Classification Results For GSI-CT Data of Gastric Cancer 379 10.4.1 Experimental Results of mRMR-KNN 379 10.4.2 Experimental Results of SFS-KNN 383 10.4.3 Experimental Results of Metric Learning 385 10.4.4 Experiments Results of AdaBoost and EAdaBoost 385 10.4.5 Experiment Analysis 388 10.5 Conclusion and Future Work 388 Acknowledgment 388 References 388 PARTVI KNOWLEDGE-BASED SYSTEMS 393 11 The Use of Knowledge in Biomedical Image Analysis 395Florence Cloppet 11.1 Introduction 395 11.2 Data, Information, and Knowledge? 397 11.2.1 Data Versus Information 397 11.2.2 Knowledge Versus Information 398 11.3 What Kind of Information/Knowledge Can be Introduced? 399 11.4 How to Introduce Information in Computer Vision Systems? 400 11.4.1 Nature of Prior Information/Knowledge 402 11.4.2 Frameworks Allowing Prior Information Introduction 408 11.5 Conclusion 418 References 418 12 Active Shape Model for Contour Detection of Anatomical Structure 429Huiqi Li and Qing Nie 12.1 Introduction 429 12.2 Background 430 12.2.1 Free-Form Deformable Models 430 12.2.2 Parametrically Deformable Models 432 12.3 Methodology 434 12.3.1 Point Distribution Model 434 12.3.2 Active Shape Model (ASM) 436 12.3.3 A Modified ASM 438 12.4 Applications 440 12.4.1 Boundary Detection of Optic Disk 440 12.4.2 Lens Structure Detection 450 12.5 Summary 456 Acknowledgment 457 References 457 Index 463

Read more less

Book SynopsisElectromagnetic modeling is essential to the design and modeling of antenna, radar, satellite, medical imaging, and other applications. In Electromagnetic Modeling and Simulation, author Levent Sevgi explains techniques for solving real-time complex physical problems using MATLAB-based short scripts and comprehensive virtual tools.Table of ContentsPreface xvii About the Author xxvii Acknowledgments xxix 1 Introduction to MODSIM 1 1.1 Models and Modeling, 2 1.2 Validation, Verifi cation, and Calibration, 5 1.3 Available Core Models, 7 1.4 Model Selection Criteria, 9 1.5 Graduate Level EM MODSIM Course, 11 1.5.1 Course Description and Plan, 11 1.5.2 Available Virtual EM Tools, 12 1.6 EM-MODSIM Lecture Flow, 12 1.7 Two Level EM Guided Wave Lecture, 17 1.8 Conclusions, 19 References, 19 2 Engineers Speak with Numbers 23 2.1 Introduction, 23 2.2 Measurement, Calculation, and Error Analysis, 24 2.3 Significant Digits, Truncation, and Round-Off Errors, 27 2.4 Error Propagation, 28 2.5 Error and Confi dence Level, 29 2.5.1 Predicting the Population’s Confidence Interval, 33 2.6 Hypothesis Testing, 36 2.6.1 Testing Population Mean, 38 2.6.2 Testing Population Proportion, 39 2.6.3 Testing Two Population Averages, 39 2.6.4 Testing Two Population Proportions, 39 2.6.5 Testing Paired Data, 40 2.7 Hypothetical Tests on Cell Phones, 41 2.8 Conclusions, 45 References, 45 3 Numerical Analysis in Electromagnetics 47 3.1 Taylor’s Expansion and Numerical Differentiation, 47 3.1.1 Taylor’s Expansion and Ordinary Differential Equations, 50 3.1.2 Poisson and Laplace Equations, 52 3.1.3 An Iterative (Finite-Difference) Solution, 53 3.2 Numerical Integration, 58 3.2.1 Rectangular Method, 58 3.3 Nonlinear Equations and Root Search, 62 3.4 Linear Systems of Equations, 64 References, 69 4 Fourier Transform and Fourier Series 71 4.1 Introduction, 71 4.2 Fourier Transform, 72 4.2.1 Fourier Transform (FT), 72 4.2.2 Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT), 74 4.2.3 Fast Fourier Transform (FFT), 76 4.2.4 Aliasing, Spectral Leakage, and Scalloping Loss, 77 4.2.5 Windowing and Window Functions, 80 4.3 Basic Discretization Requirements, 81 4.4 Fourier Series Representation, 85 4.5 Rectangular Pulse and Its Harmonics, 92 4.6 Conclusions, 92 References, 94 5 Stochastic Modeling in Electromagnetics 95 5.1 Introduction, 95 5.2 Radar Signal Environment, 98 5.2.1 Random Number Generation, 98 5.2.2 Noise Generation, 101 5.2.3 Signal Generation, 108 5.2.4 Clutter Generation, 108 5.3 Total Radar Signal, 111 5.4 Decision Making and Detection, 114 5.4.1 Hypothesis Operating Characteristics (HOCs), 115 5.4.2 A Communication/Radar Receiver, 119 5.5 Conclusions, 129 References, 130 6 Electromagnetic Theory: Basic Review 133 6.1 Maxwell Equations and Reduction, 133 6.2 Waveguiding Structures, 134 6.3 Radiation Problems and Vector Potentials, 136 6.4 The Delta Dirac Function, 138 6.5 Coordinate Systems and Basic Operators, 139 6.6 The Point Source Representation, 141 6.7 Field Representation of a Point/Line Source, 142 6.8 Alternative Field Representations, 143 6.9 Transverse Electric/Magnetic Fields, 145 6.9.1 The 3D TE/TM Waves, 145 6.9.2 The 2D TE/TM Waves, 146 6.10 The TE/TM Source Injection, 151 6.11 Second-Order EM Differential Equations, 154 6.12 EM Wave–Transmission Line Analogy, 155 6.13 Time Dependence in Maxwell Equations, 157 6.14 Physical Fundamentals, 158 References, 158 7 Sturm–Liouville Equation: The Bridge between Eigenvalue and Green’s Function Problems 161 7.1 Introduction, 161 7.2 Guided Wave Scenarios, 162 7.3 The Sturm–Liouville Equation, 165 7.3.1 The Eigenvalue Problem, 167 7.3.2 The Green’s Function (GF) Problem, 168 7.3.3 Finite z-Domain Problem, 169 7.3.4 Infi nite z-Domain Problem, 170 7.3.5 Relation between Eigenvalue and Green’s Function Problems, 171 7.4 Conclusions, 172 References, 173 8 The 2D Nonpenetrable Parallel Plate Waveguide 175 8.1 Introduction, 176 8.2 Propagation Inside a 2D-PEC Parallel Plate Waveguide, 177 8.2.1 Formulation of the TE- and TM-Type Problems, 178 8.2.2 The Green’s Function Problem, 181 8.2.3 Accessing the Spectral Domain: Separation of Variables, 182 8.2.4 Spectral Representations: Eigenvalue Problems, 183 8.2.5 Spectral Representations: 1D Characteristic Green’s Functions, 184 8.2.6 The 2D Green’s Function Problem: Alternative Representations, 185 8.3 Alternative Representation: Eigenray Solution, 187 8.3.1 Relation between Eigenmode and Eigenray Representations, 191 8.3.2 2D GF and Hybrid Ray-Mode Decomposition, 192 8.4 A 2D-PEC Parallel Plate Waveguide Simulator, 194 8.4.1 Representations Used for Mode, Ray, and Hybrid Solutions, 195 8.4.2 MATLAB Packages: RayMode and Hybrid, 207 8.4.3 Numerical Examples, 210 8.5 Eigenvalue Extraction from Propagation Characteristics, 215 8.5.1 Longitudinal Correlation Function, 215 8.5.2 Numerical Illustrations, 217 8.6 Tilted Beam Excitation, 221 8.7 Conclusions, 223 References, 225 9 Wedge Waveguide with Nonpenetrable Boundaries 227 9.1 Introduction, 228 9.2 Statement of the Problem: Physical Configuration and Ray-Asymptotic Guided Wave Schematizations, 229 9.3 Source-Free Solutions, 230 9.3.1 Separable Coordinates: Conventional NM, 230 9.3.2 Weakly Nonseparable Coordinates: AM, 231 9.3.3 Uniformizing the AM Near Caustics: IM, 232 9.4 Test Problem: The 2D Line-Source-Excited Nonpenetrable Wedge Waveguide, 234 9.4.1 Exact Solution in Cylindrical Coordinate, 234 9.4.2 Approximate Solutions in Rectangular Coordinates, 241 9.4.3 IM Spectral Representation, 244 9.5 The MATLAB Package “WedgeGUIDE,” 247 9.6 Numerical Tests and Illustrations, 249 9.7 Conclusions, 256 Appendix 9A: Formation of the Spectral IM Integral in Section 9.3.3, 257 References, 262 10 High Frequency Asymptotics: The 2D Wedge Diffraction Problem 265 10.1 Introduction, 266 10.2 Plane Wave Illumination and HFA Models, 268 10.2.1 Exact Solution by Series Summation, 268 10.2.2 The Physical Optics (PO) Solution, 270 10.2.3 The PTD Solution, 272 10.2.4 The UTD Solution, 273 10.2.5 The Parabolic Equation (PE) Solution, 275 10.3 HFA Models under Line Source (LS) Excitations, 275 10.3.1 Exact Solution by Series Summation, 276 10.3.2 Exact Solution by Integral, 277 10.3.3 The Parabolic Equation (PE) Solution, 277 10.4 Basic MATLAB Scripts, 278 10.5 The WedgeGUI Virtual Tool and Some Examples, 291 10.6 Conclusions, 297 References, 298 11 Antennas: Isotropic Radiators and Beam Forming/Beam Steering 301 11.1 Introduction, 301 11.2 Arrays of Isotropic Radiators, 303 11.3 The ARRAY Package, 306 11.4 Beam Forming/Steering Examples, 310 11.5 Conclusions, 317 References, 318 12 Simple Propagation Models and Ray Solutions 319 12.1 Introduction, 320 12.2 Ray-Tracing Approaches, 321 12.3 A Ray-Shooting MATLAB Package, 323 12.4 Characteristic Examples, 329 12.5 Flat-Earth Problem and 2Ray Model, 333 12.6 Knife-Edge Problem and 4Ray Model, 338 12.7 Ray Plus Diffraction Models, 348 12.8 Conclusions, 351 References, 351 13 Method of Moments 353 13.1 Introduction, 353 13.2 Approximating a Periodic Function by Other Functions: Fourier Series Representation, 354 13.3 Introduction to the MoM, 359 13.4 Simple Applications of MoM, 361 13.4.1 An Ordinary Differential Equation, 361 13.4.2 The Parallel Plate Capacitor, 364 13.4.3 Propagation over PEC Flat Earth, 366 13.5 MoM Applied to Radiation and Scattering Problems, 372 13.5.1 A Complex Antenna Structure, 372 13.5.2 Ground Wave Propagation Modeling, 373 13.5.3 EM Scattering from Infinitely Long Cylinder, 376 13.5.4 3D RCS Modeling, 381 13.6 MoM Applied to Wedge Diffraction Problem, 386 13.7 MoM Applied to Wedge Waveguide Problem, 397 13.8 Conclusions, 402 References, 402 14 Finite-Difference Time-Domain Method 407 14.1 FDTD Representation of EM Plane Waves, 407 14.1.1 Maxwell Equations and Plane Waves, 408 14.1.2 FDTD and Discretization, 410 14.1.3 A One-Dimensional FDTD MATLAB Script, 417 14.1.4 MATLAB-Based FDTD1D Package, 417 14.2 Transmission Lines and Time-Domain Reflectometer, 429 14.2.1 Transmission Line (TL) Theory, 430 14.2.2 Plane Wave–Transmission Line Analogy, 434 14.2.3 FDTD Representation of TL Equations, 437 14.2.4 MATLAB-Based TDRMeter Package, 447 14.2.5 Fourier Analysis and Reflection Characteristics, 454 14.2.6 Laplace Analysis and Fault Identification, 456 14.2.7 Step Response, 464 14.3 1D FDTD with Second-Order Differential Equations, 468 14.4 Two-Dimensional (2D) FDTD Modeling, 472 14.4.1 Field Components and FDTD Equations, 476 14.4.2 FDTD-Based Virtual Tool: MGL2D Package, 477 14.4.3 Characteristic Examples, 479 14.5 Canonical 2D Wedge Scattering Problem, 494 14.5.1 Problem Postulation, 494 14.5.2 Review of Analytical Models, 496 14.5.3 The FDTD Model, 499 14.5.4 Discretization and Dey–Mittra Approach, 502 14.5.5 The WedgeFDTD Package and Examples, 505 14.5.6 Wedge Diffraction and FDTD versus MoM, 510 14.6 Conclusions, 512 References, 512 15 Parabolic Equation Method 515 15.1 Introduction, 516 15.2 The Parabolic Equation (PE) Model, 518 15.3 The Split-Step Parabolic Equation (SSPE) Propagation Tool, 520 15.4 The Finite Element Method-Based PE Propagation Tool, 528 15.5 Atmospheric Refractivity Effects, 531 15.6 A 2D Surface Duct Scenario and Reference Solutions, 533 15.7 LINPE Algorithm and Canonical Tests/Comparisons, 538 15.8 The GrSSPE Package, 558 15.9 The Single-Knife-Edge Problem, 566 15.10 Accurate Source Modeling, 571 15.11 Dielectric Slab Waveguide, 580 15.11.1 Even and Odd Symmetric Solutions, 582 15.11.2 The SSPE Propagator and Eigenvalue Extraction, 584 15.11.3 The Matlab-Based DiSLAB Package, 585 15.12 Conclusions, 591 References, 591 16 Parallel Plate Waveguide Problem 595 16.1 Introduction, 595 16.2 Problem Postulation and Analytical Solutions: Revisited, 599 16.2.1 Green’s Function in Terms of Mode Summation, 602 16.2.2 Mode Summation for a Tilted/Directive Antenna, 604 16.2.3 Eigenray Representation, 606 16.2.4 Hybrid Ray + Image Method, 613 16.3 Numerical Models, 613 16.3.1 Split Step Parabolic Equation Model, 613 16.3.2 Finite-Difference Time-Domain Model, 617 16.3.3 Method of Moments (MoM), 622 16.4 Conclusions, 638 References, 639 Appendix A Introduction to MATLAB 643 Appendix B Suggested References 653 Appendix C Suggested Tutorials and Feature Articles 655 Index 659

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe acute energy problems facing China today are characterized by their own histories and realities. Some have come about because of China's energy endowment and stage of development, while others have been created by a combination of domestic and global factors.Trade ReviewPraise for Electric Power and Energy in China: “The Broad Energy Outlook approach tries to place the complex Chinese energy problem in a multi-angled and global prospective so that China will stop struggling within its narrowly defined and inward-looking supply-demand rigidity on energy. Overall, I find Electric Power and Energy in China an excellent book with significant academic value. It provides an essential reference for academics, policy makers and students who have a strong interest in China’s economy and energy development. The data included in this book and Liu’s personal experiences and expertise as chairman of China’s, and indeed the world’s, largest electricity distribution company are highly informative and valuable for both insiders and outsiders of the Chinese energy and electricity industries.” – Shujie Yao, Head of School of Contemporary Chinese Studies, Professor of Economics and Chinese Sustainable Development, University of Nottingham “Zhenya Liu’s Electric Power and Energy in China points out that the main challenges in China today are in meeting the growing energy demand of a large population in a fast growing, emerging economy. The current main source of energy supply in the country is coal, however, all technologies are needed to secure an adequate supply of energy. Accordingly, Liu does not focus on one technology; he provides an overview of Chinese perspectives on all available options. Electric Power and Energy in China gives an interesting insight into the Chinese energy challenge and the energy system – not from an outsider’s perspective but from the core. As head of China’s Energy Commission, Zhenya Liu knows what he is writing about. The book is valuable not only from an energy economics perspective but also because it gives a comprehensive overview of the Chinese energy system and its economic policies.” – Dr. Hubertus Bardt, Cologne Institute for Economic ResearchTable of ContentsAbout the Author xi Preface xiii 1 Energy: An Overview 1 1.1 An Overview of the World’s Energy Situation 1 1.1.1 The Global Energy Situation 1 1.1.2 Characteristics of the Global Energy Situation 8 1.2 An Overview of China’s Energy Situation 17 1.2.1 Energy Endowment 17 1.2.2 Energy Production 19 1.2.3 Energy Consumption 23 1.2.4 International Energy Cooperation 26 1.3 Major Energy Problems that China Faces 28 1.3.1 The Problem of Sustained Supply 28 1.3.2 The Problem of Transport and Allocation 35 1.3.3 The Quality Problem of Development 37 1.4 Causes that Affect China’s Energy Development 41 1.4.1 The Economic Development Model 41 1.4.2 The Energy Development Model 42 1.4.3 The Global Competitive Environment 43 2 Strategic Thinking on Energy 45 2.1 Basic Thinking Behind the Energy Solution 45 2.1.1 Complexity of the Energy Problem 45 2.1.2 Grand Energy Vision 47 2.1.3 Solutions to the Energy Problems 47 2.2 The Way to Change the Mode of Energy Development 51 2.2.1 Transformation Phase of China’s Energy Strategy 52 2.2.2 The Way to Change the Mode of Energy Development 55 2.3 The Central Link in the Energy Strategy 58 2.3.1 The Position of Electricity in the Energy Strategy 59 2.3.2 The Significance of an Electricity-centred Energy Strategy 60 2.4 The ‘One Ultra Four Large’ (1U4L) Strategy 65 2.4.1 The Core Mission of Electric Power Development 66 2.4.2 The Need to Implement the 1U4L Strategy 66 2.4.3 The Key to Implementing the 1U4L Strategy 69 3 Energy Exploration and Utilisation 73 3.1 General Thinking Behind Energy Exploration and Utilisation 73 3.1.1 Main Problems in Energy Exploration and Utilisation 73 3.1.2 Principles of Energy Exploration and Utilisation 76 3.1.3 Focus of Energy Exploration and Utilisation 77 3.2 The Exploitation and Utilisation of Coal Resources 79 3.2.1 Coordinated Planning of the Exploitation and Utilisation of Coal Resources 79 3.2.2 Construction of Large Coal-fired Power Bases in the West and North 81 3.2.3 The Clean and Integrated Utilisation of Coal 89 3.2.4 Scientifically Developing the Coal Chemical Industry 93 3.3 The Exploitation and Utilisation of Hydropower Resources 94 3.3.1 Construction of Large-scale Hydropower Bases 94 3.3.2 Development of Small Hydropower 99 3.3.3 Planning and Construction of Pumped Storage Power Plants 100 3.3.4 Environmental Protection and Migrant Relocation 102 3.4 The Exploitation and Utilisation of Nuclear Power 104 3.4.1 Construction of Large-scale Nuclear Power Base 104 3.4.2 Advancement of Nuclear Power Technology 105 3.4.3 Building up a Nuclear Energy Safety System 106 3.4.4 Supply of Nuclear Fuel 107 3.5 The Exploitation and Utilisation of New and Renewable Energies 108 3.5.1 Building Large-scale Renewable Energy Power Bases 109 3.5.2 Various Forms of Renewable Energy Development 117 3.5.3 Distributed Energy Development 119 3.5.4 Exploitation and Utilisation of New Energy 122 3.6 The Exploitation and Utilisation of Oil and Gas 125 3.6.1 Exploration and Development of Oil Resources 126 3.6.2 Exploitation and Utilisation of Natural Gas Resources 128 3.7 The Exploitation and Utilisation of Overseas Energy Resources 131 3.7.1 Development and Import of Overseas Oil and Gas Resources 131 3.7.2 Import of Overseas Coal and Electricity 135 4 Energy Transport and Allocation 137 4.1 Modern Comprehensive Energy Transport System 137 4.1.1 The Significance of Establishing a Modern Comprehensive Energy Transport System 139 4.1.2 The Guiding Principles for Developing a Modern Comprehensive Transport System for Energy 141 4.2 Optimisation of the Modes of Coal Transport 143 4.2.1 The Present Situation of Coal Transport 144 4.2.2 The Future Coal Transport Patterns 150 4.2.3 Equal Emphasis on Coal Transport and Power Transmission 151 4.3 Strong and Smart Grid Development 159 4.3.1 Overview of Power Grid Development 159 4.3.2 The Future Landscape of Power Flows 164 4.3.3 The Thinking Behind SSG Development 167 4.3.4 Development of UHV Grids and Grids of All Levels 170 4.3.5 R&D and Application of Grid Technology 183 4.4 Construction of UHV Synchronous Grids in Northern, Eastern and Central China 186 4.4.1 Development of Large Synchronous Grids in Overseas Countries 187 4.4.2 The Necessity of Building UHV Synchronous Power Grids in Northern, Eastern and Central China 189 4.4.3 Safety of UHV Synchronous Grids in Northern, Eastern and Central China 190 4.5 Smart Grid Development 192 4.5.1 The Essence and Features of Smart Grids 193 4.5.2 Strategic Significance of Smart Grids 193 4.5.3 The Priorities and Practices of Smart Grid Development 195 4.5.4 The Development Principles of Smart Grids 204 4.6 Oil and Gas Pipeline Networks 206 4.6.1 Present Situation of Oil and Gas Pipeline Networks 206 4.6.2 The Main Problems of Oil and Gas Pipeline Networks 208 4.6.3 The Basic Thinking Behind the Development of Oil and Gas Pipeline Networks 210 5 Terminal Energy Consumption 213 5.1 Model of Green Energy Consumption 213 5.1.1 Challenges for Energy Consumption 213 5.1.2 Establishment of a Green Energy Consumption Model 215 5.2 Energy Conservation as a Strategic Priority 217 5.2.1 Thinking behind Energy Conservation as a Strategic Priority 218 5.2.2 Focus Areas of Energy Conservation as Strategic Priority 219 5.2.3 Implementing Measures to Ensure Strategic Priority of Energy Efficiency 225 5.3 Electrification in Socioeconomic Development 228 5.3.1 Substitution of Electric Energy in Terminal Energy Consumption 228 5.3.2 Electrification in the Industrial Sector 231 5.3.3 Electrification in the Transport Sector 232 5.3.4 Electrification for Businesses and Urban Population 233 5.3.5 Rural Electrification 235 5.4 Development of Electric Vehicles 236 5.4.1 Important Implications of Electric Vehicle Development 237 5.4.2 Key Areas of Electric Vehicle Development 238 5.4.3 EV Energy Supply Model 241 5.4.4 Policies Supporting the Development of Electric Vehicles 244 6 Energy Market 247 6.1 Overview and Development Ideas in Respect of the Energy Market 247 6.1.1 Overview of Energy Market Development 248 6.1.2 Basic Thinking Behind Energy Marketisation 250 6.2 The Building of Coal Market 251 6.2.1 Management of Coal Market Order 251 6.2.2 Coal Market Trading 254 6.2.3 Regulation of the Coal Market 255 6.3 Establishment of an Electricity Market 257 6.3.1 Reform of International Electricity Market 258 6.3.2 The Principles for China’s Electricity Market Reform 261 6.3.3 Ideas on Building an Electricity Market System in China 263 6.3.4 The Tariff System and Building of Tariff Pricing Mechanism 267 6.4 Development of Pricing Mechanism for Oil and Gas 274 6.4.1 Reform of Pricing Mechanism for Refined Products 274 6.4.2 Natural Gas Pricing Reform 276 6.4.3 The Bargaining Power in International Oil and Gas Pricing 280 6.5 Regulation of Energy Markets 282 6.5.1 Building a Big Energy Regulatory Framework 282 6.5.2 The Thinking Behind Energy Market Regulation 285 6.5.3 Building Support System for Energy Market 287 7 Energy Early Warning and Emergency Response 289 7.1 Importance of Building Capacity for Energy Early Warning and Emergency Response 289 7.1.1 Risks Posed to Energy Security 289 7.1.2 Significance of Strengthening the Building of Energy Early Warning and Emergency Response 293 7.2 Energy Early Warning Mechanism 294 7.2.1 Focus of Energy Early Warning 295 7.2.2 Organisational Structure and Management System of Energy Early Warning 300 7.3 Energy Emergency Response System 302 7.3.1 Organisational and Management Structure of Energy Emergency Response 302 7.3.2 Emergency Response Programmes for Energy Emergencies 302 7.3.3 Supplies Reserves for Energy Emergency Response 303 7.3.4 Energy Emergency Response Publicity Campaign and Emergency Drills 305 7.3.5 Scientific Management of Energy Emergency Response 307 7.4 Energy Reserves 310 7.4.1 Present Situation of Energy Reserves in China 310 7.4.2 Experience in International Energy Reserves 312 7.4.3 The Thinking Behind Building Energy Reserves in China 314 8 Innovation in Energy Technology 321 8.1 The Situation of Energy Technology Innovation 321 8.1.1 Technology Innovations in International Energy Sector 321 8.1.2 The Situation of Energy Technology Innovation in China 324 8.2 Principles and Focuses of Energy Technology Innovation 327 8.2.1 The Fundamental Principle of Energy Technology Innovation 328 8.2.2 Focus Areas of Energy Technology Innovation 329 8.2.3 The Goal of Energy Technology Innovation 333 8.3 Development of System for Energy Technology Innovation 334 8.3.1 Integration of Resources of Energy Technology Innovation 334 8.3.2 Development of Mechanism for Energy Technology Innovation 335 8.3.3 Building Talent Team in Energy Technology Innovation 337 8.3.4 Innovation Strategy for Energy Technology 338 9 Ensuring Energy Sustainability 341 9.1 Energy Laws, Regulations and Policies 341 9.1.1 Establishment of a Legal Regime for Energy 341 9.1.2 Policy Guidance and Assurance 345 9.2 Establishment of an Energy Standards System 350 9.2.1 The Significance of Establishing an Energy Standards System 350 9.2.2 Formulation of Energy Standards 352 9.2.3 Bargaining Power over Development of International Energy Standards 354 9.3 Large Energy Groups 355 9.3.1 Significance of Developing Large Energy Groups 356 9.3.2 Supporting the Development of Large Energy Groups 361 9.3.3 Market Position of Large Energy Groups 366 9.3.4 Social Responsibilities of Large Energy Groups 368 References 371 Postscript 375 Index 379

Read more less

Book SynopsisMicrogrids are the most innovative area in the electric power industry today. Future microgrids could exist as energy-balanced cells within existing power distribution grids or stand-alone power networks within small communities.Table of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv List of Contributors xix 1 The Microgrids Concept 1Christine Schwaegerl and Liang Tao 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 The Microgrid Concept as a Means to Integrate Distributed Generation 3 1.3 Clarification of the Microgrid Concept 4 1.4 Operation and Control of Microgrids 8 1.5 Market Models for Microgrids 12 1.6 Status Quo and Outlook of Microgrid Applications 22 2 Microgrids Control Issues 25Aris Dimeas, Antonis Tsikalakis, George Kariniotakis and George Korres 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Control Functions 25 2.3 The Role of Information and Communication Technology 27 2.4 Microgrid Control Architecture 28 2.5 Centralized and Decentralized Control 32 2.6 Forecasting 35 2.7 Centralized Control 40 2.8 Decentralized Control 51 2.9 State Estimation 72 2.10 Conclusions 76 3 Intelligent Local Controllers 81Thomas Degner, Nikos Soultani, Alfred Engler and Asier Gil de Muro 3.1 Introduction 81 3.2 Inverter Control Issues in the Formation of Microgrids 82 3.4 Implications of Line Parameters on Frequency and Voltage Droop Concepts 92 3.5 Development and Evaluation of Innovative Local Controls to Improve Stability 98 3.6 Conclusions 115 4 Microgrid Protection 117Alexander Oudalov, Thomas Degner, Frank van Overbeeke and Jose Miguel Yarza 4.1 Introduction 117 4.2 Challenges for Microgrid Protection 118 4.3 Adaptive Protection for Microgrids 125 4.4 Fault Current Source for Effective Protection in Islanded Operation 146 4.5 Fault Current Limitation in Microgrids 151 4.6 Conclusions 154 5 Operation of Multi-Microgrids 165Joao Abel PeScas Lopes, Andre Madureira, Nuno Gil and Fernanda Resende 5.1 Introduction 165 5.2 Multi-Microgrid Control and Management Architecture 167 5.3 Coordinated Voltage/var Support 169 5.4 Coordinated Frequency Control 178 5.5 Emergency Functions (Black Start) 186 5.6 Dynamic Equivalents 192 5.7 Conclusions 202 6 Pilot Sites: Success Stories and Learnt Lessons 206George Kariniotakis, Aris Dimeas and Frank Van Overbeeke (Sections 6.1, 6.2) 6.1 Introduction 206 6.2 Overview of Microgrid Projects in Europe 206 6.3 Overview of Microgrid Projects in the USA 231John Romankiewicz, Chris Marnay (Section 6.3) 6.4 Overview of Japanese Microgrid Projects 249Satoshi Morozumi (Section 6.4) 6.5 Overview of Microgrid Projects in China 262Meiqin Mao (Section 6.5) 6.6 An Off-Grid Microgrid in Chile 270Rodrigo Palma Behnke and Guillermo Jimenez-Estevez (Section 6.6) 7 Quantification of Technical, Economic, Environmental and Social Benefits of Microgrid Operation 275Christine Schwaegerl and Liang Tao 7.1 Introduction and Overview of Potential Microgrid Benefits 275 7.2 Setup of Benefit Quantification Study 278 7.3 Quantification of Microgrids Benefits under Standard Test Conditions 285 7.4 Impact of External Market Prices and Pricing Policies 296 7.5 Impact of Microgrid Operation Strategy 303 7.6 Extension to European Scale 307 7.7 Conclusions 310 References 313 Index 315

Read more less

Book SynopsisAs broadcasting gives way to the digital media age, the study of audiences faces unprecedented challenges. Digital media have dramatically increased the nature and the diversity in how people can position themselves in relation to media content, and the study of audiences is shifting and changing accordingly.Trade Review“This book offers helpful background readings for media research courses. Summing up: recommended.”-ChoiceTable of ContentsNotes on Contributors viii Series Editor's Preface xiv Acknowledgments xv Introduction 1 Virginia Nightingale Part I Being Audiences 17 1 Readers as Audiences 19 Wendy Griswold, Elizabeth Lenaghan, and Michelle Naffziger 2 Listening for Listeners: The Work of Arranging How Listening Will Occur in Cultures of Recorded Sound 41 Jackie Cook 3 Viewing 62 Shawn Shimpach 4 Search and Social Media 86 Virginia Nightingale 5 Spreadable Media: How Audiences Create Value and Meaning in a Networked Economy 109 Joshua Green and Henry Jenkins 6 Going Mobile 128 Gerard Goggin Part II Theorizing Audiences 147 7 Audiences and Publics, Media and Public Spheres 149 Richard Butsch 8 The Implied Audience of Communications Policy Making: Regulating Media in the Interests of Citizens and Consumers 169 Sonia Livingstone and Peter Lunt 9 New Configurations of the Audience? The Challenges of User-Generated Content for Audience Theory and Media Participation 190 Nico Carpentier 10 The Necessary Future of the Audience … and How to Research It 213 Nick Couldry 11 Reception 230 Cornel Sandvoss 12 Affect Theory and Audience 251 Anna Gibbs Part III Researching Audiences 267 13 Toward a Branded Audience: On the Dialectic between Marketing and Consumer Agency 269 Adam Arvidsson 14 Ratings and Audience Measurement 286 Philip M. Napoli 15 Quantitative Audience Research: Embracing the Poor Relation 302 David Deacon and Emily Keightley 16 Media Effects in Context 320 Brian O’Neill 17 Cultivation Analysis and Media Violence 340 Andy Ruddock 18 Creative and Visual Methods in Audience Research 360 Fatimah Awan and David Gauntlett 19 Locating Media Ethnography 380 Patrick D. Murphy Part IV Doing Audience Research 403 20 Children’s Media Cultures in Comparative Perspective 405 Sonia Livingstone and Kirsten Drotner 21 Fan Cultures and Fan Communities 425 Kristina Busse and Jonathan Gray 22 Beyond the Presumption of Identity? Ethnicities, Cultures, and Transnational Audiences 444 Mirca Madianou 23 Participatory Vision: Watching Movies with Yolngu 459 Jennifer Deger 24 The Audience Is the Show 472 Annette Hill 25 Seeking the Audience for News: Response, News Talk, and Everyday Practices 489 S. Elizabeth Bird 26 Sport and Its Audiences 509 David Rowe Index 527

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn original look from a microeconomic perspective for power system optimization and its application to electricity markets Presents a new and systematic viewpoint for power system optimization inspired by microeconomics and game theory A timely and important advanced reference with the fast growth of smart grids Professor Chen is a pioneer of applying experimental economics to the electricity market trading mechanism, and this work brings together the latest research A companion website is available Edit Table of ContentsForeword xvii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxv List of Figures xxvii List of Tables xxxi Acronyms xxxv Symbols xxxix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Power System Optimal Planning 2 1.1.1 Generation Expansion Planning 3 1.1.2 Transmission Expansion Planning 5 1.1.3 Distribution System Planning 7 1.2 Power System Optimal Operation 8 1.2.1 Unit Commitment and Hydrothermal Scheduling 8 1.2.2 Economic Dispatch 12 1.2.3 Optimal Load Flow 14 1.3 Power System Reactive Power Optimization 16 1.4 Optimization in Electricity Markets 18 1.4.1 Strategic Participants’ Bids 18 1.4.2 Market Clearing Model 20 1.4.3 Market Equilibrium Problem 21 2 Theories and Approaches of Large-Scale Complex Systems Optimization 22 2.1 Basic Theories of Large-scale Complex Systems 23 2.1.1 Hierarchical Structures of Large-scale Complex Systems 24 2.1.2 Basic Principles of Coordination 27 2.1.3 Decomposition and Coordination of Large-scale Systems 28 2.2 Hierarchical Optimization Approaches 30 2.3 Lagrangian Relaxation Method 36 2.4 Cooperative Coevolutionary Approach for Large-scale Complex System Optimization 40 2.4.1 Framework of Cooperative Coevolution 41 2.4.2 Cooperative Coevolutionary Genetic Algorithms and the Numerical Experiments 43 2.4.3 Basic Theories of CCA 45 2.4.4 CCA’s Potential Applications in Power Systems 46 3 Optimization Approaches in Microeconomics and Game Theory 49 3.1 General Equilibrium Theory 51 3.1.1 Basic Model of a Competitive Economy 52 3.1.2 Walrasian Equilibrium 53 3.1.3 First and Second Fundamental Theorems of Welfare Economics 54 3.2 Noncooperative Game Theory 55 3.2.1 Representation of Games 55 3.2.2 Existence of Equilibrium 60 3.3 Mechanism Design 61 3.3.1 Principles of Mechanism Design 61 3.3.2 Optimization of a Single Commodity Auction 63 3.4 Duality Principle and Its Economic Implications 66 3.4.1 Economic Implication of Linear Programming Duality 66 3.4.2 Economic Implication of Duality in Nonlinear Programming 68 3.4.3 Economic Implication of Lagrangian Relaxation Method 71 4 Power System Planning 76 4.1 Generation Planning Based on Lagrangian Relaxation Method 76 4.1.1 Problem Formulation 78 4.1.2 Lagrangian Relaxation for Generation Investment Decision 80 4.1.3 Probabilistic Production Simulation 85 4.1.4 Example 87 4.1.5 Summary 91 4.2 Transmission Planning Based on Improved Genetic Algorithm 91 4.2.1 Mathematical Model 93 4.2.2 Improvements of Genetic Algorithm 95 4.2.3 Example 96 4.2.4 Summary 101 4.3 Transmission Planning Based on Ordinal Optimization 103 4.3.1 Introduction 103 4.3.2 Transmission Expansion Planning Problem 104 4.3.3 Ordinal Optimization 107 4.3.4 Crude Model for Transmission Planning Problem 111 4.3.5 Example 112 4.3.6 Summary 120 4.4 Integrated Planning of Distribution Systems Based on Hybrid Intelligent Algorithm 121 4.4.1 Mathematical Model of Integrated Planning Based on DG and DSR 122 4.4.2 Hybrid Intelligent Algorithm 124 4.4.3 Example 125 4.4.4 Summary 129 5 Power System Operation 131 5.1 Unit Commitment Based on Cooperative Coevolutionary Algorithm 131 5.1.1 Problem Formulation 132 5.1.2 Cooperative Coevolutionary Algorithm 133 5.1.3 Form Primal Feasible Solution Based on the Dual Results 138 5.1.4 Dynamic Economic Dispatch 140 5.1.5 Example 146 5.1.6 Summary 148 5.2 Security-Constrained Unit Commitment with Wind Power Integration Based on Mixed Integer Programming 149 5.2.1 Suitable SCUC Model for MIP 151 5.2.2 Selection of St and the Significance of Extreme Scenarios 154 5.2.3 Example 156 5.2.4 Summary 160 5.3 Optimal Power Flow with Discrete Variables Based on Hybrid Intelligent Algorithm 160 5.3.1 Formulation of OPF Problem 162 5.3.2 Modern Interior Point Algorithm (MIP) 163 5.3.3 Genetic Algorithm with Annealing Selection (AGA) 167 5.3.4 Flow of Presented Algorithm 169 5.3.5 Example 169 5.3.6 Summary 172 5.4 Optimal Power Flow with Discrete Variables Based on Interior Point Cutting Plane Method 173 5.4.1 IPCPM and Its Analysis 175 5.4.2 Improvement of IPCPM 180 5.4.3 Example 185 5.4.4 Summary 187 6 Power System Reactive Power Optimization 189 6.1 Space Decoupling for Reactive Power Optimization 189 6.1.1 Multi-agent System-based Volt/VAR Control 190 6.1.2 Coordination Optimization Method 193 6.2 Time Decoupling for Reactive Power Optimization 198 6.2.1 Cost Model of Adjusting the Control Devices of Volt/VAR Control 202 6.2.2 Time-Decoupling Model for Reactive Power Optimization Based upon Cost of Adjusting the Control Devices 207 6.3 Game Theory Model of Multi-agent Volt/VAR Control 215 6.3.1 Game Mechanism of Volt/VAR Control During Multi-level Power Dispatch 217 6.3.2 Payoff Function Modeling of Multi-agent Volt/VAR Control 224 6.4 Volt/VAR Control in Distribution Systems Using an Approach Based on Time Interval 231 6.4.1 Problem Formulation 233 6.4.2 Load Level Division 234 6.4.3 Optimal Dispatch of OLTC and Capacitors Using Genetic Algorithm 236 6.4.4 Example 238 6.4.5 Summary 244 7 Modeling and Analysis of Electricity Markets 247 7.1 Oligopolistic Electricity Market Analysis Based on Coevolutionary Computation 247 7.1.1 Market Model Formulation 249 7.1.2 Electricity Market Analysis Based on Coevolutionary Computation 252 7.1.3 Example 258 7.1.4 Summary 265 7.2 Supply Function Equilibrium Analysis Based on Coevolutionary Computation 265 7.2.1 Market Model Formulation 267 7.2.2 Coevolutionary Approach to Analyzing SFE Model 271 7.2.3 Example 273 7.2.4 Summary 283 7.3 Searching for Electricity Market Equilibrium with Complex Constraints Using Coevolutionary Approach 284 7.3.1 Market Model Formulation 286 7.3.2 Coevolutionary Computation 290 7.3.3 Example 292 7.3.4 Summary 301 7.4 Analyzing Two-Settlement Electricity Market Equilibrium by Coevolutionary Computation Approach 301 7.4.1 Market Model Formulation 303 7.4.2 Coevolutionary Approach to Analyzing Market Model 307 7.4.3 Example 309 7.4.4 Summary 318 8 Future Developments 319 8.1 New Factors in Power System Optimization 320 8.1.1 Planning and Investment Decision Under New Paradigm 320 8.1.2 Scheduling/Dispatch of Renewable Energy Sources 321 8.1.3 Energy Storage Problems 322 8.1.4 Environmental Impact 323 8.1.5 Novel Electricity Market 323 8.2 Challenges and Possible Solutions in Power System Optimization 324 Appendix 328 A.1 Header File 328 A.2 Species Class 329 A.3 Ecosystem Class 335 A.4 Main Function 336 References 338 Index 353

Read more less

Book SynopsisA generic DC grid model that is compatible with the standard AC system stability model is presented and used to analyse the interaction between the DC grid and the host AC systems. A multi-terminal DC (MTDC) grid interconnecting multiple AC systems and offshore energy sources (e.g. wind farms) across the nations and continents would allow effective sharing of intermittent renewable resources and open market operation for secure and cost-effective supply of electricity. However, such DC grids are unprecedented with no operational experience. Despite lots of discussions and specific visions for setting up such MTDC grids particularly in Europe, none has yet been realized in practice due to two major technical barriers: Lack of proper understanding about the interaction between a MTDC grid and the surrounding AC systems. Commercial unavailability of efficient DC side fault current interruption technology for conventional voltage sourced converTable of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv Acronyms xix Symbols xxi 1 Fundamentals 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Rationale Behind MTDC Grids 5 1.3 Network Architectures of MTDC Grids 6 1.3.1 Series Architecture 6 1.3.2 Parallel Architecture 7 1.4 Enabling Technologies and Components of MTDC Grids 9 1.4.1 LCC Technology 9 1.4.1.1 Control Modes in LCC-based MTDC Grid 10 1.4.1.2 Examples of Existing LCC MTDC Systems 10 1.4.2 VSC Technology 12 1.5 Control Modes in MTDC Grid 14 1.6 Challenges for MTDC Grids 15 1.7 Configurations of MTDC Converter Stations 16 1.8 Research Initiatives on MTDC Grids 19 1.9 Focus and Scope of the Monograph 21 2 The Voltage-Sourced Converter (VSC) 23 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 Ideal Voltage-Sourced Converter 24 2.3 Practical Voltage-Sourced Converter 28 2.3.1 Two-Level Voltage-Sourced Converter 28 2.3.2 Three-Level Voltage-Sourced Converter 31 2.3.3 Multi-Level Voltage-Sourced Converter 35 2.4 Control 38 2.4.1 Control of Real and Reactive Powers 38 2.4.2 Design and Implementation of Control 39 2.4.2.1 Space Phasors 39 2.4.2.2 Space-Phasor Representation of the AC Side 42 2.4.2.3 Current Control in the Stationary Frame 43 2.4.2.4 Current Control in a Rotating Frame 44 2.4.2.5 Phase-Locked Loop 52 2.4.3 Control of the DC-Side Voltage 56 2.4.4 Control of the AC Grid Voltage 58 2.4.5 Multi-unit Control of DC Grid Voltage and/or AC Grid Voltage 59 2.4.6 Control of Islands 61 2.5 Simulation 65 2.6 Symbols of the VSC 75 3 Modeling, Analysis, and Simulation of AC–MTDC Grids 77 3.1 Introduction 77 3.2 MTDC Grid Model 78 3.2.1 Modeling Assumptions 78 3.2.2 Converter Model 81 3.2.3 Converter Controller Model 83 3.2.3.1 Outer Control Loops 83 3.2.3.2 Inner Current Control Loop 87 3.2.4 DC Network Model 87 3.2.4.1 Algebraic Equations 89 3.2.4.2 Differential Equations 91 3.2.5 State-Space Representation 91 3.2.5.1 Dynamic Equations of Converters and Controllers 92 3.2.5.2 Output Equations 93 3.2.5.3 Control Modes 93 3.2.5.4 Dynamic Equations of DC Network 95 3.2.5.5 Output Equations of DC Network 96 3.2.6 Phasor from Space Phasor 96 3.2.6.1 Base Values and Per-unit Systems 97 3.2.6.2 Phase Angle of Space Phasors 97 3.3 AC Grid Model 98 3.3.1 Generator Model 99 3.3.1.1 State-Space Representation of Synchronous Generator (SG) Model 99 3.3.1.2 Inclusion of Generator in the Network 101 3.3.1.3 Treatment of Sub-transient Saliency 102 3.3.1.4 State-Space Model of Excitation Systems for SGs 104 3.3.1.5 State-Space Model of Turbine and Governor 104 3.3.2 Load Model 105 3.3.3 AC Network Model 106 3.4 AC–MTDC Load flow Analysis 108 3.4.1 AC Grid Load flow Model 109 3.4.2 MTDC Grid Load flow Model 110 3.4.2.1 MTDC Interface with AC System 110 3.4.2.2 MTDC AC Side Load flow Model 110 3.4.2.3 Interface of MTDC AC and DC Sides 111 3.4.2.4 MTDC DC Side Load flow Model 112 3.4.2.5 MTDC Converter Control Modes 112 3.4.3 AC–MTDC Grid Load flow Solution 114 3.5 AC–MTDC Grid Model for Nonlinear Dynamic Simulation 120 3.5.1 Initialization of Dynamic Models 121 3.5.1.1 MTDC Grid 122 3.5.1.2 AC Grid 122 3.6 Small-signal Stability Analysis of AC–MTDC Grid 122 3.6.1 Linear Model of Converters and Controllers 123 3.6.2 Linear Model of DC Network 128 3.6.3 Eigenvalue, Eigenvector, and Participation Factor 130 3.7 Transient Stability Analysis of AC–MTDC Grid 130 3.7.1 Large Disturbance Simulation 131 3.7.2 Representation of Rotor and Phase Angles 132 3.8 Case Studies 132 3.9 Case Study 1: The North Sea Benchmark System 133 3.9.1 Study Network 133 3.9.2 Nonlinear Simulation 134 3.9.2.1 Small Disturbances 134 3.9.2.2 Converter Outage 135 3.9.3 Small-signal Stability Analysis 137 3.9.3.1 Eigenvalue Analysis 137 3.9.3.2 Participation Factor Analysis 138 3.10 Case Study 2: MTDC Grid Connected to Equivalent AC Systems 139 3.10.1 Study Network 139 3.10.2 Nonlinear Simulation 140 3.10.2.1 Small Disturbances 142 3.10.2.2 Large Disturbances 142 3.10.3 Small-signal Stability Analysis 142 3.11 Case Study 3: MTDC Grid Connected to Multi-machine AC System 143 3.11.1 Study Network 143 3.11.2 AC–MTDC Grid Load flow Solution 145 3.11.3 Small-signal Stability Analysis 146 3.11.4 Nonlinear Simulation 147 3.11.4.1 AC Side Fault 147 3.11.4.2 DC Cable Fault 148 3.11.4.3 Converter Outage 150 4 Autonomous Power Sharing 153 4.1 Introduction 153 4.2 Steady-state Operating Characteristics 156 4.3 Concept of Power Sharing 157 4.3.1 Power Sharing Among Synchronous Generators 157 4.3.2 Power Sharing in AC Microgrids 158 4.4 Power Sharing in MTDC Grid 159 4.4.1 Voltage Margin Control 159 4.4.2 Droop Control 162 4.4.2.1 Ratio and Priority Control 166 4.4.3 Adaptive Droop Control 167 4.5 AC–MTDC Grid Load flow Solution 168 4.6 Post-contingency Operation 169 4.6.1 Local DC Link Voltage Feedback 170 4.6.2 Common DC Link Voltage Feedback 171 4.6.3 Adaptive Droop Control 172 4.7 Linear Model 173 4.8 Case Study 174 4.8.1 Study Network 174 4.8.2 Small-signal Stability Analysis 175 4.8.3 Nonlinear Simulation 177 4.8.3.1 Validation Against Switched Model 177 4.8.3.2 Problems with Local Voltage Feedback 178 4.8.3.3 Fixed vs Adaptive Droop 179 5 Frequency Support 187 5.1 Introduction 187 5.2 Fundamentals of Frequency Control 189 5.3 Inertial and Primary Frequency Support from Wind Farms 190 5.4 Wind Farms in Secondary Frequency Control (AGC) 191 5.5 Modified Droop Control for Frequency Support 192 5.6 AC–MTDC Load Flow Solution 194 5.7 Post-Contingency Operation 195 5.7.1 Analysis for AC System 196 5.7.2 Analysis for Converter Station 196 5.7.2.1 AC Side Disturbances 197 5.7.2.2 Converter Outage 197 5.7.3 Analysis for AC System Connected to Converter Stations 198 5.7.4 Analysis of AC–MTDC Grid 199 5.8 Case Study 200 5.8.1 Study Network 200 5.8.2 AC–MTDC Grid Load flow Solution 202 5.8.3 Small-signal Stability Analysis 203 5.8.4 Nonlinear Simulation 204 5.8.4.1 AC Side Disturbances 204 5.8.4.2 Converter Station Disturbances 212 6 Protection of MTDC Grids 219 6.1 Introduction 219 6.2 Converter Station Protection 220 6.3 DC Cable Fault Response 220 6.3.1 Fault Response of Two-level VSC 221 6.3.1.1 Analysis 224 6.3.2 Fault Response of Half-bridge mmc 225 6.3.3 Challenges 227 6.4 Fault-blocking Converters 228 6.4.1 Full-bridge mmc 228 6.4.2 Variants of Full-bridge mmc 230 6.5 DC Circuit Breakers 231 6.5.1 Solid-state DC Breaker 232 6.5.2 Proactive Hybrid DC Breaker 233 6.5.3 DC/DC Converter 235 6.6 Protection Strategies 237 6.6.1 Strategy I 238 6.6.2 Strategy II 240 6.6.3 Strategy III 241 6.6.3.1 Detection and Identification 241 6.6.4 Backup Protection 245 References 249 Index 257

Read more less

Book SynopsisUnderstanding transient phenomena in electric power systems and the harmful impact of resulting disturbances is an important aspect of power system operation and resilience. Bridging the gap from theory to practice, this guide introduces the fundamentals of transient phenomena affecting electric power systems using the numerical analysis tools, Alternative Transients Program- Electromagnetic Transients Program (ATP-EMTP) and ATP-DRAW. This technology is widely-applied to recognize and solve transient problems in power networks and components giving readers a highly practical and relevant perspective and the skills to analyse new transient phenomena encountered in the field. Key features: Introduces novice engineers to transient phenomena using commonplace tools and models as well as background theory to link theory to practice. Develops analysis skills using the ATP-EMTP program, which is widely used in the electric power industry. ComprehensiveTable of ContentsPreface ix Part I Standard Course-Fundamentals and Typical Phenomena 1 1 Fundamentals of EMTP 3 1.1 Function and Composition of EMTP 3 1.1.1 Lumped Parameter RLC 3 1.1.2 Transmission Line 4 1.1.3 Transformer 6 1.1.4 Nonlinear Element 6 1.1.5 Arrester 6 1.1.6 Switch 7 1.1.7 Voltage and Current Sources 7 1.1.8 Generator and Rotating Machine 7 1.1.9 Control 7 1.1.10 Support Routines 7 1.2 Features of the Calculation Method 8 1.2.1 Formulation of the Main Circuit 8 1.2.2 Calculation in TACS 12 1.2.3 Features of EMTP 13 References 16 2 Modeling of System Components 17 2.1 Overhead Transmission Lines and Underground Cables 17 2.1.1 Overhead Transmission Line—Line Constants 17 2.1.2 Underground Cables—Cable Parameters 37 2.2 Transformer 46 2.2.1 Single‐Phase Two-Winding Transformer 46 2.2.2 Single‐Phase Three‐Winding Transformer 50 2.2.3 Three‐Phase One‐Core Transformer—Three Legs or Five Legs 53 2.2.4 Frequency and Transformer Modeling 55 3 Transient Currents in Power Systems 57 3.1 Short‐Circuit Currents 57 3.2 Transformer Inrush Magnetizing Current 60 3.3 Transient Inrush Currents in Capacitive Circuits 62 Appendix 3.A: Example of ATPDraw Sheets—Data3‐02.acp 64 Reference 64 4 Transient at Current Breaking 65 4.1 Short‐Circuit Current Breakings 66 4.2 Capacitive Current Switching 71 4.2.1 Switching of Capacitive Current of a No‐Load Overhead Transmission Line 72 4.2.2 Switching of Capacitive Current of a Cable 75 4.2.3 Switching of Capacitive Current of a Shunt Capacitor Bank 76 4.3 Inductive Current Switching 78 4.3.1 Current Chopping Phenomenon 78 4.3.2 Reignition 79 4.3.3 High‐Frequency Extinction and Multiple Reignition 80 4.4 TRV with Parallel Capacitance in SLF Breaking 80 Appendix 4.A: Current Injection to Various Circuit Elements 84 Appendix 4.B: TRV Calculation, Including ITRV—Current Injection is Applied for TRV Calculation 91 Appendix 4.C: 550 kV Line Normal Breaking 97 Appendix 4.D: 300 kV, 150 MVA Shunt Reactor Current Breaking—Current Chopping—Reignition—HF Current Interruption 100 References 103 5 Black Box Arc Modeling 105 5.1 Mayr Arc Model 106 5.1.1 Analysis of Phenomenon of Short‐Line Fault Breaking 106 5.1.2 Analysis of Phenomenon of Shunt Reactor Switching 110 5.2 Cassie Arc Model 112 5.2.1 Analysis of Phenomenon of Current Zero Skipping 113 Appendix 5.A: Mayr Arc Model Calculating SLF Breaking, 300 kV, 50 kA, L90 Condition 118 Appendix 5.B: Zero Skipping Current Breaking Near Generator—Fault Current Lasting 124 Appendix 5.C: Zero Skipping Current Breaking Near Generator—Dynamic Arc Introduced, Still Nonbreaking 131 6 Typical Power Electronics Circuits in Power Systems 135 6.1 General 135 6.2 HVDC Converter/Inverter Circuits 135 6.3 Static Var Compensator/Thyristor‐Controlled Inductor 140 6.4 PWM Self‐Communicated Type Inverter Applying the Triangular Carrier Wave Shape Principle—Applied to SVG (Static Var Generator) 142 Appendix 6.A: Example of ATPDraw Picture 147 Reference 148 Part II Advanced Course-Special Phenomena and Various Applications 149 7 Special Switching 151 7.1 Transformer‐Limited Short‐Circuit Current Breaking 151 7.2 Transformer Winding Response to Very Fast Transient Voltage 152 7.3 Transformer Magnetizing Current under Geomagnetic Storm Conditions 156 7.4 Four‐Armed Shunt Reactor for Suppressing Secondary Arc in Single‐Pole Rapid Reclosing 159 7.5 Switching Four‐Armed Shunt Reactor Compensated Transmission Line 162 References 163 8 Synchronous Machine Dynamics 165 8.1 Synchronous Machine Modeling and Machine Parameters 165 8.2 Some Basic Examples 167 8.2.1 No‐Load Transmission Line Charging 167 8.2.2 Power Flow Calculation 169 8.2.3 Sudden Short‐Circuiting 172 8.3 Transient Stability Analysis Applying the Synchronous Machine Model 176 8.3.1 Classic Analysis (Equal‐Area Method) and Time Domain Analysis (EMTP) 176 8.3.2 Detailed Transients by Time Domain Analysis: ATP‐EMTP 180 8.3.3 Field Excitation Control 183 8.3.4 Back‐Swing Phenomenon 186 Appendix 8.A: Short‐Circuit Phenomena Observation in d‐q Domain Coordinate 190 Appendix 8.B: Starting as an Induction Motor 193 Appendix 8.C: Modeling by the No. 19 Universal Machine 195 Appendix 8.D: Example of ATPDraw Picture File: Draw8‐111.acp (Figure D8.1). 197 References 198 9 Induction Machine, Doubly Fed Machine, Permanent Magnet Machine 199 9.1 Induction Machine (Cage Rotor Type) 199 9.1.1 Machine Data for EMTP Calculation 200 9.1.2 Zero Starting 201 9.1.3 Mechanical Torque Load Application 204 9.1.4 Multimachines 206 9.1.5 Motor Terminal Voltage Change 208 9.1.6 Driving by Variable Voltage and Frequency Source (VVVF) 209 9.2 Doubly Fed Machine 212 9.2.1 Operation Principle 212 9.2.2 Steady‐State Calculation 213 9.2.3 Flywheel Generator Operation 213 9.3 Permanent Magnet Machine 215 9.3.1 Zero Starting (Starting by Direct AC Voltage Source Connection) 217 9.3.2 Calculation of Transient Phenomena 217 Appendix 9.A: Doubly Fed Machine Vector Diagrams 218 Appendix 9.B: Example of ATPDraw Picture 219 10 Machine Drive Applications 221 10.1 Small‐Scale System Composed of a Synchronous Generator and Induction Motor 221 10.1.1 Initialization 221 10.1.2 Induction Motor Starting 223 10.1.3 Application of AVR 225 10.1.4 Inverter‐Controlled VVVF Starting 226 10.2 Cycloconverter 233 10.3 Cycloconverter‐Driven Synchronous Machine 237 10.3.1 Application of Sudden Mechanical Load 237 10.3.2 Quick Starting of a Cycloconverter‐Driven Synchronous Motor 242 10.3.3 Comparison with the Inverter‐Driven System 245 10.4 Flywheel Generator: Doubly Fed Machine Application for Transient Stability Enhancement 248 10.4.1 Initialization 249 10.4.2 Flywheel Activity in Transient Stability Enhancement 254 10.4.3 Active/Reactive Power Effect 254 10.4.4 Discussion 258 Appendix 10.A: Example of ATPDraw Picture 260 Reference 266 Index 267

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe modern financial industry has been required to deal with large and diverse portfolios in a variety of asset classes often with limited market data available.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Preface xv 1 Overview 1 Ali N. Akansu, Sanjeev R. Kulkarni, and Dmitry Malioutov 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 A Bird’s-Eye View of Finance 2 1.2.1 Trading and Exchanges 4 1.2.2 Technical Themes in the Book 5 1.3 Overview of the Chapters 6 1.3.1 Chapter 2: “Sparse Markowitz Portfolios” by Christine De Mol 6 1.3.2 Chapter 3: “Mean-Reverting Portfolios: Tradeoffs between Sparsity and Volatility” by Marco Cuturi and Alexandre d’Aspremont 7 1.3.3 Chapter 4: “Temporal Causal Modeling” by Prabhanjan Kambadur, Aurélie C. Lozano, and Ronny Luss 7 1.3.4 Chapter 5: “Explicit Kernel and Sparsity of Eigen Subspace for the AR(1) Process” by Mustafa U. Torun, Onur Yilmaz and Ali N. Akansu 7 1.3.5 Chapter 6: “Approaches to High-Dimensional Covariance and Precision Matrix Estimation” by Jianqing Fan, Yuan Liao, and Han Liu 7 1.3.6 Chapter 7: “Stochastic Volatility: Modeling and Asymptotic Approaches to Option Pricing and Portfolio Selection” by Matthew Lorig and Ronnie Sircar 7 1.3.7 Chapter 8: “Statistical Measures of Dependence for Financial Data” by David S. Matteson, Nicholas A. James, and William B. Nicholson 8 1.3.8 Chapter 9: “Correlated Poisson Processes and Their Applications in Financial Modeling” by Alexander Kreinin 8 1.3.9 Chapter 10: “CVaR Minimizations in Support Vector Machines” by Junya Gotoh and Akiko Takeda 8 1.3.10 Chapter 11: “Regression Models in Risk Management” by Stan Uryasev 8 1.4 Other Topics in Financial Signal Processing and Machine Learning 9 References 9 2 Sparse Markowitz Portfolios 11 ChristineDeMol 2.1 Markowitz Portfolios 11 2.2 Portfolio Optimization as an Inverse Problem: The Need for Regularization 13 2.3 Sparse Portfolios 15 2.4 Empirical Validation 17 2.5 Variations on the Theme 18 2.5.1 Portfolio Rebalancing 18 2.5.2 Portfolio Replication or Index Tracking 19 2.5.3 Other Penalties and Portfolio Norms 19 2.6 Optimal Forecast Combination 20 Acknowlegments 21 References 21 3 Mean-Reverting Portfolios 23 Marco Cuturi and Alexandre d’Aspremont 3.1 Introduction 23 3.1.1 Synthetic Mean-Reverting Baskets 24 3.1.2 Mean-Reverting Baskets with Sufficient Volatility and Sparsity 24 3.2 Proxies for Mean Reversion 25 3.2.1 Related Work and Problem Setting 25 3.2.2 Predictability 26 3.2.3 Portmanteau Criterion 27 3.2.4 Crossing Statistics 28 3.3 Optimal Baskets 28 3.3.1 Minimizing Predictability 29 3.3.2 Minimizing the Portmanteau Statistic 29 3.3.3 Minimizing the Crossing Statistic 29 3.4 Semidefinite Relaxations and Sparse Components 30 3.4.1 A Semidefinite Programming Approach to Basket Estimation 30 3.4.2 Predictability 30 3.4.3 Portmanteau 31 3.4.4 Crossing Stats 31 3.5 Numerical Experiments 32 3.5.1 Historical Data 32 3.5.2 Mean-reverting Basket Estimators 33 3.5.3 Jurek and Yang (2007) Trading Strategy 33 3.5.4 Transaction Costs 33 3.5.5 Experimental Setup 36 3.5.6 Results 36 3.6 Conclusion 39 References 39 4 Temporal Causal Modeling 41 Prabhanjan Kambadur, Aurélie C. Lozano, and Ronny Luss 4.1 Introduction 41 4.2 TCM 46 4.2.1 Granger Causality and Temporal Causal Modeling 46 4.2.2 Grouped Temporal Causal Modeling Method 47 4.2.3 Synthetic Experiments 49 4.3 Causal Strength Modeling 51 4.4 Quantile TCM (Q-TCM) 52 4.4.1 Modifying Group OMP for Quantile Loss 52 4.4.2 Experiments 53 4.5 TCM with Regime Change Identification 55 4.5.1 Model 56 4.5.2 Algorithm 58 4.5.3 Synthetic Experiments 60 4.5.4 Application: Analyzing Stock Returns 62 4.6 Conclusions 63 References 64 5 Explicit Kernel and Sparsity of Eigen Subspace for the AR(1) Process 67 Mustafa U. Torun, Onur Yilmaz, and Ali N. Akansu 5.1 Introduction 67 5.2 Mathematical Definitions 68 5.2.1 Discrete AR(1) Stochastic Signal Model 68 5.2.2 Orthogonal Subspace 69 5.3 Derivation of Explicit KLT Kernel for a Discrete AR(1) Process 72 5.3.1 A Simple Method for Explicit Solution of a Transcendental Equation 73 5.3.2 Continuous Process with Exponential Autocorrelation 74 5.3.3 Eigenanalysis of a Discrete AR(1) Process 76 5.3.4 Fast Derivation of KLT Kernel for an AR(1) Process 79 5.4 Sparsity of Eigen Subspace 82 5.4.1 Overview of Sparsity Methods 83 5.4.2 pdf-Optimized Midtread Quantizer 84 5.4.3 Quantization of Eigen Subspace 86 5.4.4 pdf of Eigenvector 87 5.4.5 Sparse KLT Method 89 5.4.6 Sparsity Performance 91 5.5 Conclusions 97 References 97 6 Approaches to High-Dimensional Covariance and Precision Matrix Estimations 100 Jianqing Fan, Yuan Liao, and Han Liu 6.1 Introduction 100 6.2 Covariance Estimation via Factor Analysis 101 6.2.1 Known Factors 103 6.2.2 Unknown Factors 104 6.2.3 Choosing the Threshold 105 6.2.4 Asymptotic Results 105 6.2.5 A Numerical Illustration 107 6.3 Precision Matrix Estimation and Graphical Models 109 6.3.1 Column-wise Precision Matrix Estimation 110 6.3.2 The Need for Tuning-insensitive Procedures 111 6.3.3 TIGER: A Tuning-insensitive Approach for Optimal Precision Matrix Estimation 112 6.3.4 Computation 114 6.3.5 Theoretical Properties of TIGER 114 6.3.6 Applications to Modeling Stock Returns 115 6.3.7 Applications to Genomic Network 118 6.4 Financial Applications 119 6.4.1 Estimating Risks of Large Portfolios 119 6.4.2 Large Panel Test of Factor Pricing Models 121 6.5 Statistical Inference in Panel Data Models 126 6.5.1 Efficient Estimation in Pure Factor Models 126 6.5.2 Panel Data Model with Interactive Effects 127 6.5.3 Numerical Illustrations 130 6.6 Conclusions 131 References 131 7 Stochastic Volatility 135 Matthew Lorig and Ronnie Sircar 7.1 Introduction 135 7.1.1 Options and Implied Volatility 136 7.1.2 Volatility Modeling 137 7.2 Asymptotic Regimes and Approximations 141 7.2.1 Contract Asymptotics 142 7.2.2 Model Asymptotics 142 7.2.3 Implied Volatility Asymptotics 143 7.2.4 Tractable Models 145 7.2.5 Model Coefficient Polynomial Expansions 146 7.2.6 Small “Vol of Vol” Expansion 152 7.2.7 Separation of Timescales Approach 152 7.2.8 Comparison of the Expansion Schemes 154 7.3 Merton Problem with Stochastic Volatility: Model Coefficient Polynomial Expansions 155 7.3.1 Models and Dynamic Programming Equation 155 7.3.2 Asymptotic Approximation 157 7.3.3 Power Utility 159 7.4 Conclusions 160 Acknowledgements 160 References 160 8 Statistical Measures of Dependence for Financial Data 162 David S. Matteson, Nicholas A. James, and William B. Nicholson 8.1 Introduction 162 8.2 Robust Measures of Correlation and Autocorrelation 164 8.2.1 Transformations and Rank-Based Methods 166 8.2.2 Inference 169 8.2.3 Misspecification Testing 171 8.3 Multivariate Extensions 174 8.3.1 Multivariate Volatility 175 8.3.2 Multivariate Misspecification Testing 176 8.3.3 Granger Causality 176 8.3.4 Nonlinear Granger Causality 177 8.4 Copulas 179 8.4.1 Fitting Copula Models 180 8.4.2 Parametric Copulas 181 8.4.3 Extending beyond Two Random Variables 183 8.4.4 Software 185 8.5 Types of Dependence 185 8.5.1 Positive and Negative Dependence 185 8.5.2 Tail Dependence 187 References 188 9 Correlated Poisson Processes and Their Applications in Financial Modeling 191 Alexander Kreinin 9.1 Introduction 191 9.2 Poisson Processes and Financial Scenarios 193 9.2.1 Integrated Market–Credit Risk Modeling 193 9.2.2 Market Risk and Derivatives Pricing 194 9.2.3 Operational Risk Modeling 194 9.2.4 Correlation of Operational Events 195 9.3 Common Shock Model and Randomization of Intensities 196 9.3.1 Common Shock Model 196 9.3.2 Randomization of Intensities 196 9.4 Simulation of Poisson Processes 197 9.4.1 Forward Simulation 197 9.4.2 Backward Simulation 200 9.5 Extreme Joint Distribution 207 9.5.1 Reduction to Optimization Problem 207 9.5.2 Monotone Distributions 208 9.5.3 Computation of the Joint Distribution 214 9.5.4 On the Frechet–Hoeffding Theorem 215 9.5.5 Approximation of the Extreme Distributions 217 9.6 Numerical Results 219 9.6.1 Examples of the Support 219 9.6.2 Correlation Boundaries 221 9.7 Backward Simulation of the Poisson-Wiener Process 222 9.8 Concluding Remarks 227 Acknowledgments 228 Appendix A 229 A. 1 Proof of Lemmas 9.2 and 9.3 229 A.1.1 Proof of Lemma 9.2 229 A.1.2 Proof of Lemma 9.3 230 References 231 10 CVaR Minimizations in Support Vector Machines 233 Jun-ya Gotoh and Akiko Takeda 10.1 What Is CVaR? 234 10.1.1 Definition and Interpretations 234 10.1.2 Basic Properties of CVaR 238 10.1.3 Minimization of CVaR 240 10.2 Support Vector Machines 242 10.2.1 Classification 242 10.2.2 Regression 246 10.3 ν-SVMs as CVaR Minimizations 247 10.3.1 ν-SVMs as CVaR Minimizations with Homogeneous Loss 247 10.3.2 ν-SVMs as CVaR Minimizations with Nonhomogeneous Loss 251 10.3.3 Refining the ν-Property 253 10.4 Duality 256 10.4.1 Binary Classification 256 10.4.2 Geometric Interpretation of ν-SVM 257 10.4.3 Geometric Interpretation of the Range of ν for ν-SVC 258 10.4.4 Regression 259 10.4.5 One-class Classification and SVDD 259 10.5 Extensions to Robust Optimization Modelings 259 10.5.1 Distributionally Robust Formulation 259 10.5.2 Measurement-wise Robust Formulation 261 10.6 Literature Review 262 10.6.1 CVaR as a Risk Measure 263 10.6.2 From CVaR Minimization to SVM 263 10.6.3 From SVM to CVaR Minimization 263 10.6.4 Beyond CVaR 263 References 264 11 Regression Models in Risk Management 266 Stan Uryasev 11.1 Introduction 267 11.2 Error and Deviation Measures 268 11.3 Risk Envelopes and Risk Identifiers 271 11.3.1 Examples of Deviation Measures D, Corresponding Risk Envelopes Q, and Sets of Risk Identifiers QD(X) 272 11.4 Error Decomposition in Regression 273 11.5 Least-Squares Linear Regression 275 11.6 Median Regression 277 11.7 Quantile Regression and Mixed Quantile Regression 281 11.8 Special Types of Linear Regression 283 11.9 Robust Regression 284 References, Further Reading, and Bibliography 287 Index 289

Read more less

Book SynopsisDemonstrates techniques which will allow rewiring rates of over 95%, enabling adoption of deep sub-micron chips for industrial applications Logic synthesis is an essential part of the modern digital IC design process in semi-conductor industry. This book discusses a logic synthesis technique called rewiring and its latest technical advancement in term of rewirability. Rewiring technique has surfaced in academic research since 1993 and there is currently no book available on the market which systematically and comprehensively discusses this rewiring technology. The authors cover logic transformation techniques with concentration on rewiring. For many decades, the effect of wiring on logic structures has been ignored due to an ideal view of wires and their negligible role in the circuit performance. However in today's semiconductor technology wiring is the major player in circuit performance degeneration and logic synthesis engines can be improved to deal with thiTable of ContentsList of Figures ix List of Tables xiii Preface xv Introduction xvii 1 Preliminaries 1 1.1 Boolean Circuits 1 1.2 Redundancy and Stuck-at Faults 4 1.3 Automatic Test Pattern Generation (ATPG) 6 1.4 Dominators 6 1.5 Mandatory Assignments and Recursive Learning 7 1.6 Graph Theory and Boolean Circuits 8 References 10 2 Concept of Logic Rewiring 11 2.1 What is Rewiring? 11 2.2 ATPG-based Rewiring Techniques 12 2.2.1 Add-First 12 2.2.2 Delete-First 18 2.3 Non-ATPG-based Rewiring Techniques 24 2.3.1 Graph-based Alternate Wiring (GBAW) 24 2.3.2 SPFD 25 2.4 Why are Rewiring Techniques Important? 31 References 33 3 Add-First and Non-ATPG-Based Rewiring Techniques 37 3.1 Redundancy Addition and Removal (RAR) 37 3.1.1 RAMBO 37 3.1.2 REWIRE 38 3.1.3 RAMFIRE 41 3.1.4 Comparison Between RAR-Based Rewiring Techniques 43 3.2 Node-Based Network Addition and Removal (NAR) 43 3.2.1 Node Merging 43 3.2.2 Node Addition and Removal 48 3.3 Other Rewiring Techniques 51 3.3.1 SPFD-Based Rewiring 51 References 65 4 Delete-First Rewiring Techniques 67 4.1 IRRA 69 4.1.1 Destination of Alternative Wires 71 4.1.2 Source of Alternative Wires 72 4.2 ECR 76 4.2.1 Destination of Alternative Wires 80 4.2.2 Source of Alternative Wires 85 4.2.3 Overview of the Approach of Error-Cancellation-Based Rewiring 86 4.2.4 Complexity Analysis of ECR 87 4.2.5 Comparison Between ECR and Other Resynthesis Techniques 90 4.2.6 Experimental Result 92 4.3 FECR 96 4.3.1 Error Flow Graph Construction 97 4.3.2 Destination Node Identification 98 4.3.3 Source Node Identification 102 4.3.4 ECR is a Special Case of FECR 104 4.3.5 Complexity Analysis of FECR 105 4.3.6 Experimental Result 105 4.4 Cut-Based Error Cancellation Rewiring 107 4.4.1 Preliminaries 107 4.4.2 Error Frontier 109 4.4.3 Cut-Based Error Cancellation Rewiring 117 4.4.4 Verification of Alternative Wires 121 4.4.5 Complexity Analysis of CECR 122 4.4.6 Relationship Between ECR, FECR, and CECR 122 4.4.7 Extending CECR for n-to-m Rewiring 123 4.4.8 Speedup for CECR 124 4.4.9 Experimental Results 125 References 129 5 Applications 133 5.1 Area Reduction 133 5.1.1 Preliminaries 134 5.1.2 Our Methodology (“Long tail” vs “Bump tail” Curves) 135 5.1.3 Details of our Approach 140 5.1.4 Experimental Results 143 5.2 Postplacement Optimization 145 5.2.1 Wire-Length-Driven Rewiring-Based Postplacement Optimization 145 5.2.2 Timing-Driven Rewiring-Based Postplacement Optimization 151 5.3 ECO Timing Optimization 158 5.3.1 Preliminaries 160 5.3.2 Nego-Rout Operation 161 5.3.3 Path-Restructuring Operation 164 5.3.4 Experimental Results 166 5.4 Area Reduction in FPGA Technology Mapping 167 5.4.1 Incremental Logic Resynthesis (ILR): Depth-Oriented Mode 170 5.4.2 Incremental Logic Resynthesis (ILR): Area-Oriented Mode 171 5.4.3 Experimental Results 173 5.4.4 Conclusion 183 5.5 FPGA Postlayout Routing Optimization 184 5.5.1 Optimization by Alternative Functions 185 5.5.2 Optimization with Mapping-to-Routing Logic Rewirings 187 5.5.3 Optimization by SPFD-Based Rewiring 198 5.6 Logic Synthesis for Low Power Using Clock Gating and Rewiring 199 5.6.1 Mechanism of Clock Gating 199 5.6.2 Rewiring-Based Optimization 203 References 207 6 Summary 211 Index 213

Read more less

Book SynopsisLiquid Crystal Devices are crucial and ubiquitous components of an ever-increasing number of technologies. They are used in everything from cellular phones, eBook readers, GPS devices, computer monitors and automotive displays to projectors and TVs, to name but a few. This second edition continues to serve as an introductory guide to the fundamental properties of liquid crystals and their technical application, while explicating the recent advancements within LCD technology. This edition includes important new chapters on blue-phase display technology, advancements in LCD research significantly contributed to by the authors themselves. This title is of particular interest to engineers and researchers involved in display technology and graduate students involved in display technology research. Key features:Updated throughout to reflect the latest technical state-of-the-art in LCD research and development, including new chapters and material on topics such asTable of ContentsSeries Editor’s Foreword xiii Preface to the First Edition xv Preface to the Second Edition xvii 1 Liquid Crystal Physics 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Thermodynamics and Statistical Physics 5 1.2.1 Thermodynamic laws 5 1.2.2 Boltzmann distribution 6 1.2.3 Thermodynamic quantities 7 1.2.4 Criteria for thermodynamical equilibrium 9 1.3 Orientational Order 10 1.3.1 Orientational order parameter 11 1.3.2 Landau–de Gennes theory of orientational order in nematic phase 13 1.3.3 Maier–Saupe theory 18 1.4 Elastic Properties of Liquid Crystals 21 1.4.1 Elastic properties of nematic liquid crystals 21 1.4.2 Elastic properties of cholesteric liquid crystals 24 1.4.3 Elastic properties of smectic liquid crystals 26 1.5 Response of Liquid Crystals to Electromagnetic Fields 27 1.5.1 Magnetic susceptibility 27 1.5.2 Dielectric permittivity and refractive index 29 1.6 Anchoring Effects of Nematic Liquid Crystal at Surfaces 38 1.6.1 Anchoring energy 38 1.6.2 Alignment layers 39 1.7 Liquid crystal director elastic deformation 40 1.7.1 Elastic deformation and disclination 40 1.7.2 Escape of liquid crystal director in disclinations 42 Homework Problems 48 References 49 2 Propagation of Light in Anisotropic Optical Media 51 2.1 Electromagnetic Wave 51 2.2 Polarization 54 2.2.1 Monochromatic plane waves and their polarization states 54 2.2.2 Linear polarization state 55 2.2.3 Circular polarization states 55 2.2.4 Elliptical polarization state 56 2.3 Propagation of Light in Uniform Anisotropic Optical Media 59 2.3.1 Eigenmodes 60 2.3.2 Orthogonality of eigenmodes 65 2.3.3 Energy flux 66 2.3.4 Special cases 67 2.3.5 Polarizers 69 2.4 Propagation of Light in Cholesteric Liquid Crystals 72 2.4.1 Eigenmodes 72 2.4.2 Reflection of cholesteric liquid crystals 81 2.4.3 Lasing in cholesteric liquid crystals 84 Homework Problems 85 References 86 3 Optical Modeling Methods 87 3.1 Jones Matrix Method 87 3.1.1 Jones vector 87 3.1.2 Jones matrix 88 3.1.3 Jones matrix of non-uniform birefringent film 91 3.1.4 Optical properties of twisted nematic 92 3.2 Mueller Matrix Method 98 3.2.1 Partially polarized and unpolarized light 98 3.2.2 Measurement of the Stokes parameters 100 3.2.3 The Mueller matrix 102 3.2.4 Poincaré sphere 104 3.2.5 Evolution of the polarization states on the Poincaré sphere 106 3.2.6 Mueller matrix of twisted nematic liquid crystals 110 3.2.7 Mueller matrix of non-uniform birefringence film 112 3.3 Berreman 4 × 4 Method 113 Homework Problems 124 References 125 4 Effects of Electric Field on Liquid Crystals 127 4.1 Dielectric Interaction 127 4.1.1 Reorientation under dielectric interaction 128 4.1.2 Field-induced orientational order 129 4.2 Flexoelectric Effect 132 4.2.1 Flexoelectric effect in nematic liquid crystals 132 4.2.2 Flexoelectric effect in cholesteric liquid crystals 136 4.3 Ferroelectric Liquid Crystal 138 4.3.1 Symmetry and polarization 138 4.3.2 Tilt angle and polarization 140 4.3.3 Surface stabilized ferroelectric liquid crystals 141 4.3.4 Electroclinic effect in chiral smectic liquid crystal 144 Homework Problems 146 References 147 5 Fréedericksz Transition 149 5.1 Calculus of Variation 149 5.1.1 One dimension and one variable 150 5.1.2 One dimension and multiple variables 153 5.1.3 Three dimensions 153 5.2 Fréedericksz Transition: Statics 153 5.2.1 Splay geometry 154 5.2.2 Bend geometry 158 5.2.3 Twist geometry 160 5.2.4 Twisted nematic cell 161 5.2.5 Splay geometry with weak anchoring 164 5.2.6 Splay geometry with pretilt angle 165 5.3 Measurement of Anchoring Strength 166 5.3.1 Polar anchoring strength 167 5.3.2 Azimuthal anchoring strength 169 5.4 Measurement of Pretilt Angle 171 5.5 Fréedericksz Transition: Dynamics 175 5.5.1 Dynamics of Fréedericksz transition in twist geometry 175 5.5.2 Hydrodynamics 176 5.5.3 Backflow 182 Homework Problems 187 References 188 6 Liquid Crystal Materials 191 6.1 Introduction 191 6.2 Refractive Indices 192 6.2.1 Extended Cauchy equations 192 6.2.2 Three-band model 193 6.2.3 Temperature effect 195 6.2.4 Temperature gradient 198 6.2.5 Molecular polarizabilities 199 6.3 Dielectric Constants 201 6.3.1 Positive Δε liquid crystals for AMLCD 202 6.3.2 Negative Δε liquid crystals 202 6.3.3 Dual-frequency liquid crystals 203 6.4 Rotational Viscosity 204 6.5 Elastic Constants 204 6.6 Figure-of-Merit (FoM) 205 6.7 Index Matching between Liquid Crystals and Polymers 206 6.7.1 Refractive index of polymers 206 6.7.2 Matching refractive index 208 Homework problems 210 References 210 7 Modeling Liquid Crystal Director Configuration 213 7.1 Electric Energy of Liquid Crystals 213 7.1.1 Constant charge 214 7.1.2 Constant voltage 215 7.1.3 Constant electric field 218 7.2 Modeling Electric Field 218 7.3 Simulation of Liquid Crystal Director Configuration 221 7.3.1 Angle representation 221 7.3.2 Vector representation 225 7.3.3 Tensor representation 228 Homework Problems 232 References 232 8 Transmissive Liquid Crystal Displays 235 8.1 Introduction 235 8.2 Twisted Nematic (TN) Cells 236 8.2.1 Voltage-dependent transmittance 237 8.2.2 Film-compensated TN cells 238 8.2.3 Viewing angle 241 8.3 In-Plane Switching Mode 241 8.3.1 Voltage-dependent transmittance 242 8.3.2 Response time 243 8.3.3 Viewing angle 246 8.3.4 Classification of compensation films 246 8.3.5 Phase retardation of uniaxial media at oblique angles 246 8.3.6 Poincaré sphere representation 249 8.3.7 Light leakage of crossed polarizers at oblique view 250 8.3.8 IPS with a positive a film and a positive c film 254 8.3.9 IPS with positive and negative a films 259 8.3.10 Color shift 263 8.4 Vertical Alignment Mode 263 8.4.1 Voltage-dependent transmittance 263 8.4.2 Optical response time 264 8.4.3 Overdrive and undershoot voltage method 265 8.5 Multi-Domain Vertical Alignment Cells 266 8.5.1 MVA with a positive a film and a negative c film 269 8.5.2 MVA with a positive a, a negative a, and a negative c film 273 8.6 Optically Compensated Bend Cell 277 8.6.1 Voltage-dependent transmittance 278 8.6.2 Compensation films for OCB 279 Homework Problems 281 References 283 9 Reflective and Transflective Liquid Crystal Displays 285 9.1 Introduction 285 9.2 Reflective Liquid Crystal Displays 286 9.2.1 Film-compensated homogeneous cell 287 9.2.2 Mixed-mode twisted nematic (MTN) cells 289 9.3 Transflector 290 9.3.1 Openings-on-metal transflector 290 9.3.2 Half-mirror metal transflector 291 9.3.3 Multilayer dielectric film transflector 292 9.3.4 Orthogonal polarization transflectors 292 9.4 Classification of Transflective LCDs 293 9.4.1 Absorption-type transflective LCDs 294 9.4.2 Scattering-type transflective LCDs 296 9.4.3 Scattering and absorption type transflective LCDs 298 9.4.4 Reflection-type transflective LCDs 300 9.4.5 Phase retardation type 302 9.5 Dual-Cell-Gap Transflective LCDs 312 9.6 Single-Cell-Gap Transflective LCDs 314 9.7 Performance of Transflective LCDs 314 9.7.1 Color balance 314 9.7.2 Image brightness 315 9.7.3 Viewing angle 315 Homework Problems 316 References 316 10 Liquid Crystal Display Matrices, Drive Schemes and Bistable Displays 321 10.1 Segmented Displays 321 10.2 Passive Matrix Displays and Drive Scheme 322 10.3 Active Matrix Displays 326 10.3.1 TFT structure 328 10.3.2 TFT operation principles 329 10.4 Bistable Ferroelectric LCD and Drive Scheme 330 10.5 Bistable Nematic Displays 332 10.5.1 Introduction 332 10.5.2 Twisted-untwisted bistable nematic LCDs 333 10.5.3 Surface-stabilized nematic liquid crystals 339 10.6 Bistable Cholesteric Reflective Display 342 10.6.1 Introduction 342 10.6.2 Optical properties of bistable Ch reflective displays 344 10.6.3 Encapsulated cholesteric liquid crystal displays 347 10.6.4 Transition between cholesteric states 347 10.6.5 Drive schemes for bistable Ch displays 355 Homework Problems 358 References 359 11 Liquid Crystal/Polymer Composites 363 11.1 Introduction 363 11.2 Phase Separation 365 11.2.1 Binary mixture 365 11.2.2 Phase diagram and thermal induced phase separation 369 11.2.3 Polymerization induced phase separation 371 11.2.4 Solvent-induced phase separation 374 11.2.5 Encapsulation 376 11.3 Scattering Properties of LCPCs 377 11.4 Polymer Dispersed Liquid Crystals 383 11.4.1 Liquid crystal droplet configurations in PDLCs 383 11.4.2 Switching PDLCs 385 11.4.3 Scattering PDLC devices 387 11.4.4 Dichroic dye-doped PDLC 391 11.4.5 Holographic PDLCs 393 11.5 PSLCs 395 11.5.1 Preparation of PSLCs 395 11.5.2 Working modes of scattering PSLCs 396 11.6 Scattering-Based Displays from LCPCs 400 11.6.1 Reflective displays 400 11.6.2 Projection displays 402 11.6.3 Transmissive direct-view displays 403 11.7 Polymer-Stabilized LCDs 403 Homework Problems 407 References 409 12 Tunable Liquid Crystal Photonic Devices 413 12.1 Introduction 413 12.2 Laser Beam Steering 414 12.2.1 Optical phased array 415 12.2.2 Prism-based beam steering 417 12.3 Variable Optical Attenuators 419 12.4 Tunable-Focus Lens 423 12.4.1 Tunable-focus spherical lens 423 12.4.2 Tunable-focus cylindrical lens 426 12.4.3 Switchable positive and negative microlens 428 12.4.4 Hermaphroditic LC microlens 434 12.5 Polarization-Independent LC Devices 435 12.5.1 Double-layered homogeneous LC cells 436 12.5.2 Double-layered LC gels 438 Homework Problems 441 References 442 13 Blue Phases of Chiral Liquid Crystals 445 13.1 Introduction 445 13.2 Phase Diagram of Blue Phases 446 13.3 Reflection of Blue Phases 447 13.3.1 Basics of crystal structure and X-ray diffraction 447 13.3.2 Bragg reflection of blue phases 449 13.4 Structure of Blue Phase 451 13.4.1 Defect theory 452 13.4.2 Landau theory 459 13.5 Optical Properties of Blue Phase 471 13.5.1 Reflection 471 13.5.2 Transmission 472 Homework Problems 475 References 475 14 Polymer-Stabilized Blue Phase Liquid Crystals 477 14.1 Introduction 477 14.2 Polymer-Stabilized Blue Phases 480 14.2.1 Nematic LC host 482 14.2.2 Chiral dopants 483 14.2.3 Monomers 483 14.3 Kerr Effect 484 14.3.1 Extended Kerr effect 486 14.3.2 Wavelength effect 489 14.3.3 Frequency effect 490 14.3.4 Temperature effects 491 14.4 Device Configurations 496 14.4.1 In-plane-switching BPLCD 497 14.4.2 Protruded electrodes 501 14.4.3 Etched electrodes 504 14.4.4 Single gamma curve 504 14.5 Vertical Field Switching 507 14.5.1 Device structure 507 14.5.2 Experiments and simulations 508 14.6 Phase Modulation 510 References 510 15 Liquid Crystal Display Components 513 15.1 Introduction 513 15.2 Light Source 513 15.3 Light-guide 516 15.4 Diffuser 516 15.5 Collimation Film 518 15.6 Polarizer 519 15.6.1 Dichroic absorbing polarizer 520 15.6.2 Dichroic reflective polarizer 521 15.7 Compensation Film 530 15.7.1 Form birefringence compensation film 531 15.7.2 Discotic liquid crystal compensation film 531 15.7.3 Compensation film from rigid polymer chains 532 15.7.4 Drawn polymer compensation film 533 15.8 Color Filter 535 References 536 16 Three-Dimensional Displays 539 16.1 Introduction 539 16.2 Depth Cues 539 16.2.1 Binocular disparity 539 16.2.2 Convergence 540 16.2.3 Motion parallax 540 16.2.4 Accommodation 541 16.3 Stereoscopic Displays 541 16.3.1 Head-mounted displays 542 16.3.2 Anaglyph 542 16.3.3 Time sequential stereoscopic displays with shutter glasses 542 16.3.4 Stereoscopic displays with polarizing glasses 544 16.4 Autostereoscopic Displays 546 16.4.1 Autostereoscopic displays based on parallax barriers 546 16.4.2 Autostereoscopic displays based on lenticular lens array 550 16.4.3 Directional backlight 552 16.5 Integral imaging 553 16.6 Holography 554 16.7 Volumetric displays 556 16.7.1 Swept volumetric displays 556 16.7.2 Multi-planar volumetric displays 557 16.7.3 Points volumetric displays 560 References 560 Index 565

Read more less

Book SynopsisGet up to speed on your Canon SL1/100D and enter the world of dSLR photography! Canon's EOS Rebel SL1/100D is for photographers who prefer a smaller, lightweight camera that still offers heavyweight features. This full-color guide explains how to get better photos from an SL1.Table of ContentsIntroduction 1 Part I: Getting Started 5 Chapter 1: Exploring Your Canon EOS Rebel SL1/100D 7 Chapter 2: Creating Great Images on Auto-Pilot 41 Chapter 3: Specifying Image Size and Quality 73 Chapter 4: Using the LCD Monitor 83 Part II: Going beyond Point-and-Shoot Photography 111 Chapter 5: Shooting Pictures and Movies in Live View 113 Chapter 6: Leaving Auto Mode Behind 135 Chapter 7: Features That Make Pictures Pop 165 Chapter 8: Shooting Frameworthy Photos 205 Part III: Editing and Sharing Images 237 Chapter 9: Editing Your Images 239 Chapter 10: Creating Prints from Your Images 267 Part IV: The Part of Tens 287 Chapter 11: Ten Tips and Tricks 289 Chapter 12: Ten Cool Projects 305 Index 327

Read more less

Book SynopsisShows how the engineering curriculum can be a site for rendering social justice visible in engineering, for exploring complex socio-technical interplays inherent in engineering practice, and for enhancing teaching and learning Using social justice as a catalyst for curricular transformation, Engineering Justice presents an examination of how politics, culture, and other social issues are inherent in the practice of engineering. It aims to align engineering curricula with socially just outcomes, increase enrollment among underrepresented groups, and lessen lingering gender, class, and ethnicity gaps by showing how the power of engineering knowledge can be explicitly harnessed to serve the underserved and address social inequalities. This book is meant to transform the way educators think about engineering curricula through creating or transforming existing courses to attract, retain, and motivate engineering students to become professionals who enact engineering Table of ContentsA Note from the Series Editor xiii About the Authors xv Foreword xvii Preface xxiii Acknowledgments xxvii Introduction 1 1 Pressing Issues for Engineering Education and the Engineering Profession 3 1.1 A Mismatched Curriculum 3 1.2 Responsibility that Emerges from the Transformative Power of Engineering 7 1.3 Inquiring into the Framing of Benefits and Constraints 9 1.4 Transitioning from Weak to Robust Sustainability 9 1.5 Fostering Inclusive Excellence 10 1.6 Engaging Emerging Interest Groups 11 2 Research Methods 12 3 Theoretical Frameworks 13 4 Engineering for Social Justice 14 4.1 Emerging Organizations Provide New Opportunities 15 4.2 Calls from Engineering Education Leaders 16 4.3 Emerging Scholarship on Engineering and Social Justice 18 5 Engineering for Social Justice Criteria 19 5.1 Listening Contextually to Develop Trust and Empathy 21 5.2 Identifying Structural Conditions 23 5.3 Acknowledging Political Agency and Mobilizing Power 24 5.4 Increasing Opportunities and Resources 26 5.5 Reducing Imposed Risks and Harms 27 5.6 Enhancing Human Capabilities 28 5.7 Engineering and Social Justice Criteria Combined 30 6 Guidelines for Engineering for Social Justice Implementation 31 6.1 Cradle-to-Grave Analysis 31 6.2 Transcending Temporal Delimitations 33 6.3 Culling Multiple Perspectives 33 7 Further Chapters 34 7.1 Ideologies and Mindsets that Render Social Justice Invisible or Irrelevant 34 7.2 Engineering Design 35 7.3 Engineering Sciences 36 7.4 Humanities/Social Science Courses for Engineering Students 36 7.5 E4SJ as Catalyst for Inclusive Excellence in Engineering 37 7.6 Conclusion 37 8 Benefits of E4SJ Approach 37 References 38 1 Social Justice is often invisible in Engineering Education and Practice 45 1.1 Generic Barriers to Rendering Social Justice Visible 46 1.1.1 Normalcy 46 1.1.2 Superiority 47 1.1.3 Unconscious Biases 47 1.1.4 Personal and Broader Societal Framing 48 1.2 Engineering-Specific Barriers to Rendering Social Justice Visible: Ideologies 49 1.2.1 Technical–Social Dualism 50 1.2.2 Depoliticization 52 1.2.3 Meritocracy 55 1.3 Engineering-Specific Barriers to Rendering Social Justice Visible: Mindsets 56 1.3.1 Centrality of Military and Corporate Organizations 57 1.3.2 Uncritical Acceptance of Authority 58 1.3.3 Technical Narrowness 59 1.3.4 Positivism and the Myth of Objectivity 59 1.3.5 Willingness to Help and Persistence 60 References 63 2 Engineering Design for Social Justice 67 2.1 Why Engineering Design Matters 69 2.1.1 Why Design Resembles Actual Engineering Practice Yet Has Limitations 70 2.1.2 Why Design is an Important Yet Undervalued Component of Engineering Education 71 2.2 Engineering for Social Justice: Criteria for Engineering Design Initiatives 71 2.2.1 Listening Contextually 74 2.2.2 Identifying Structural Conditions 78 2.2.3 Acknowledging Political Agency and Mobilizing Power 79 2.2.4 Increasing Opportunities and Resources 82 2.2.5 Reducing Imposed Risks and Harms 85 2.2.6 Enhancing Human Capabilities 86 2.3 Social Justice Criteria Combined 88 2.4 Benefits of Integrating SJ in Design 89 2.5 Limitations of Social Justice Criteria 95 Appendix 2.A Engineering for Social Justice Self-Assessment Checklist 98 Appendix 2.B Design for Social Justice Charrette 100 Acknowledgments 102 References 102 3 Social Justice in the Engineering Sciences 107 3.1 Why are the Engineering Sciences the Sacred Cow of the Engineering Curriculum? 108 3.1.1 Engineering Sciences as Shapers of Engineering Identity 108 3.1.2 Pedagogical Tradition in the Engineering Sciences 112 3.2 Why Social Justice is Inherent in Engineering Sciences Course Content 114 3.3 Making Social Justice Visible without Compromising Technical Excellence 116 3.3.1 Social Justice Definition 116 3.3.2 E4SJ Criteria 119 3.4 Examples of Making SJ Visible in the Engineering Sciences 120 3.4.1 E4SJ Criteria Engaged in Introduction to Feedback Control Systems 120 3.4.2 E4SJ Criteria Engaged in Continuous-Time Signals and Systems 127 3.4.3 E4SJ Criteria Engaged in Mass and Energy Balances 128 3.5 Challenges of Integrating Social Justice into the Engineering Sciences 132 3.5.1 Accreditation 132 3.5.2 Student Attitude 133 3.5.3 Faculty Attitude 133 3.6 Opportunities Associated with Integrating Social Justice 135 3.6.1 Student Perspectives on Opportunities 136 3.6.2 Teaching and Scholarship Opportunities for Faculty 139 3.7 Author Narratives on Challenges and Opportunities 141 3.7.1 IFCS Reflection by Dr. Johnson 141 3.7.2 CTSS Reflection by Dr. Huff 142 3.7.2.1 CTSS Follow-Up Reflection by Dr. Huff 143 3.7.3 Mass and Energy Balances Reflection by Dr. Riley 144 3.8 Conclusion 145 Appendix 3.A IFCS Case Study Matrix. The Case Study Options are Mapped to Technical and Social Justice Learning Objectives 146 Appendix 3.B SJ Integration Issues. For Future IFCS Course Iterations, the Key SJ Integration Issues and Their Potential Solutions are Explored 147 Acknowledgments 149 References 149 4 Humanities and Social Sciences in Engineering Education: From Irrelevance to Social Justice 155 4.1 Humanities and Social Sciences, the Engineering Curriculum, and the Distancing of Engineering Education from Pressing Social Problems 157 4.2 The Cold War, the Anti-Technology Movement, and a Marginalized HSS 160 4.2.1 Humanities and Social Sciences in 1960s and 1970s Engineering Education 161 4.2.2 The Emergence and Evolution of STS 162 4.3 It is Time: Integration of Engineering and Social Justice Through the HSS–The Historical Convergence of ABET 2000 and More 163 4.3.1 Changes in the Institutional Landscape 165 4.3.2 Changes in the Scholarly Landscape 166 4.4 Emerging Curricular Innovations 168 4.5 Engineering and Social Justice at Colorado School of Mines 170 4.5.1 Background 170 4.5.2 Description of the Course “Engineering and Social Justice” 171 4.5.3 Course Learning Outcomes 172 4.6 Intercultural Communication at Colorado School of Mines 173 4.6.1 Course Background 174 4.6.2 Course Description 174 4.6.3 Learning Outcomes 177 4.7 Document Design and Graphics at Utah State 177 4.7.1 Course Background 178 4.7.2 Course Description 178 4.7.3 Learning Outcomes 179 4.8 Benefits and Limitations 182 4.8.1 Benefits 182 4.8.2 Limitations 183 Appendix 4.A Privilege Walk Questions 184 Appendix 4.B Privilege by Numbers Activity 187 Appendix 4.C Intercultural Communication Foundational Questions 188 Acknowledgments 189 References 190 5 Transforming Engineering Education and Practice 197 5.1 Practical Guidelines: From Problem Space to Program Space 199 5.1.1 E4SJ in the Problem Space 199 5.1.2 E4SJ in the Course Space 202 5.1.3 E4SJ in Boundary Spaces 206 5.1.4 E4SJ in the Program Space 207 5.2 Broader Implications of E4SJ-Infused Transformations 208 5.2.1 Changing Who Becomes an Engineer 208 5.2.2 Changing the Culture of Engineering 211 5.2.3 From a Culture of Disengagement to One of Greater Public Engagement 215 5.3 Identity Challenges and Inspirations 217 5.3.1 Engineering Student Identity Issues 217 5.3.2 Engineering Faculty Identity Issues 223 Appendix 5.A Assignment and Examples of Problem Rewrites 228 References 237 6 Conclusion: Making Social Justice Visible and Valued 243 6.1 Engineering Justice into Your Career 244 6.1.1 Recognizing Barriers and Opportunities to Making E4SJ Visible 245 6.1.2 Developing Creative Framing on the Road to Tenure and Promotion 246 6.1.3 Engaging Other Stakeholders and Building a Community of Practice 250 6.1.4 Supporting Students interested in E4SJ Beyond the Classroom 250 6.1.5 Enacting E4SJ Outside the Home Institution 252 6.2 Future E4SJ Research Directions 253 6.2.1 Longitudinal Studies 253 6.2.2 Vehicles for Giving Voice to Marginalized Groups 255 References 255 Index 259

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe large scale integration and planar scaling of individual system chips is reaching an expensive limit.Trade Review"In summary, Betty Prince has produced a piece of work that is timely and will undoubtedly become a classic text for 3D memory technologies." (3dincites.com, 30 September 2014) "As the semiconductor memory industry moves to the third dimension a plethora of competing technologies has arisen each claiming to be the logical, lucrative successor to existing two dimensional versions. The very breadth of these new technologies can be confusing even to experienced industry professionals. Dr Prince's book appears at the right time to remove this confusion by explaining each technology's structure, function and potential advantages in a way that is accessible to both interested spectators and those working in the industry. It provides a welcome solid foundation to anyone interested in understanding the various technologies vying for success in this migration."—Andrew Walker, Schiltron Corporation, USA "This is a great review on the current state-of-the-art in the highly topical subject of vertical 3D memories. It comprises the challenges and current solutions of 3D memory integration with respective to different memory technologies. It is a highly valuable resource for researchers and engineers in the field of memory technology."—Dr. Stephan Menzel, Forschungszentrum Jülich (PGI-7), Germany "... one to consider if you want to bring yourself up to speed on recent research behind today's and tomorrow’s 3D memory technologies. The book provides capsule summaries of over 360 papers and articles from scholarly journals organized into sections of related technologies to provide an invaluable reference on a particular 3D technology. It's a useful tool for locating research covering any of the numerous 3D technologies that are now finding their way into early production."—Jim Handy, TheMemoryGuy.com, OBJECTIVE ANALYSIS Semiconductor Market Research, USATable of ContentsAcknowledgments xv 1 Basic Memory Device Trends Toward the Vertical 1 1.1 Overview of 3D Vertical Memory Book 1 1.2 Moore’s Law and Scaling 2 1.3 Early RAM 3D Memory 3 1.3.1 SRAM as the First 3D Memory 3 1.3.2 An Early 3D Memory—The FinFET SRAM 6 1.3.3 Early Progress in 3D DRAM Trench and Stack Capacitors 6 1.3.4 3D as the Next Step for Embedded RAM 11 1.4 Early Nonvolatile Memories Evolve to 3D 13 1.4.1 NOR Flash Memory—Both Standalone and Embedded 13 1.4.2 The Charge-Trapping EEPROM 14 1.4.3 Thin-Film Transistor Takes Nonvolatile Memory into 3D 15 1.4.4 3D Microcontroller Stacks with Embedded SRAM and EEPROM 17 1.4.5 NAND Flash Memory as an Ideal 3D Memory 17 1.5 3D Cross-Point Arrays with Resistance RAM 20 1.6 STT-MTJ Resistance Switches in 3D 21 1.7 The Role of Emerging Memories in 3D Vertical Memories 22 References 23 2 3D Memory Using Double-Gate, Folded, TFT, and Stacked Crystal Silicon 25 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 FinFET—Early Vertical Memories 26 2.2.1 Early FD-SOI FinFET Charge-Trapping Flash Memory 26 2.2.2 FinFET Charge-Trapping Memory on Bulk Silicon 28 2.2.3 Doubling Memory Density Using a Paired FinFET Bit-Line Structure 32 2.2.4 Other Folded Gate Memory Structures and Characteristics 34 2.3 Double-Gate and Tri-Gate Flash 37 2.3.1 Vertical Channel Double Floating Gate Flash Memory 37 2.3.2 Early Double- and Tri-Gate FinFET Charge-Trapping Flash Memories 38 2.3.3 Double-Gate Dopant-Segregated Schottky Barrier CT FinFET Flash 39 2.3.4 Independent Double-Gate FinFET CT Flash Memory 42 2.4 Thin-Film Transistor (TFT) Nonvolatile Memory with Polysilicon Channels 43 2.4.1 Independent Double-Gate Memory with TFT and Polysilicon Channels 43 2.4.2 TFT Polysilicon Channel NV Memory Using Silicon Protrusions to Enhance Performance 46 2.4.3 An Improved Polysilicon Channel TFT for Vertical Transistor NAND Flash 46 2.4.4 Polysilicon TFT CT Memory with Vacuum Tunneling and Al2O3 Blocking Oxide 47 2.4.5 Graphene Channel NV Memory with Al2O3–HfOx–Al2O3 Storage Layer 48 2.5 Double-Gate Vertical Channel Flash Memory with Engineered Tunnel Layer 49 2.5.1 Double-Gate Vertical Single-Crystal Silicon Channel with Engineered Tunnel Layer 49 2.5.2 Polysilicon Substrate TFT CT NAND with Engineered Tunnel Layer 51 2.5.3 Polysilicon Channel Double-Layer Stacked TFT NAND Bandgap-Engineered Flash 52 2.5.4 Eight-Layer 3D Vertical DG TFT NAND Flash with Junctionless Buried Channel 54 2.5.5 Variability in Polysilicon TFT for 3D Vertical Gate NAND Flash 55 2.6 Stacked Gated Twin-Bit (SGTB) CT Flash 55 2.7 Crystalline Silicon and Epitaxial Stacked Layers 56 2.7.1 Stacked Crystalline Silicon Layer TFT for Six-Transistor SRAM Cell Technology 57 2.7.2 Stacked Silicon Layer S3 Process for Production SRAM 61 2.7.3 NAND Flash Memory Development Using Double-Stacked S3 Technology 64 2.7.4 4Gb NAND Flash Memory in 45 nm 3D Double-Stacked S3 Technology 66 References 69 3 Gate-All-Around (GAA) Nanowire for Vertical Memory 72 3.1 Overview of GAA Nanowire Memories 72 3.2 Single-Crystal Silicon GAA Nanowire CT Memories 72 3.2.1 Overview of Single-Crystal Silicon GAA CT Memories 72 3.2.2 An Early GAA Nanowire Single-Crystal Silicon CT Memory 73 3.2.3 Vertically Stacked Single-Crystal Silicon Twin Nanowire GAA CT Memories 74 3.2.4 GAA CT NAND Flash String Using One Single-Crystal SiNW 75 3.2.5 Single-Crystal SiNW CT Memory with High-κ Dielectric and Metal Gate 77 3.2.6 Improvement in Transient Vth Shift After Erase in 3D GAA NW SONOS 78 3.2.7 Semianalytical Model of GAA CT Memories 79 3.2.8 Nonvolatile GAA Single-Crystal Silicon Nanowire Memory on Bulk Substrate 79 3.3 Polysilicon GAA Nanowire CT Memories 82 3.3.1 Polysilicon CT Memories with NW Diameter Comparable to Polysilicon Grain Size 82 3.3.2 Various GAA Polysilicon NW Memory Configurations 83 3.3.3 Trapping Layer Enhanced Polysilicon NW SONOS 85 3.4 Junctionless GAA CT Nanowire Memories 88 3.4.1 3D Junctionless Vertical GAA Silicon NW SONOS Memories 88 3.4.2 Junctionless GAA SONOS Silicon Nanowire on Bulk Substrate for 3D NAND Stack 91 3.4.3 Modeling Erase in Cylindrical Junctionless CT Arrays 92 3.4.4 HfO2–Si3N4 Trap Layer in Junctionless Polycrystal GAA Memory Storage 95 3.5 3D Stacked Horizontal Nanowire Single-Crystal Silicon Memory 95 3.5.1 Process for 3D Stacked Horizontal NW Single-Crystal Silicon Memory 96 3.5.2 A Stacked Horizontal NW Single-Crystal Silicon NAND Flash Memory Development 98 3.6 Vertical Single-Crystal GAA CT Nanowire Flash Technology 103 3.6.1 Overview of Vertical Flash Using GAA SONOS Nanowire Technology 103 3.6.2 Vertical Single-Crystal Silicon 3D Flash Using GAA SONOS Nanowire 103 3.6.3 Fabrication of Two Independent GAA FETs on a Vertical SiNW 104 3.6.4 Vertical 3D Silicon Nanowire CT NAND Array 106 3.7 Vertical Channel Polysilicon GAA CT Memory 107 3.7.1 Multiple Vertical GAA Flash Cells Stacked Using Polysilicon NW Channel 107 3.7.2 Vth Shift Characteristics of Vertical GAA SONOS and/or TANOS Nonvolatile Memory 109 3.7.3 GAA Vertical Pipe CT Gate Replacement Technology 111 3.7.4 Bilayer Poly Channel Vertical Flash for 3D SONOS NAND 112 3.7.5 3D Vertical Pipe CT Low-Resistance (CoSi) Word-Line NAND Flash 112 3.7.6 Vertical Channel CT 3D NAND Flash Cell 114 3.7.7 Read Sensing for Thin-Body Vertical NAND 114 3.8 Graphene Channel Nonvolatile Memory with Al2O3–HfOx–Al2O3 Storage Layer 115 3.9 Cost Analysis for 3D GAA NAND Flash Considering Channel Slope 116 References 117 4 Vertical NAND Flash 119 4.1 Overview of 3D Vertical NAND Trends 119 4.1.1 3D Nonvolatile Memory Overview 119 4.1.2 Architectures of Various 3D NAND Flash Arrays 120 4.1.3 Scaling Trends for 2D and 3D NAND Cells 122 4.2 Vertical Channel (Pipe) CT NAND Flash Technology 124 4.2.1 BiCS CT Pipe NAND Flash Technology 124 4.2.2 Pipe-Shaped BiCS (P-BiCS) NAND Flash Technology 128 4.2.3 Vertical CT Vertical Recess Array Transistor (VRAT) Technology 138 4.2.4 Z-VRAT CT Memory Technology 139 4.2.5 Vertical NAND Chains—VSAT with “PIPE” Process 141 4.2.6 Vertical CT PIPE NAND Flash with Damascene Metal Gate TCAT/VNAND 142 4.2.7 3D NAND Flash SB-CAT Stack 145 4.3 3D FG NAND Flash Cell Arrays 146 4.3.1 3D FG NAND with Extended Sidewall Control Gate 146 4.3.2 3D FG NAND with Separated-Sidewall Control Gate 149 4.3.3 3D FG NAND Flash Cell with Dual CGs and Surrounding FG (DC-SF) 152 4.3.4 3D Vertical FG NAND with Sidewall Control Pillar 155 4.3.5 Trap Characterization in 3D Vertical Channel NAND Flash 157 4.3.6 Program Disturb Characteristics of 3D Vertical NAND Flash 158 4.4 3D Stacked NAND Flash with Lateral BL Layers and Vertical Gate 159 4.4.1 Introduction to Horizontal BL and Vertical Gate NAND Flash 159 4.4.2 A 3D Vertical Gate NAND Flash Process and Device Considerations 160 4.4.3 Vertical Gate NAND Flash Integration with Eight Active Layers 163 4.4.4 3D Stacked CT TFT Bandgap-Engineered SONOS NAND Flash Memory 165 4.4.5 Horizontal Channel Vertical Gate 3D NAND Flash with PN Diode Decoding 168 4.4.6 3D Vertical Gate BE-SONOS NAND Program Inhibit with Multiple Island Gate Decoding 169 4.4.7 3D Vertical Gate NAND Flash BL Decoding and Page Operation 171 4.4.8 An Eight-Layer Vertical Gate 3D NAND Architecture with Split-Page BL 173 4.4.9 Various Innovations for 3D Stackable Vertical Gate 176 4.4.10 Variability Considerations in 2D Vertical Gate 3D NAND Flash 180 4.4.11 An Etching Technology for Vertical Multilayers for 3D Vertical Gate NAND Flash 182 4.4.12 Interference, Disturb, and Programming Algorithms for MLC Vertical Gate NAND 183 4.4.13 3D Vertical Gate NAND Flash Program and Read and Fail-Bit Detection 184 4.4.14 3D p-Channel Stackable NAND Flash with Band-to-Band Tunnel Programming 185 4.4.15 A Bit-Alterable 3D NAND Flash with n-Channel and p-Channel NAND 187 References 189 5 3D Cross-Point Array Memory 192 5.1 Overview of Cross-Point Array Memory 192 5.2 A Brief Background of Cross-Point Array Memories 193 5.2.1 Construction of a Basic Cross-Point Array 193 5.2.2 Stacking Multibit Cross-Point Arrays 194 5.2.3 Methods of Stacking Cross-Point Arrays 196 5.2.4 Stacking Cross-Point Layers for High Density 197 5.2.5 An Example of Unipolar ReRAM 198 5.2.6 An Example of a Bipolar ReRAM 199 5.2.7 Basic Cross-Point Array Operation with a Diode Selector 200 5.2.8 Early Test Chip Using a ReRAM Cross-Point Array with Diode Selector 201 5.3 Low-Resistance Interconnects for Cross-Point Arrays 203 5.3.1 Model of Low Resistance Interconnects for Cross-Point Arrays 203 5.3.2 A Cross-Point Array Grid with Low-Resistivity Nanowires 206 5.3.3 A Cross-Point Array Using Two Nickel Core Nanowires 206 5.3.4 Resistive Memory Using Single-Wall Carbon Nanotubes 207 5.4 Cross-Point Array Memories Without Cell Selectors 207 5.4.1 Early Model of Bipolar Resistive Switch in Selectorless Cross-Point Array 208 5.4.2 Sneak Path Leakage in a Selectorless Cross-Point Array 210 5.4.3 Effect of Parasitic Resistance on Maximum Size of a Selectorless Cross-Point Array 212 5.4.4 Effect of Nonlinearity on I–V Characteristics of Selectorless Memory Element 215 5.4.5 Self-Rectifying ReRAM Requirements in Cross-Point Arrays 216 5.4.6 A Cross-Point Array Model for Line Resistance and Nonlinear Devices 217 5.5 Examples of Selectorless Cross-Point Arrays 217 5.5.1 Example of Nonlinearity in a Selectorless Cross-Point Array 217 5.5.2 Example of High-Resistive Memory Element in Selectorless Cross-Point Array 218 5.5.3 Design Techniques for Nonlinear Selectorless Cross-Point Arrays Using ReRAMs 221 5.5.4 Film Thickness and Scaling Effects in Cross-Point Selectorless ReRAM 222 5.5.5 Vertical HfOx ReRAM 3D Cross-Point Array Without Cell Selector 223 5.5.6 Dopant Selection Rules for Tuning HfOx ReRAM Characteristics 224 5.5.7 High-Resistance CB-ReRAM Memory Element to Avoid Sneak Current 225 5.5.8 Electromechanical Diode Cell for a Cross-Point Nonvolatile Memory Array 226 5.6 Unipolar Resistance RAMs with Diode Selectors in Cross-Point Arrays 227 5.6.1 Overview of Unipolar ReRAMS with Diode Selectors in Cross-Point Arrays 227 5.6.2 A Unipolar ReRAM with Silicon Diode for Cross-Point Array 228 5.6.3 CuOx–InZnOx Heterojunction Thin-Film Diode with NiO ReRAM 230 5.6.4 Unipolar NiO ReRAM Ireset and SET–RESET Instability 232 5.6.5 HfOx–AlOy Unipolar ReRAM with Silicon Diode Selector in Cross-Point Array 232 5.6.6 TiN–TaOx–Pt MIM Selector for Pt–TaOx–Pt Unipolar ReRAM Cross-Point Array 234 5.6.7 Self-Rectifying Unipolar Ni–HfOx Schottky Barrier ReRAM 234 5.6.8 Schottky Barriers for Self-Rectifying Unidirectional Cross-Point Array 236 5.6.9 Thermally Induced Set Operation for Unipolar ReRAM with Diode Selector 237 5.7 Unipolar PCM with Two-Terminal Diodes for Cross-Point Array 238 5.7.1 Background of Phase-Change Memory in a Cross-Point Array 238 5.7.2 PCMs in Cross-Point Arrays with Polysilicon Diodes 239 5.7.3 Cross-Point Array with PCM and Carbon Nanotube Electrode 240 5.7.4 Cross-Point Array with MIEC Access Devices and PCM Elements 241 5.7.5 Threshold Switching Access Devices for ReRAM Cross-Point Arrays 243 5.7.6 p–n Diode Selection Devices for PCM 244 5.7.7 Epitaxial Diode Selector for PCM in Cross-Point Arrays 245 5.7.8 Dual-Trench Epitaxial Diode Array for High-Density PCM 245 5.8 Bipolar Resistance RAMS With Selector Devices in Cross-Point Arrays 246 5.8.1 VO2 Select Device for Bipolar ReRAM in Cross-Point Array 246 5.8.2 Threshold Select Devices for Bipolar Memory Elements in Cross-Point Arrays 246 5.8.3 Vertical Bipolar Switching Polysilicon n–p–n Diode for Cross-Point Array 249 5.8.4 Two-Terminal Diode Steering Element for 3D Cross-Point ReRAM Array 250 5.8.5 Varistor-Type Bidirectional Switch for 3D Bipolar ReRAM Array 250 5.8.6 Bidirectional Threshold Vacuum Switch for 3D 4F2 Cross-Point Array 251 5.8.7 Bidirectional Schottky Diode Selector 252 5.8.8 Bipolar ReRAM with Schottky Self-Rectifying Behavior in the LRS 254 5.8.9 Self-Rectifying Bipolar ReRAM Using Schottky Barrier at Ta–TaOx Interface 255 5.8.10 Diode Effect of Pt–In2Ga2ZnO7 Layer in TiO2-type ReRAM 255 5.8.11 Confined NbO2 as a Selector in Bipolar ReRAMs 256 5.9 Complementary Switching Devices and Arrays 256 5.9.1 Complementary Resistive Switching for Dense Crossbar Arrays 256 5.9.2 CRS Memory Using Amorphous Carbon and CNTs 257 5.9.3 Complementary Switching in Metal–Oxide ReRAM for Crossbar Arrays 259 5.9.4 CRSs Using a Heterodevice 260 5.9.5 Self-Selective W–VO2–Pt ReRAM to Reduce Sneak Current in ReRAM Arrays 261 5.9.6 Hybrid Nb2O5–NbO2 ReRAMwith Combined Memory and Selector 263 5.9.7 Analysis of Complementary ReRAM Switching 264 5.9.8 Complementary Stacked Bipolar ReRAM Cross-Point Arrays 266 5.9.9 Complementary Switching Oxide-Based Bipolar ReRAM 266 5.10 Toward Manufacturable ReRAM Cells and Cross-point Arrays 267 5.10.1 28 nm ReRAM and Diode Cross-Point Array in CMOS-Compatible Process 267 5.10.2 Double-Layer 3D Vertical ReRAM for High-Density Arrays 268 5.10.3 Study of Cell Performance for Different Stacked ReRAM Geometries 269 5.11 STT Magnetic Tunnel Junction Resistance Switches in Cross-Point Array Architecture 269 5.11.1 High-Density Cross-Point STT Magnetic Tunnel Junction Architecture 269 References 271 6 3D Stacking of RAM–Processor Chips Using TSV 275 6.1 Overview of 3D Stacking of RAM–Processor Chips with TSV 275 6.2 Architecture and Design of TSV RAM–Processor Chips 280 6.2.1 Overview of Architecture and Design of Vertical TSV Connected Chips 280 6.2.2 Repartitioning For Performance by Increasing the Number of Memory Banks 280 6.2.3 Using a Global Clock Distribution Technique to Improve Performance 282 6.2.4 Stacking eDRAM Cache and Processor for Improved Performance 282 6.2.5 Using Decoupling Scheduling of the Memory Controller to Improve Performance 283 6.2.6 Repartitioning Multicore Processors and Stacked RAM for Improved Performance 283 6.2.7 Increasing Performance and Lowering Power in Low-Power Mobile Systems 287 6.2.8 Increasing Performance of Memory Hierarchies with 3D TSV Integration 287 6.2.9 Adding Storage-Class Memory to the Memory Hierarchy 289 6.2.10 Improving Performance Using 3D Stacked RAM Modeling 290 6.3 Process and Fabrication of Vertical TSV for Memory and Logic 292 6.3.1 Passive TSV Interposers for Stacked Memory–Logic Integration 292 6.3.2 Process Fabrication Methods and Foundries for Early 2.5D and 3D Integration 295 6.3.3 Integration with TSV Using a High-κ–Metal Gate CMOS Process 296 6.3.4 Processor with Deep Trench DRAM TSV Stacks and High-κ–Metal Gate 297 6.4 Process and Fabrication Issues of TSV 3D Stacking Technology 299 6.4.1 Using Copper TSV for 3D Stacking 299 6.4.2 Air Gaps for High-Performance TSV Interconnects for 3D ICs 300 6.5 Fabrication of TSVs 301 6.5.1 Using TSVs at Various Stages in the Process 301 6.5.2 Stacked Chips using Via-Middle Technology 303 6.6 Energy Efficiency Considerations of 3D Stacked Memory–Logic Chip Systems 306 6.6.1 Overview of Energy Efficiency in 3D Stacked Memory–Logic Chip Systems 306 6.6.2 Energy Efficiency for a 3D TSV Integrated DRAM–Controller System 306 6.6.3 Adding an SRAM Row Cache to Stacked 3D DRAM to Minimize Energy 308 6.6.4 Power Delivery Networks in 3D ICs 311 6.6.5 Using Near-Threshold Computing for Power Reduction in a 3D TSV System 312 6.7 Thermal Characterization Analysis and Modeling of RAM–Logic Stacks 314 6.7.1 Thermal Management of Hot Spots in 3D Chips 314 6.7.2 Thermal Management in 3D Chips Using an Interposer with Embedded TSV 314 6.7.3 Thermal Management of TSV DRAM Stacks with Logic 314 6.7.4 Thermal Management of a 3D TSV SRAM on Logic Stack 316 6.8 Testing of 3D Stacked TSV System Chips 316 6.8.1 Using BIST to Reduce Testing for a Logic and DRAM System Stack 316 6.8.2 Efficient BISR and Redundancy Allocation in 3D RAM–Logic Stacks 316 6.8.3 Direct Testing of Early SDRAM Stacks 319 6.9 Reliability Considerations with 3D TSV RAM–Processor Chips 320 6.9.1 Overview of Reliability Issues in 3D TSV Stacked RAM–Processor Chips 320 6.9.2 Variation Issues in Stacked 3D TSV RAM–Processor Chips 320 6.9.3 Switching and Decoupling Noise in a 3D TSV-Based System 321 6.9.4 TSV-Induced Mechanical Stress in CMOS 324 6.10 Reconfiguring Stacked TSV Memory Architectures for Improved Performance 326 6.10.1 Overview of Potential for Reconfigured Stacked Architectures 326 6.10.2 3D TSV-based 3D SRAM for High-Performance Platforms 326 6.10.3 Waveform Capture with 100 GB/s I/O, 4096 TSVs and an Active Si Interposer 329 6.10.4 3D Stacked FPGA and ReRAM Configuration Memory 330 6.10.5 Cache Architecture to Configure Stacked DRAM to Specific Applications 330 6.10.6 Network Platform for Stacked Memory–Processor Architectures 331 6.10.7 Multiplexing Signals to Reduce Number of TSVs in IC Die Stacking 332 6.10.8 3D Hybrid Cache with MRAM and SRAM Stacked on Processor Cores 333 6.10.9 CMOS FPGA and Routing Switches Made with ReRAM Devices 333 6.10.10 Dynamic Configurable SRAM Stacked with Various Logic Chips 333 6.11 Stacking Memories Using Noncontact Connections with Inductive Coupling 333 6.11.1 Overview of Noncontact Inductive Coupling of Stacked Memory 333 6.11.2 Early Concepts of Inductive-Coupling Connections of Stacked Memory Chips 334 6.11.3 Evolution of Inductive-Coupling Connections of NAND Flash Stacks 336 6.11.4 TCI for Replacing Stacking with TSV Connections 338 6.11.5 Processor–SRAM 3D Integration Using Inductive Coupling 339 6.11.6 Optical Interface for Future 3D Stacked Chip Connections 339 References 340 Index 345

Read more less

Book SynopsisEssentials of Machine Olfaction and Taste This book provides a valuable information source for olfaction and taste which includes a comprehensive and timely overview of the current state of knowledge of use for olfaction and taste machines Presents original, latest research in the field, with an emphasis on the recent development of human interfacingCovers the full range of artificial chemical senses including olfaction and taste, from basic through to advanced levelTimely project in that mobile robots, olfactory displays and odour recorders are currently under research, driven by commercial demandTable of ContentsPreface xi About the Contributors xiii 1 Introduction to Essentials of Machine Olfaction and Tastes 1Takamichi Nakamoto 2 Physiology of Chemical Sense and its Biosensor Application 3Ryohei Kanzaki, Kei Nakatani, Takeshi Sakurai, Nobuo Misawa and Hidefumi Mitsuno 2.1 Introduction 3 2.2 Olfaction and Taste of Insects 4 2.2.1 Olfaction 4 2.2.1.1 Anatomy of Olfaction 4 2.2.1.2 Signal Transduction of Odor Signals 6 2.2.1.3 Molecular Biology of Olfaction 7 2.2.2 Taste 8 2.2.2.1 Anatomy of Taste 8 2.2.2.2 Molecular Biology and Signal Transduction of Taste 9 2.3 Olfaction and Taste of Vertebrate 11 2.3.1 Olfaction 11 2.3.1.1 Anatomy of Olfaction 11 2.3.1.2 Transduction of Odor Signals 12 2.3.1.3 Molecular Biology of Olfaction 15 2.3.2 Taste 17 2.3.2.1 Anatomy of Taste 17 2.3.2.2 Transduction of Taste Signals 18 2.3.2.3 Molecular Biology of Taste 20 2.4 Cell‐Based Sensors and Receptor‐Based Sensors 21 2.4.1 Tissue‐Based Sensors 23 2.4.2 Cell‐Based Sensors 26 2.4.3 Receptor‐Based Sensors 30 2.4.3.1 Production of Odorant Receptors 34 2.4.3.2 Immobilization of Odorant Receptors 35 2.4.3.3 Measurement from Odorant Receptors 36 2.4.4 Summary of the Biosensors 41 2.5 Future Prospects 42 References 43 3 Large‐Scale Chemical Sensor Arrays for Machine Olfaction 49Mara Bernabei, Simone Pantalei and Krishna C. Persaud 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 Overview of Artificial Olfactory Systems 50 3.3 Common Sensor Technologies Employed in Artificial Olfactory Systems 53 3.3.1 Metal‐Oxide Gas Sensors 53 3.3.2 Piezoelectric Sensors 54 3.3.3 Conducting Polymer Sensors 55 3.4 Typical Application of “Electronic Nose” Technologies 58 3.5 A Comparison between Artificial and the Biological Olfaction Systems 58 3.6 A Large‐Scale Sensor Array 59 3.6.1 Conducting Polymers 60 3.6.2 Sensor Interrogation Strategy 62 3.6.3 Sensor Substrate 64 3.7 Characterization of the Large‐Scale Sensor Array 68 3.7.1 Pure Analyte Study: Classification and Quantification Capability 69 3.7.2 Binary Mixture Study: Segmentation and Background Suppression Capability 75 3.7.3 Polymer Classes: Testing Broad and Overlapping Sensitivity, High Level of Redundancy 76 3.7.4 System Robustness and Long‐Term Stability 77 3.8 Conclusions 79 Acknowledgment80 References 80 4 Taste Sensor: Electronic Tongue with Global Selectivity 87Kiyoshi Toko, Yusuke Tahara, Masaaki Habara, Yoshikazu Kobayashi and Hidekazu Ikezaki 4.1 Introduction 87 4.2 Electronic Tongues 90 4.3 Taste Sensor 92 4.3.1 Introduction 92 4.3.2 Principle 93 4.3.3 Response Mechanism 93 4.3.4 Measurement Procedure 97 4.3.5 Sensor Design Techniques 98 4.3.6 Basic Characteristics 103 4.3.6.1 Threshold 106 4.3.6.2 Global Selectivity 106 4.3.6.3 High Correlation with Human Sensory Scores 108 4.3.6.4 Definition of Taste Information 109 4.3.6.5 Detection of Interactions between Taste Substances 110 4.3.7 Sample Preparation 111 4.3.8 Analysis 112 4.4 Taste Substances Adsorbed on the Membrane 116 4.5 Miniaturized Taste Sensor 117 4.6 Pungent Sensor 122 4.7 Application to Foods and Beverages 124 4.7.1 Introduction 124 4.7.2 Beer 124 4.7.3 Coffee 127 4.7.4 Meat 132 4.7.5 Combinatorial Optimization Technique for Ingredients and Qualities Using a GA 134 4.7.5.2 Ga 134 4.7.5.3 Constrained Nonlinear Optimization 137 4.7.6 For More Effective Use of “Taste Information” 137 4.7.6.1 Key Concept 138 4.7.6.2 Taste Attributes or Qualities become Understandable and Translatable When They Are Simplified 138 4.7.6.3 Simplification of Large Numbers of Molecules into a Couple of Taste Qualities Allows Mathematical Optimization 140 4.7.6.4 Summary 141 4.8 Application to Medicines 141 4.8.1 Introduction 141 4.8.2 Bitterness Evaluation of APIs and Suppression Effect of Formulations 141 4.8.3 Development of Bitterness Sensor for Pharmaceutical Formulations 143 4.8.3.1 Sensor Design 143 4.8.3.2 Prediction of Bitterness Intensity and Threshold 144 4.8.3.3 Applications to Orally Disintegrating Tablets 146 4.8.3.4 Response Mechanism to APIs 154 4.8.4 Evaluation of Poorly Water‐Soluble Drugs 156 4.9 Perspectives 160 References 163 5 Pattern Recognition 175Saverio De Vito, Matteo Falasconi and Matteo Pardo 5.1 Introduction 175 5.2 Application Frameworks and Their Challenges 176 5.2.1 Common Challenges 176 5.2.2 Static In‐Lab Applications 177 5.2.3 On‐Field Applications 178 5.3 Unsupervised Learning and Data Exploration 180 5.3.1 Feature Extraction: Static and Dynamic Characteristics 180 5.3.2 Exploratory Data Analysis 184 5.3.3 Cluster Analysis 189 5.4 Supervised Learning 190 5.4.1 Classification: Detection and Discrimination of Analytes and Mixtures of Volatiles 192 5.4.2 Regression: Machine Olfaction Quantification Problems and Solutions 196 5.4.3 Feature Selection 200 5.5 Advanced Topics 202 5.5.1 System Instability Compensation 202 5.5.2 Calibration Transfer 208 5.6 Conclusions 210 References 211 6 Using Chemical Sensors as “Noses” for Mobile Robots 219Hiroshi Ishida, Achim J. Lilienthal, Haruka Matsukura, Victor Hernandez Bennetts and Erik Schaffernicht 6.1 Introduction 219 6.2 Task Descriptions 220 6.2.1 Definitions of Tasks 220 6.2.2 Characteristics of Turbulent Chemical Plumes 222 6.3 Robots and Sensors 224 6.3.1 Sensors for Gas Detection 224 6.3.2 Airflow Sensing 225 6.3.3 Robot Platforms 226 6.4 Characterization of Environments 226 6.5 Case Studies 230 6.5.1 Chemical Trail Following 230 6.5.2 Chemotactic Search versus Anemotactic Approach 232 6.5.3 Attempts to Improve Gas Source Localization Robots 236 6.5.4 Flying, Swimming, and Burrowing Robots 238 6.5.5 Gas Distribution Mapping 239 6.6 Future Prospective 241 Acknowledgment242 References 242 7 Olfactory Display and Odor Recorder 247Takamichi Nakamoto 7.1 Introduction 247 7.2 Principle of Olfactory Display 247 7.2.1 Olfactory Display Device 248 7.2.2 Olfactory Display Related to Spatial Distribution of Odor 250 7.2.3 Temporal Intensity Change of Odor 251 7.2.3.1 Problem of Smell Persistence 251 7.2.3.2 Olfactory Display Using Inkjet Device 254 7.2.4 Multicomponent Olfactory Display 256 7.2.4.1 Mass Flow Controller 256 7.2.4.2 Automatic Sampler 256 7.2.4.3 Solenoid Valve 258 7.2.4.4 Micropumps and Surface Acoustic Wave Atomizer 260 7.2.5 Cross Modality Interaction 261 7.3 Application of Olfactory Display 263 7.3.1 Entertainment 263 7.3.2 Olfactory Art 265 7.3.3 Advertisement 266 7.3.4 Medical Field 266 7.4 Odor Recorder 267 7.4.1 Background of Odor Recorder 267 7.4.2 Principle of Odor Recorder 268 7.4.3 Mixture Quantification Method 271 7.5.1 Odor Approximation 274 7.5.2 MIMO Feedback Method 276 7.5.3 Method to Increase Number of Odor Components 278 7.5.3.1 SVD Method 278 7.5.3.2 Two‐Level Quantization Method 280 7.5.4 Dynamic Method 283 7.5.4.1 Real‐Time Reference Method 284 7.5.4.2 Concurrent Method 287 7.5.5 Mixture Quantification Using Huge Number of Odor Candidates 289 7.6 Exploration of Odor Components 292 7.6.1 Introduction of Odor Components 292 7.6.2 Procedure for Odor Approximation 293 7.6.3 Simulation of Odor Approximation 295 7.6.4 Experiment on Essential Oil Approximation 297 7.6.5 Comparison of Distance Measure 301 7.6.6 Improvement of Odor Approximation 303 7.7 Teleolfaction 305 7.7.1 Concept of Teleolfaction 305 7.7.2 Implementation of Teleolfaction System 306 7.7.3 Experiment on Teleolfaction 307 7.8 Summary 308 References 309 8 Summary and Future Perspectives 315Takamichi Nakamoto Index 317

Read more less

Book SynopsisHelps readers understand and appreciate what the history of wind power can teach us about technology innovation and provides the implications for both wind power today and its future This book takes readers on a journey through the history of wind power in order to show how the technology evolved over the course of the twentieth century and where it may be headed in the twenty-first century. It introduces and examines broad themes such as government funding of wind power, the role of fossil fuels in wind power development, and the importance of entrepreneurs in wind power development. It also discusses the lessons learned from wind power technology innovation and makes them relevant to the understanding of wind power today and in the future. Spanning the entire history of wind power (1888-2018), The Wind Power Story: A Century of Innovation that Reshaped the Global Energy Landscape provides balanced coverage of each decade as well as the important wind poTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 The Wind Power Pioneers 1 1.1 Work of the Devil 1 1.2 The Danish Edison 7 1.3 The War of the Currents 12 1.4 The Colorado Connection 14 2 The Age of Small Wind 19 2.1 Networks of Power 19 2.2 An Interesting Twist 22 2.3 The Savior of the Windmills 25 2.4 From the Arctic to Antarctica 27 2.5 Rural Electrification 32 3 The Birth of Big Wind 37 3.1 The High Altitude Turbogenerator 37 3.2 The Soviets Advance 42 3.3 Victory 46 4 Wind Power's Giant Leap 53 4.1 The Winds of Cape Cod 53 4.2 Grandpa's Knob 58 4.3 A Dream Realized 60 4.4 A Lesson in Economics 63 5 Wind Power in the Wake of War 67 5.1 The Wind Power Aerogenerator 67 5.2 The Search for Tomorrow 72 5.3 The British Experiments 73 5.4 The Wind Power Schism 77 6 Wind Power's Invisible Solution 83 6.1 The Death of Windmills 83 6.2 The Return of Johannes Juul 88 6.3 Learning to Stall 91 6.4 Gedser Economics 95 7 The French Connection 101 7.1 The Duke's Invention 101 7.2 The Seeker 106 7.3 The Neyrpic Wind Turbines 110 8 Germany's Timeless Beauty 115 8.1 Wind Power in Wartime 115 8.2 Lighting Neuwerk Island 117 8.3 The Aesthete 119 8.4 The Blade Breakthrough 122 9 Wind Power's Silent Decade 129 9.1 The Pope's Speech 129 9.2 Silent Spring 134 9.3 The Gathering Storm 138 10 America's Next Moonshot 143 10.1 The Energy Crisis 143 10.2 Back to Ohio 148 10.3 The Turning Point 152 11 Denmark Reinvents Wind Power 159 11.1 Feared to Freeze 159 11.2 More Than a Carpenter 162 11.3 Let 100 Windmills Bloom 166 11.4 From Blacksmiths to Businessmen 168 12 The Wind King 175 12.1 Heronemus's Dream 175 12.2 California's Soft Energy Path 180 12.3 This Is the Place! 185 13 The California Wind Rush 191 13.1 The Deluge 191 13.2 The Danish Invasion 194 13.3 Brand New Day 199 14 Germany's Giant 207 14.1 Ulrich Hutter Returns 207 14.2 Bottoms Up 215 14.3 Our Common Future 218 15 Spain's Wind Power Miracle 223 15.1 A Hot Day in Madrid 223 15.2 Wind Policy Push 228 15.3 Denmark's Design 229 16 Europe Sails Ahead 237 16.1 Wind Power Reincarnated 237 16.2 The Wind Power Wizard 242 16.3 The Wind Virus 246 17 Reigniting American Wind Power 253 17.1 Picking up the Pieces 253 17.2 Iowa Innovates 257 17.3 The Selfish Invention 262 18 India's Wind Power Path 269 18.1 Coping with the Crisis 269 18.2 A Star Is Born 274 18.3 Gamesa Gets It 278 18.4 The Path Forward 279 19 China's Wind Power Surge 285 19.1 The Birth of Goldwind 285 19.2 The Rise of Sinovel 289 19.3 The Year of Adjustment 293 19.4 Sinovel's Stall 297 19.5 Recalibration 300 20 The Globalization of Wind Power 307 20.1 Into the Fire 307 20.2 The Final Frontier 311 20.3 A Stable Sunset 314 20.4 Around the World 317 20.5 The Tipping Point 318 20.6 Back to the Future 321 Index 329

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Handbook of Global Media and Communication Policy offers insights into the boundaries of this field of study, assesses why it is important, who is affected, and with what political, economic, social and cultural consequences.Table of ContentsFigures and Tables viii About the Editors x Notes on Contributors xi Series Editor’s Preface xvi Acknowledgements xvii 1 Introduction: Foundations of the Theory and Practice of Global Media and Communication Policy 1Robin Mansell and Marc Raboy Part I Contested Concepts: An Emerging Field 21 2 The Origins of International Agreements and Global Media: The Post, the Telegraph, and Wireless Communication Before World War I 23Ted Magder 3 The Evolution of GMCP Institutions 40Don MacLean 4 Whose Global Village? 58William H. Melody 5 Free Flow Doctrine in Global Media Policy 79Kaarle Nordenstreng 6 Human Rights and Their Role in Global Media and Communication Discourses 95Rikke Frank Jørgensen 7 Policy’s Hubris: Power, Fantasy, and the Limits of (Global) Media Policy Interventions 113Nico Carpentier Part II Democratization: Policy in Practice 129 8 Power Dynamics in Multi-stakeholder Policy Processes and Intra-civil Society Networking 131Bart Cammaerts 9 Media Reform in the United States and Canada: Activism and Advocacy for Media Policies in the Public Interest 147Leslie Regan Shade 10 Community Media in a Globalized World: The Relevance and Resilience of Local Radio 166Kate Coyer 11 Global Media Policy and Crisis States 180Monroe E. Price 12 The Post-Soviet Media and Communication Policy Landscape: The Case of Russia 192Andrei Richter 13 Public Service Broadcasting: Product (and Victim?) of Public Policy 210Karol Jakubowicz 14 User Rights for the Internet Age: Communications Policy According to “Netizens” 230Arne Hintz and Stefania Milan Part III Cultural Diversity: Contesting Power 243 15 Media Research and Public Policy: Tiding Over the Rupture 245Biswajit Das and Vibodh Parthasarathi 16 Whose Democracy? Rights-based Discourse and Global Intellectual Property Rights Activism 261Boatema Boateng 17 Global Media Policy and Cultural Pluralism 276Karim H. Karim 18 The Emergent Supranational Arab Media Policy Sphere 293Marwan M. Kraidy 19 The Mediterranean Arab Mosaic between Free Press Development and Unequal Exchanges with the “North” 306Jamal Eddine Naji 20 Rethinking Communication for Development Policy: Some Considerations 319Linje Manyozo 21 The UNESCO Convention on Cultural Diversity: Cultural Policy and International Trade in Cultural Products 336Peter S. Grant Part IV Markets and Globality 353 22 Economic Approaches to Media Policy 355Robert G. Picard 23 Postcolonial Media Policy Under the Long Shadow of Empire 366Amin Alhassan and Paula Chakravartty 24 Policy Imperialism: Bilateral Trade Agreements as Instruments of Media Governance 383Andrew Calabrese and Marco Briziarelli 25 ICT Policy-making and International Trade Agreements in the Caribbean 395Hopeton S. Dunn 26 Legislation, Regulation, and Management in the South African Broadcasting Landscape: A Case Study of the South African Broadcasting Corporation 414Ruth Teer-Tomaselli 27 Regulation as Linguistic Engineering 432Roberta G. Lentz Part V Governance: New Policy and Research Challenges 449 28 Gender and Communication Policy: Struggling for Space 451Margaret Gallagher 29 The Environment and Global Media and Communication Policy 467Richard Maxwell and Toby Miller 30 Anti-terrorism and the Harmonization of Media and Communication Policy 486Sandra Braman 31 Regulating the Internet in the Interests of Children: Emerging European and International Approaches 505Sonia Livingstone 32 From Television without Frontiers to the Digital Big Bang: The EU’s Continuous Efforts to Create a Future-proof Internal Media Market 525Caroline Pauwels and Karen Donders 33 Actors and Interactions in Global Communication Governance: The Heuristic Potential of a Network Approach 543Claudia Padovani and Elena Pavan Index 564

Read more less

Book SynopsisPower systems worldwide are going through a paradigm shift from centralized generation to distributed generation. This book presents the SYNDEM (i.e., synchronized and democratized) grid architecture and its technical routes to harmonize the integration of renewable energy sources, electric vehicles, storage systems, and flexible loads, with the synchronization mechanism of synchronous machines, to enable autonomous operation of power systems, and to promote energy freedom. This is a game changer for the grid. It is the sort of breakthrough like the touch screen in smart phones that helps to push an industry from one era to the next, as reported by Keith Schneider, a New York Times correspondent since 1982. This book contains an introductory chapter and additional 24 chapters in five parts: Theoretical Framework, First-Generation VSM (virtual synchronous machines), Second-Generation VSM, Third-Generation VSM, and Case Studies. Most of the chapters include experimental results. As the first book of its kind for power electronics-enabled autonomous power systems, it introduces a holistic architecture applicable to both large and small power systems, including aircraft power systems, ship power systems, microgrids, and supergrids provides latest research to address the unprecedented challenges faced by power systems and to enhance grid stability, reliability, security, resiliency, and sustainability demonstrates how future power systems achieve harmonious interaction, prevent local faults from cascading into wide-area blackouts, and operate autonomously with minimized cyber-attacks highlights the significance of the SYNDEM concept for power systems and beyond Power Electronics-Enabled Autonomous Power Systems is an excellent book for researchers, engineers, and students involved in energy and power systems, electrical and control engineering, and power electronics. The SYNDEM theoretical framework chapter is also suitable for policy makers, legislators, entrepreneurs, commissioners of utility commissions, energy and environmental agency staff, utility personnel, investors, consultants, and attorneys.Table of ContentsList of Figures xix List of Tables xxxiii Foreword xxxv Preface xxxvii Acknowledgments xxxix About the Author xli List of Abbreviations xliii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Motivation and Purpose 1 1.2 Outline of the Book 3 1.3 Evolution of Power Systems 7 1.3.1 Today’s Grids 8 1.3.2 Smart Grids 8 1.3.3 Next-Generation Smart Grids 8 1.4 Summary 10 Part I Theoretical Framework 11 2 Synchronized and Democratized (SYNDEM) Smart Grid 13 2.1 The SYNDEM Concept 13 2.2 SYNDEM Rule of Law – Synchronization Mechanism of Synchronous Machines 15 2.3 SYNDEM Legal Equality – Homogenizing Heterogeneous Players as Virtual Synchronous Machines (VSM) 18 2.4 SYNDEM Grid Architecture 19 2.4.1 Architecture of Electrical Systems 19 2.4.2 Overall Architecture 22 2.4.3 Typical Scenarios 23 2.5 Potential Benefits 24 2.6 Brief Description of Technical Routes 28 2.6.1 The First-Generation (1G) VSM 28 2.6.2 The Second-Generation (2G) VSM 29 2.6.3 The Third-Generation (3G) VSM 29 2.7 Primary Frequency Response (PFR) in a SYNDEM Smart Grid 30 2.7.1 PFR from both Generators and Loads 31 2.7.2 Droop 31 2.7.3 Fast Action Without Delay 31 2.7.4 Reconfigurable Virtual Inertia 31 2.7.5 Continuous PFR 32 2.8 SYNDEM Roots 32 2.8.1 SYNDEM and Taoism 32 2.8.2 SYNDEM and Chinese History 33 2.9 Summary 34 3 Ghost Power Theory 35 3.1 Introduction 35 3.2 Ghost Operator, Ghost Signal, and Ghost System 36 3.2.1 The Ghost Operator 36 3.2.2 The Ghost Signal 37 3.2.3 The Ghost System 39 3.3 Physical Meaning of Reactive Power in Electrical Systems 41 3.4 Extension to Complete the Electrical-Mechanical Analogy 43 3.5 Generalization to Other Energy Systems 46 3.6 Summary and Discussions 47 Part II 1G VSM: Synchronverters 49 4 Synchronverter Based Generation 51 4.1 Mathematical Model of Synchronous Generatorss 51 4.1.1 The Electrical Part 51 4.1.2 The Mechanical Part 53 4.1.3 Presence of a Neutral Line 54 4.2 Implementation of a Synchronverter 55 4.2.1 The Power Part 56 4.2.2 The Electronic Part 56 4.3 Operation of a Synchronverter 57 4.3.1 Regulation of Real Power and Frequency Droop Control 57 4.3.2 Regulation of Reactive Power and Voltage Droop Control 58 4.4 Simulation Results 59 4.4.1 Under Different Grid Frequencies 60 4.4.2 Under Different Load Conditions 62 4.5 Experimental Results 62 4.5.1 Grid-connected Set Mode 63 4.5.2 Grid-connected Droop Mode 63 4.5.3 Grid-connected Parallel Operation 63 4.5.4 Seamless Transfer of the Operation Mode 64 4.6 Summary 67 5 Synchronverter Based Loads 69 5.1 Introduction 69 5.2 Modeling of a Synchronous Motor 70 5.3 Operation of a PWM Rectifier as a VSM 71 5.3.1 Controlling the Power 72 5.3.2 Controlling the DC-bus Voltage 73 5.4 Simulation Results 74 5.4.1 Controlling the Power 74 5.4.2 Controlling the DC-bus Voltage 76 5.5 Experimental Results 77 5.5.1 Controlling the Power 77 5.5.2 Controlling the DC-bus Voltage 77 5.6 Summary 79 6 Control of Permanent Magnet Synchronous Generator (PMSG) Based Wind Turbines 81 6.1 Introduction 81 6.2 PMSG Based Wind Turbines 83 6.3 Control of the Rotor-Side Converter 83 6.4 Control of the Grid-Side Converter 85 6.5 Real-time Simulation Results 86 6.5.1 Under Normal Grid Conditions 87 6.5.2 Under Grid Faults 89 6.6 Summary 90 7 Synchronverter Based AC Ward Leonard Drive Systems 91 7.1 Introduction 91 7.2 Ward Leonard Drive Systems 93 7.3 Model of a Synchronous Generator 95 7.4 Control Scheme with a Speed Sensor 96 7.4.1 Control Structure 96 7.4.2 System Analysis and Parameter Selection 97 7.5 Control Scheme without a Speed Sensor 98 7.5.1 Control Structure 98 7.5.2 System Analysis and Parameter Selection 99 7.6 Experimental Results 100 7.6.1 Case 1: With a Speed Sensor for Feedback 101 7.6.2 Case 2: Without a Speed Sensor for Feedback 104 7.7 Summary 106 8 Synchronverter without a Dedicated Synchronization Unit 107 8.1 Introduction 107 8.2 Interaction of a Synchronous Generator (SG) with an Infinite Bus 109 8.3 Controller for a Self-synchronized Synchronverter 110 8.3.1 Operation after Connection to the Grid 112 8.3.2 Synchronization before Connection to the Grid 113 8.4 Simulation Results 114 8.4.1 Normal Operation 114 8.4.2 Operation under Grid Faults 118 8.5 Experimental Results 119 8.5.1 Case 1: With the Grid Frequency Below 50 Hz 119 8.5.2 Case 2: With the Grid Frequency Above 50 Hz 123 8.6 Benefits of Removing the Synchronization Unit 123 8.7 Summary 124 9 Synchronverter Based Loads without a Dedicated Synchronisation Unit 125 9.1 Controlling the DC-bus Voltage 125 9.1.1 Self-synchronization 125 9.1.2 Normal Operation 126 9.2 Controlling the Power 127 9.3 Simulation Results 127 9.3.1 Controlling the DC-bus Voltage 128 9.3.2 Controlling the Power 130 9.4 Experimental Results 131 9.4.1 Controlling the DC-bus Voltage 132 9.4.2 Controlling the Power 132 9.5 Summary 134 10 Control of a DFIG Based Wind Turbine as a VSG (DFIG-VSG) 135 10.1 Introduction 135 10.2 DFIG Based Wind Turbines 137 10.3 Differential Gears and Ancient Chinese South-pointing Chariots 138 10.4 Analogy between a DFIG and Differential Gears 139 10.5 Control of a Grid-side Converter 140 10.5.1 DC-bus Voltage Control 141 10.5.2 Unity Power Factor Control 141 10.5.3 Self-synchronization 142 10.6 Control of the Rotor-Side Converter 142 10.6.1 Frequency Control 143 10.6.2 Voltage Control 143 10.6.3 Self-synchronization 144 10.7 Regulation of System Frequency and Voltage 145 10.8 Simulation Results 146 10.9 Experimental Results 150 10.10 Summary 153 11 Synchronverter Based Transformerless Photovoltaic Systems 155 11.1 Introduction 155 11.2 Leakage Currents and Grounding of Grid-tied Converters 156 11.2.1 Ground, Grounding, and Grounded Systems 156 11.2.2 Leakage Currents in a Grid-tied Converter 158 11.2.3 Benefits of Providing a Common AC and DC Ground 159 11.3 Operation of a Conventional Half-bridge Inverter 160 11.3.1 Reduction of Leakage Currents 161 11.3.2 Output Voltage Range 161 11.4 A Transformerless PV Inverter 161 11.4.1 Topology 161 11.4.2 Control of the Neutral Leg 161 11.4.3 Control of the Inversion Leg as a VSM 164 11.5 Real-time Simulation Results 165 11.6 Summary 167 12 Synchronverter Based STATCOM without an Dedicated Synchronization Unit 169 12.1 Introduction 169 12.2 Conventional Control of STATCOM 170 12.2.1 Operational Principles 171 12.2.2 Typical Control Strategy 172 12.3 Synchronverter Based Control 173 12.3.1 Regulation of the DC-bus Voltage and Synchronization with the Grid 173 12.3.2 Operation in the Q-mode to Regulate the Reactive Power 175 12.3.3 Operation in the V-mode to Regulate the PCC Voltage 176 12.3.4 Operation in the VD-mode to Droop the Voltage 176 12.4 Simulation Results 177 12.4.1 System Description 177 12.4.2 Connection to the Grid 179 12.4.3 Normal Operation in Different Modes 180 12.4.4 Operation under Extreme Conditions 181 12.5 Summary 185 13 Synchronverters with Bounded Frequency and Voltage 187 13.1 Introduction 187 13.2 Model of the Original Synchronverter 188 13.3 Achieving Bounded Frequency and Voltage 189 13.3.1 Control Design 190 13.3.2 Existence of a Unique Equilibrium 193 13.3.3 Convergence to the Equilibrium 197 13.4 Real-time Simulation Results 199 13.5 Summary 202 14 Virtual Inertia, Virtual Damping, and Fault Ride-through 203 14.1 Introduction 203 14.2 Inertia, the Inertia Time Constant, and the Inertia Constant 204 14.3 Limitation of the Inertia of a Synchronverter 206 14.4 Reconfiguration of the Inertia Time Constant 210 14.4.1 Design and Outcome 210 14.4.2 What is the Catch? 211 14.5 Reconfiguration of the Virtual Damping 212 14.5.1 Through Impedance Scaling with an Inner-loop Voltage Controller 213 14.5.2 Through Impedance Insertion with an Inner-loop Current Controller 214 14.6 Fault Ride-through 214 14.6.1 Analysis 214 14.6.2 Recommended Design 215 14.7 Simulation Results 215 14.7.1 A Single VSM 216 14.7.2 Two VSMs in Parallel Operation 217 14.8 Experimental Results 221 14.8.1 A Single VSM 221 14.8.2 Two VSMs in Parallel Operation 222 14.9 Summary 225 Part III 2G VSM: Robust Droop Controller 227 15 Synchronization Mechanism of Droop Control 229 15.1 Brief Review of Phase-Locked Loops (PLLs) 229 15.1.1 Basic PLL 229 15.1.2 Enhanced PLL (EPLL) 230 15.2 Brief Review of Droop Control 232 15.3 Structural Resemblance between Droop Control and PLL 234 15.3.1 When the Impedance is Inductive 234 15.3.2 When the Impedance is Resistive 236 15.4 Operation of a Droop Controller as a Synchronization Unit 238 15.5 Experimental Results 239 15.5.1 Synchronization with the Grid 239 15.5.2 Connection to the Grid 240 15.5.3 Operation in the Droop Mode 241 15.5.4 Robustness of Synchronization 241 15.5.5 Change in the Operation Mode 242 15.6 Summary 243 16 Robust Droop Control 245 16.1 Control of Inverter Output Impedance 245 16.1.1 Inverters with Inductive Output Impedances (L-inverters) 245 16.1.2 Inverters with Resistive Output Impedances (R-inverters) 246 16.1.3 Inverters with Capacitive Output Impedances (C-inverters) 247 16.2 Inherent Limitations of Conventional Droop Control 248 16.2.1 Basic Principle 248 16.2.2 Experimental Phenomena 250 16.2.3 Real Power Sharing 251 16.2.4 Reactive Power Sharing 252 16.3 Robust Droop Control of R-inverters 252 16.3.1 Control Strategy 252 16.3.2 Error due to Inaccurate Voltage Measurements 253 16.3.3 Voltage Regulation 254 16.3.4 Error due to the Global Settings for E∗ and 𝜔∗ 254 16.3.5 Experimental Results 255 16.4 Robust Droop Control of C-inverters 261 16.4.1 Control Strategy 261 16.4.2 Experimental Results 262 16.5 Robust Droop Control of L-inverters 262 16.5.1 Control Strategy 262 16.5.2 Experimental Results 265 16.6 Summary 268 17 Universal Droop Control 269 17.1 Introduction 269 17.2 Further Insights into Droop Control 270 17.2.1 Parallel Operation of Inverters with the Same Type of Impedance 271 17.2.2 Parallel Operation of L-, R-, and RL-inverters 272 17.2.3 Parallel Operation of RC-, R-, and C-inverters 273 17.3 Universal Droop Controller 275 17.3.1 Basic Principle 275 17.3.2 Implementation 276 17.4 Real-time Simulation Results 277 17.5 Experimental Results 277 17.5.1 Case I: Parallel Operation of L- and C-inverters 277 17.5.2 Case II: Parallel Operation of L-, C-, and R-inverters 279 17.6 Summary 281 18 Self-synchronized Universal Droop Controller 283 18.1 Description of the Controller 283 18.2 Operation of the Controller 285 18.2.1 Self-synchronization Mode 285 18.2.2 Set Mode (P-mode and Q-mode) 286 18.2.3 Droop Mode (PD-mode and QD-mode) 286 18.3 Experimental Results 287 18.3.1 R-inverter with Self-synchronized Universal Droop Control 288 18.3.2 L-inverter with Self-synchronized Universal Droop Control 290 18.3.3 L-inverter with Self-synchronized Robust Droop Control 294 18.4 Real-time Simulation Results from a Microgrid 297 18.5 Summary 300 19 Droop-Controlled Loads for Continuous Demand Response 301 19.1 Introduction 301 19.2 Control Framework with a Three-port Converter 302 19.2.1 Generation of the Real Power Reference 302 19.2.2 Regulation of the Power Drawn from the Grid 304 19.2.3 Analysis of the Operation Modes 305 19.2.4 Determination of the Capacitance for Grid Support 306 19.3 An Illustrative Implementation with the 𝜃-converter 308 19.3.1 Brief Description about the 𝜃-converter 309 19.3.2 Control of the Neutral Leg 310 19.3.3 Control of the Conversion Leg 311 19.4 Experimental Results 311 19.4.1 Design of the Experimental System 311 19.4.2 Steady-state Performance 312 19.4.3 Transient Performance 315 19.4.4 Capacity Potential 317 19.4.5 Comparative Study 318 19.5 Summary 319 20 Current-limiting Universal Droop Controller 321 20.1 Introduction 321 20.2 System Modeling 322 20.3 Control Design 323 20.3.1 Structure 323 20.3.2 Implementation 323 20.4 System Analysis 326 20.4.1 Current-limiting Property 326 20.4.2 Closed-loop Stability 327 20.4.3 Selection of Control Parameters 328 20.5 Practical Implementation 329 20.6 Operation under Grid Variations and Faults 330 20.7 Experimental Results 331 20.7.1 Operation under Normal Conditions 332 20.7.2 Operation under Grid Faults 334 20.8 Summary 338 Part IV 3G VSM: Cybersync Machines 339 21 Cybersync Machines 341 21.1 Introduction 341 21.2 Passivity and Port-Hamiltonian Systems 343 21.2.1 Passive Systems 343 21.2.2 Port-Hamiltonian Systems 343 21.2.3 Passivity of Interconnected Passive Systems 345 21.3 System Modeling 346 21.4 Control Framework 348 21.4.1 The Engendering Block Σe 349 21.4.2 Generation of the Desired Frequency 𝜔d and Flux 𝜑d 350 21.4.3 Design of Σ𝜔 and Σ𝜑 to Obtain a Passive ΣC 351 21.5 Passivity of the Controller 352 21.5.1 Losslessness of the Interconnection Block ΣI 352 21.5.2 Passivity of the Cascade of ΣC and ΣI 354 21.6 Passivity of the Closed-loop System 355 21.7 Sample Implementations for Blocks Σ𝜔 and Σ𝜑 355 21.7.1 Using the Standard Integral Controller (IC) 355 21.7.2 Using a Static Controller 356 21.8 Self-Synchronization and Power Regulation 357 21.9 Simulation Results 358 21.9.1 Self-synchronization 360 21.9.2 Operation after Connection to the Grid 360 21.10 Experimental Results 362 21.10.1 Self-synchronization 362 21.10.2 Operation after Connection to the Grid 363 21.11 Summary 364 Part V Case Studies 365 22 A Single-node System 367 22.1 SYNDEM Smart Grid Research and Educational Kit 367 22.1.1 Overview 367 22.1.2 Hardware Structure 368 22.1.3 Sample Conversion Topologies Attainable 369 22.2 Details of the Single-Node SYNDEM System 375 22.2.1 Description of the System 375 22.2.2 Experimental Results 377 22.3 Summary 378 23 A 100% Power Electronics Based SYNDEM Smart Grid Testbed 379 23.1 Description of the Testbed 379 23.1.1 Overall Structure 379 23.1.2 VSM Topologies Adopted 379 23.1.3 Individual Nodes 382 23.2 Experimental Results 384 23.2.1 Operation of Energy Bridges 384 23.2.2 Operation of Solar Power Nodes 384 23.2.3 Operation of Wind Power Nodes 386 23.2.4 Operation of the DC-Load Node 388 23.2.5 Operation of the AC-Load Node 389 23.2.6 Operation of the Whole Testbed 391 23.3 Summary 393 24 A Home Grid 395 24.1 Description of the Home Grid 395 24.2 Results from Field Operations 396 24.2.1 Black start and Grid forming 396 24.2.2 From Islanded to Grid-tied Operation 399 24.2.3 Seamless Mode Change when the Public Grid is Lost and Recovered 400 24.2.4 Voltage/Frequency Regulation and Power Sharing 400 24.3 Unexpected Problems Emerged During the Field Trial 402 24.4 Summary 404 25 Texas Panhandle Wind Power System 405 25.1 Geographical Description 405 25.2 System Structure 406 25.3 Main Challenges 407 25.4 Overview of Control Strategies Compared 407 25.4.1 VSM Control 408 25.4.2 DQ Control 410 25.5 Simulation Results 411 25.5.1 VSM Control 412 25.5.2 DQ Control 415 25.6 Summary and Conclusions 416 Bibliography 417 Index 441

Read more less